巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Suttavāda: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Sautrāntika] 経部, 経量部[部派の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sutti: {'def': '【阴】珍珠贝（莺蛤一种〔莺蛤属 Pinctada〕和有关热带水域属的双壳海生软体动物，尤指—珠母贝属 (Pinctadamargaritifera)，为珍珠的主要商业来源）。(p347)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (f.) [Sk. sūkti] a good saying Sdhp.340, 617. (Page 718)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】珍珠贝(pearl oyster﹐莺蛤一种〔莺蛤属 Pinctada〕和有关热带水域属的双壳海生软体动物，尤指—珠母贝属 (Pinctada margaritifera)，为珍珠的主要商业来源)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [cp. Sk. śukti, given as pearl-shell (Suśruta), and as a perfume] in kuruvindakasutti a powder for rubbing the body Vin.II,107; see sotti. (Page 718)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suva: {'def': '[cp. Sk. śuka] a parrot J.I,324; IV,277 sq.; VI,421; 431 sq. (the two: Pupphaka & Sattigumba); DhA.I,284 (°rājā). fem. suvī J.VI,421. (Page 720)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鹦鹉。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】鹦鹉(parrot)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Suvaca: {'def': '参考 Subbaca。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(su好+vaca说),【形】好教(ㄐㄧㄠ)，好调教，温顺的，顺从的。【反】难调教(du-bbaco)(《杂阿含1138经》译作：难可教授)。参考 Subbaca。Puggalapaññatti(PTS:p.16；CS:p.127.)︰Katamo ca puggalo suvaco? Tattha katamā sovacassatā? Sahadhammike vuccamāne sovacassāyaṁ sovacassiyaṁ sovacassatā avippaṭikulaggāhitā avipaccanīkasātatā sādariyaṁ sādariyatā sagāravatā sappatissavatā--ayaṁ vuccati sovacassatā. Imāya sovacassatāya samannāgato puggalo “suvaco”.(什么人是好教的人呢？在这里什么是好教性呢？当以(正)法劝说时，受谏、好教、好教性、不采取敌对、不反对、尊敬、尊敬性、恭敬性、赞同性--这被称为好教性。具足这好教性是：好教的人。)。《中部》《思量经》说十六种难调教者：1.恶欲(pāpiccho。《增支部注》AA.6.36./III,364.：恶欲：产生不安份之欲者是无戒者)。2.自赞毁他(attukkaṁsako hoti paravambhī；梵ātmotkarsa-para-paṃsaka, ātmôtkarsa-para-paṃsanā)。3.忿怒，被忿怒所支配(na kodhano hoti na kodhābhibhūto)。4.因忿怒而报复(kodhahetu upanāhī)。5.因忿怒而顽固(kodhahetu abhisaṅgī)。6.因忿怒而发忿怒之语(kodhasāmantā vācaṁ nicchāretā)。7.被谏诲(或责备)时敌对谏诲者(codito codakena codakaṁ paṭippharati)。8.被责备时轻视(apasādeti)责备者。9.被谏诲时反诘(paccāropeti(paṭi反+āropeti检举)) 谏诲者。10.以忿怒避开话题(aññenaññaṁ paṭicarati)，顾左右而言他(bahiddhā外kathaṁ论 apanāmeti驱逐)，而现忿恨(kopa)、瞋恚(dosa)、不满(appaccaya)。11.被谏诲时引喻失义(apadāne na sampāyati)。12.覆恶者(makkhī)、恼害者(paḷāsī)。13.嫉者(issukī)、悭者(maccharī)。14.狡诈者(saṭho)、诈瞒者(māyāvī)。15.傲顽(thaddho)、过慢者(atimānī)。16.染於世俗者(sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī)，固执己见者(ādhānaggāhī)，为难舍性者(duppaṭinissaggī)。(M.15./I,95~96.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Suvammita: {'def': '【过分】已上好马具，已披上甲胄。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已上好马具，已披上甲胄。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suvanaya: {'def': '[su-v-ānaya] easy to bring S.I,124=J.I,80. (Page 720)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suvatthi: {'def': '(su + atthi), 万岁！(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(su+atthi), 万岁！', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Suvavatthāpita: {'def': '【形】定义好的，确定好的。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】定义好的，确定好的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Suvaṇṇa: {'def': '[Sk. suvarṇa] of good colour, good, favoured, beautiful D.I,82; Dhs.223; It.99; A.IV,255; Pug.60; J.I,226; suvaṇṇa (nt.) gold S.IV,325 sq.; Sn.48, 686; Nd² 687 (=jātarūpa); KhA 240; VvA.104; often together with hirañña Vin.III,16, 48; D.II,179; °-āni pl. precious things J.I,206. -- Cp. soṇṇa.

--iṭṭhakā gilt tiles DhA.III,29, 61; VvA.157. --kāra goldsmith D.I,78; M.II,18; III,243; A.I,253 sq.; J.I,182; V,438 sq.; Nd¹ 478; Vism.376 (in sim.); DhA.III,340; SnA 15; VbhA.222 (in sim.). --gabbha a safe (-room) for gold DhA.IV,105. --guhā “golden cave,” N. of a cave SnA 66. --toraṇa gilt spire VbhA.112. --paṭṭa a golden (writing) slab J.IV,7; SnA 228, 578; DhA.IV,89. --paṇaka a golden diadem Miln.210. --pabbata N. of a mountain SnA 358. --passa id. SnA 66. --pādukā golden slippers Vin.I,15. --maya made of gold J.I,146. --mālā golden garland DhA.I,388. --meṇḍaka a golden ram DhA.III,364; IV,217; --bhiṅkāra a g. vase Mhbv 154 --bhūmi “gold-land,” N. of Cambodia Nd¹ 155. --rājahaṁsa golden-coloured royal mallard J.I,342. --vaṇṇa gold-coloured (of the body of the Yathāgata) D.III,143, 159; J.II,104; IV,333; DhA.III,113. --vīthi golden street (in Indra’s town) J.V,386. --sivikā a g. litter DhA.III,164. --haṁsa golden swan J.I,207; II,353; SnA 277, 349. (Page 720)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】黄金。【形】好颜色，美丽的。 ~kāra, 【阳】金匠。 ~gabbha,【阳】黄金的保险室。 ~guhā, 【阴】金洞（山洞）。 ~tā, 【阴】肤色的美。 ~paṭṭa, 【中】金片。 ~pīṭhaka, 【中】金椅。 ~maya, 【形】金制的。 ~bhiṅkāra, 【阳】金水罐。 ~vaṇṇa, 【形】金色的。 ~haŋsa, 【阳】金天鹅。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】黄金。【形】好顔色，美丽的。suvaṇṇakāra,【阳】金匠。suvaṇṇagabbha,【阳】黄金的保险室。suvaṇṇaguhā,【阴】金洞(山洞)。suvaṇṇatā,【阴】肤色的美。suvaṇṇapaṭṭa,【中】金片。suvaṇṇapīṭhaka,【中】金椅。suvaṇṇamaya,【形】金制的。suvaṇṇabhiṅkāra,【阳】金水罐。suvaṇṇavaṇṇa,【形】金色的。suvaṇṇahaṁsa,【阳】金天鹅。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Suvaṇṇabhūmi: {'def': 'f. 金地(国), [ビルマの海岸地方].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 金地(國), [緬甸的海岸地方].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》李瑩譯词数 708.'}

Suvaṇṇatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. suvaṇṇa] beauty of colour or complexion Pug.34. (Page 720)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suve: {'def': 'see sve. (Page 720)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】明天。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】明天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Suvibhatta: {'def': '(‹ su-vi-bhaj, suvi-bhajati),【过分】已被完善分别、解说，已分好，已安排好。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已分好，已安排好。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suvijāna: {'def': '【形】容易明白的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】容易明白的。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suvilitta: {'def': '【过分】已涂好香。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已涂好香。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suvimhita: {'def': '【过分】已很惊讶。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已很惊讶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Suvimuttacitta: {'def': '【阳】心得善解脱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Suvisada: {'def': '【形】非常清楚的。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】非常清楚的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Suviññāpaya: {'def': '【形】容易教的，容易指导的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】容易教的，容易指导的。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suvuṭṭhika: {'def': '【形】有很多雨的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有很多雨的。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suvāmin: {'def': '[metric for sāmin] a master Sn.666. (Page 720)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suvāṇa: {'def': '【阳】狗。suvāṇadoṇi, 狗的食盆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& suvāna) [cp. Sk. śvan, also śvāna (f. śvānī): fr. Vedic Acc. śuvānaṁ, of śvan. For etym. cp. Gr. ku/wn, Av. spā, Lat. canis, Oir. cū, Goth. hunds] a dog M.III,91 (=supāṇa M.I,58); J.VI,247 (the 2 dogs of hell: Sabala & Sāma); Vism.259 (=supāṇa KhA 58). As suvā° at Sdhp.379, 408. -- See also the var. forms san, suṇa, suna, sunakha, supāṇa, soṇa.

--doṇi a dog’s (feeding) trough Vism.344, 358; VbhA.62. --piṇḍa a dog biscuit Vism.344. --vamathu dog’s vomit Vism.344 (=suvā-vanta Sdhp.379). (Page 720)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】狗。 ~doṇi, 狗的食盆。(p350)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suyiṭṭha: {'def': '【形】善供奉的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】善供奉的。(p349)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suyutta: {'def': '【形】安排得好的，很适合的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】安排得好的，很适合的。(p349)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suyyati: {'def': 'is Passive of suṇāti. (Page 720)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suñña: {'def': '【形】空的，空虚的。 ~gāma, 【阳】废村。 ~tā, 【阴】空虚。 ~agāra,【中】空屋，偏僻处。(p347)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. śūnya, fr. Vedic śūna, nt., void] 1. empty, uninhabited D.I,17; II,202; S.I,180; IV,173; DA.I,110; Miln.5. -- 2. empty, devoid of reality, unsubstantial, phenomenal M.I,435; S.III,167; IV,54, 296; Sn.1119; Nd¹ 439 (loka). -- 3. empty, void, useless M.I,483; S.IV,54, 297; Dāvs.V,17; Miln.96; Vism.594 sq. (of nāmarūpa, in simile with suñña dāruyanta). suññasuñña empty of permanent substance Ps.II,178; asuñña not empty Miln.130. -- nt. suññaṁ emptiness, annihilation, Nibbāna Vism.513 (three nirodha-suññāni); Abl. °to from the point of view of the “Empty” Nd² 680 (long exegesis of suññato at Sn.1119); Vism.512; VbhA.89, 261; KhA 74.

--āgāra an empty place, an uninhabited spot, solitude Vin.I,97, 228; II,158, 183; III,70, 91 sq.; D.I,175; II,86; 291, M.I,33; S.IV,133, 359 sq.; A.III,353; IV,139, 392, 437; V,109, 207, 323 sq.; It.39; J.III,191; Miln.344; Vism.270; Nd² 94. --gāma an empty (deserted) village (in similes) Vism.484; VbhA.48; Dhs.597; DhsA.309; °tthāna Vism.353; VbhA.57. (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵wūnya),【形】空的，空虚的。suññagāma,【阳】废村。suññatā,【阴】空虚，空性。suññagāra,【中】空屋，偏僻处。suññatāvihārena bahulaṁ viharāmi,我多住空性住。‘esā…yathābhuccā avipallatthā parisuddhā suññatāvakkanti bhavati.’(此如实的、不颠倒的、清净的是空性之语。) tassa ajjhattaṁ suññataṁ manasikaroto ajjhattaṁ suññatāya cittaj na pakkhandati nappasīdati na santiṭṭhati na vimuccati.(彼作意内空已，依(作意)内空心不踊跃，不欣乐，不安住，不解脱。) durgrhītā wūnyatā,【梵】恶取空。sarvaṃ wūnyam,【梵】一切皆空。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Suññata: {'def': '(adj.) [i. e. the Abl. suññato used as adj. Nom.] void, empty, devoid of lusts, evil dispositions, and karma, but especially of soul, ego Th.2, 46; ThA.50; Dhs.344; Mhvs 37, 7; nibbāna DhsA.221; phassa S.IV,295; vimokkha Dh.92; DhA.II,172; Miln.413; vimokkha samādhi, and samāpatti Vin.III,92 sq.; IV,25 sq.; samādhi (contemplation of emptiness, see Cpd. 216) D.III,219 (one of. three samādhis); S.IV,360, 363; Miln.337; anupassanā Ps.II,43 sq. (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suññatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. suñña] emptiness, the state of being devoid DhsA.221. (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suññatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. suñña] emptiness, “void,” unsubstantiality, phenomenality; freedom from lust, ill-will, and dullness, Nibbāna M.III,111; Kvu 232; DhsA.221; Nett 118 sq., 123 sq., 126; Miln.16; Vism.333 (n’atthi; suñña; vivitta; i, e. abhāva, suññatā, vivitt’‹-› ākāra), 578 (12 fold, relating to the Paṭiccasamuppāda), 653 sq.; VbhA.262 (atta°, attaniya°, niccabhāva°).

--pakāsana the gospel of emptiness DA.I,99, 123; --paṭisaṁyutta relating to the Void, connected with Nibbāna A.I,72=III,107=S.II,267; DA.I,100 sq.; Miln.16; --vihāra dwelling in the concept of emptiness Vin.II,304; M.III,104, 294. See on term e. g. Cpd. 69; Kvu trslⁿ 142, n. 4. (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suṁsumāra: {'def': '[cp. Sk. śiśumāra, lit. child-killing] a crocodile S.IV,198; Th.2, 241; ThA.204; J.II,158 sq.; Vism.446; SnA 207 (°kucchi); DhA.III,194. -- °rī (f.) a female crocodile J.II,159; suṁsumārinī (f.) Miln.67; suṁsumārapatitena vandeti to fall down in salutation DA.I,291. (Page 715)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suṅka: {'def': '【阳】通行费，税。suṅkaghāta,【阳】逃税。suṅkaṭṭhāna,【中】抽税处；海关。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】通行费，税。 ~ghāta, 【阳】逃税。 ~ṭṭhāna, 【中】抽税处；海关。(p347)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. and nt.) [cp. Vedic śulka, nt.] 1. toll, tax, customs Vin.III,52; IV,131; A.I,54 sq.; DhA.II,2; J.IV,132; VI,347; PvA.III,-- 2. gain, profit Th.2, 25; ThA.32. -- 3. purchase-price of a wife Th.2, 420; J.VI,266; Miln.47 sq. -- odhisuṅka stake J.VI,279; °-gahana J.V,254; a-suṁkâraha J.V,254.

--ghāta customs’ frontier Vin.III,47, 52. --ṭṭhāna taxing place, customs’house Vin.III,62; Miln.359. --sāyika (?) customs’officer Miln.365 (read perhaps °sādhaka or °sālika?). (Page 716)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suṅkika: {'def': '【阳】收税者。(p347)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】收税者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[suṅka+ika] a receiver of customs J.V,254. (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suṅkiya: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. suṅka] price paid for a wife J.VI,266. (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suṇa: {'def': '【阳】狗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】狗。(p347)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '“dog,” preferable spelling for suna, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 93¹. (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Suṇisā: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic snuṣā; cp. Gr. nuόs; Ohg. snur; Ags. snoru; Lat. nurus] a daughter-in-law Vin.I,240; III,136; D.II,148; M.I,186, 253; J.VI,498; Vv 13⁵ (=puttassa bhariyā VvA.61); DhA.I,355; IV,8; Pv.II,46 (pl. suṇisāyo, so read for sūtisāye). -- suṇhā the same Vin.II,10; A.IV,91; Th.2, 406; J.II,347; VI,506; Pv IV.3.⁴³ (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'suṇhā,【阴】媳妇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'suṇhā, 【阴】媳妇。(p347)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suṇāti: {'def': '(suṇoti) [śru, Vedic śṛṇoti; cp. Gr. klέw to praise; Lat. clueo to be called; Oir. clunim to hear; Goth. hliup attention, hliuma hearing, and many others] to hear. Pres. suṇāti D.I,62, 152; S.V,265; Sn.696; It.98; Miln.5. -- suṇoti J.IV,443; Pot. suṇeyya Vin.I,7; D.I,79; suṇe J.IV,240; Imper. suṇa S.III,121; sunāhi Sn.p. 21; suṇohi D.I,62; Sn.997; 3^rd sg. suṇātu Vin.I,56; 1^st pl. suṇāma Sn.354; suṇoma Sn.350, 988, 1110; Pv IV.1³¹. -- 2^nd pl. suṇātha D.I,131; II,76; It.41; Sn.385; PvA.13. suṇotha Sn.997; Miln.1. -- 3^rd pl. suṇantu Vin.I,5; -- ppr. sunanto Sn.1023; DA.I,261; savaṁ J.III,244. -- inf. sotuṁ D.II,2; Sn.384; suṇitum Miln.91. -- Fut. sossati D.II,131, 265; J.II,107; J.II,63; Ap 156; VvA.187; 1^st sg. sussaṁ Sn.694. -- 2^nd sg. sossi J.VI,423. -- aor. 1^st sg. assuṁ J.III,572. -- 2^nd sg. assu J.III,541. -- 3^rd sg. suṇi J.IV,336; assosi D.I,87, 152; Sn.p. 103; 1^st pl. assumha J.II,79. -- 2^nd pl. assuttha S.I,157; II,230. 3^rd pl. assosuṁ Vin.I,18; D.I,111. ‹-› ger. sutvā Vin.I,12; D.I,4; Sn.30. sutvāna Vin.I,19; D.II,30; Sn.202. suṇitvā J.V,96; Mhvs 23, 80. suṇiya Mhvs 23, 101. -- Pass. sūyati M.I,30; J.I,72, 86; Miln.152. suyyati J.IV,141; J.IV,160; V,459. 3^rd pl. sūyare J.VI,528. -- Grd. savanīya what should be heard, agreeable to the ear D.II,211. sotabba D.I,175; II,346. ‹-› pp. suta: see separately. -- Caus. sāveti to cause to hear, to tell, declare, announce J.I,344; Mhvs 5, 238; PvA.200; VvA.66. nāmaṁ s. to shout out one’s name Vin.I,36; DA.I,262; maṁ dāsī ti sāvaya announce me to be your slave J.III,437; cp. J.IV,402 (but see on this passage and on J.III,198; VI,486 Kern’s proposed reading sāṭeti); to cause to be heard, to play D.II,265. Caus. also suṇāpeti DhA.I,206. -- Desiderative sussūsati (often written sussūyati) D.I,230; M.III,133 (text sussūsanti), A.IV,393 (do.). -- ppr. sussusaṁ Sn.189 (var. read., text sussussā); sussūsamāna Sn.383; aor. sussūsiṁsu Vin.I,10; fut. sussūsissanti Vin.I,150; S.II,267 (text sussu-). (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(su(梵wru)听+ṇā), 听。【过】suṇi。【过分】suta。【现分】suṇanta, suṇamāna。【义】sotabba, suṇitabba。【独】sutvā, suṇitvā。【不】sotuṁ, suṇituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(su + ṇā), 听。【过】 suṇi。【过分】 suta。【现分】 suṇanta, suṇamāna。【潜】 sotabba, suṇitabba。【独】 sutvā, suṇitvā。【不】 sotuŋ, suṇituŋ。(p347)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suṭṭhu: {'def': '(indecl.) [cp. Sk. suṣṭhu, fr. su°] well; the usual C. explⁿ of the prefix su² PvA.19, 51, 52, 58, 77, 103 etc.; s. tāta well, father J.I,170; s. kataṁ you have done well J.I,287; DA.I,297; suṭṭhutaraṁ still more J.I,229; SnA 418. (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】好，善。suṭṭhutā,【阴】卓越。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】好，善。 ~tā, 【阴】卓越。(p347)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Suṭṭhutā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. suṭṭhu] excellence A.I,98 sq.; Nett 50. (Page 717)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sve: {'def': '(cp. Sk. wvas),【副】明天。suve suve﹐日复一日(day after day)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [cp. Sk. śvas] to-morrow Vin.II,77; D.I,108, 205; J.I,32, 243; II,47; VvA.230; svedivasa DhA.I,103. The diæretic form is suve, e. g. Pv IV.1⁵; Mhvs 29, 17; and doubled suve suve day after day Dh.229; DhA.III,329; J.V,507. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】明天。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Svāgata: {'def': '(su+āgata),【形】1.欢迎( welcome﹐音译：莎揭哆)。2.记住的(learnt by heart)。svāgataṁ,【副】欢迎你！', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[su+āgata] 1. welcome Vin.II,11; Th.2, 337; ThA.236. -- 2. learnt by heart Vin.II,95, 249; A.IV,140 (pātimokkhāni). See sāgata. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】欢迎，记住的。 svāgataŋ, 【副】欢迎你！(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Svāhaṁ: {'def': '=so ahaṁ. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Svākkhāta: {'def': '[su+akkhāta; on the long ā cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 7; BSk. svākhyāta] well preached Vin.I,12, 187; II,199; M.I,67; A.I,34; II,56; Sn.567. Opp. durakkhāta Vism.213 (in detail). (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(su+akkhāta; BSk. svākhyāta), 善宣说的。‘Svākkhāto Bhagavatā dhammo sandiṭṭhiko akāliko ehipassiko opaneyyiko paccattaṁ veditabbo viññūhī’ti.(法是世尊善说、自见(sa+n+diṭṭhika)、即时、来见、引导、智者各自证知的。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '善宣说的。(p354)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Svākāra: {'def': '【形】有好性情的。(p354)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(su+ākāra),【形】有好性情的(being of good disposition)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[su+ākāra] being of good disposition Vin.I,6. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Svāssu: {'def': '=so assu J.I,196. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Svātana: {'def': '【形】与翌日有关的。 svātanaya, 【与】给翌日。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. śvastana; Geiger, P.Gr. § 6, 54] relating to the morrow; Dat. °-nāya for the following day Vin.I,27; D.I,125; J.I,11; DhA.I,314; IV,12. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. wvastana),【形】与翌日有关的。svātanaya,【与】给翌日。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Svātivatta: {'def': '[su+ativatta] easily overcome Sn.785; Nd¹ 76. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sā: {'def': '【阳】狗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】狗。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】(ta 的【主】) 她。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】 (ta 的【主】) 她。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see under San¹. (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sācakka: {'def': '(nt.) [sā=śvan, dog; +cakka; cp. sopāka & suva] name of a science (“the interpretation of omens to be drawn from dogs”) Miln.178. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sācariyaka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+ācariya+ka] together with one’s teacher D.I,102. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sa3+ācariya+ka),【形】连同老师的(together with one’s teacher)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】连同老师的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāciyoga: {'def': '(sāci+yoga; cp. Sk. sāci crooked),走后门(crooked ways, insincerity)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sāci+yoga; cp. Sk. sāci crooked] crooked ways, insincerity D.I,5; III,176; M.I,180; A.II,209; V,206; Pug.58; DA.I,80. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādana: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic sādana, fr. sad] place, house J.IV,405; Yama-sādanaṁ sampatto come to Yama’s abode: dead J.IV,405; V,267, 304; VI,457, 505 (do., the MSS. always read °-sādhana). (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādara: {'def': '【形】亲爱的，表现关心的。sādaraṁ,【副】挚爱地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】亲爱的，表现关心的。 ~raŋ, 【副】挚爱地。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa+ādara] reverential Mhvs 5, 246; 15, 2; 28, 25; 33, 82; sādariya (nt.) and sādariyatā (f.) showing regard and consideration Pug.24; cp. Dhs.1327. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādeti: {'def': '² [Caus. of svad; given as root in meaning “assādane” at Dhtp 147] to enjoy: see ucchādeti (where better referred to avad) and chādeti². (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Caus. of sad: see sīdati] to cause to sink, to throw down DhA.I,75 (+vināseti; v. l. pāteti). (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādhaka: {'def': '【形】效应的，完成的。【中】证明。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】效应的，完成的。【中】证明。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sādh] accomplishing, effecting J.I,86; SnA 394, 415; Sdhp.161; iṇa° debt-collector Miln.365; bali° tax-collector J.IV,366; V,103, 105, 106. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādhakatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. sādhaka] effectiveness, efficiency Sdhp.329. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādhana: {'def': '【中】1.求证。2.解决。3.影响。4.清债。suttasādhana, 经引证(引经为证)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. sādh] 1. enforcing, proving J.I,307; DA.I,105. -- 2. settling, clearing (a debt) J.II,341 (uddhāra°). In this meaning mixed with sodheti; it is impossible to decide which of the two is to be preferred. See iṇa & uddhāra. -- 3. yielding, effecting, producing, resulting in (-°) A.III,156 (laṇḍa° dung-producing); DA.I,273; VvA.194; PvA.278 (hita°). -- 4. materials, instrument VvA.349; PvA.199. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 求证。 2. 解决。 3. 影响。 4. 清债。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sādheti: {'def': '[Caus. of sādh to succeed. Dhtp 421=saṁsiddhiyan] 1. to accomplish, further, effect J.II,236 (Pot. sādhayemase). -- 2. to make prosperous PvA.113, 125. -- 3. to arrange, prepare Mhvs 7, 24. -- 4. to perform, execute J.I,38 (ārāmika-kiccaṁ); DA.I,194; Mhvs 36, 62; Vism.344 (see udukkhala). -- 5. to make clear, bring to a (logical) conclusion, to prove J.II,306; SnA 192 (atthaṁ), 459; Tikp 58; PvA.30 (here as much as “is any good”). -- 6. to collect or clear a debt, to recover (money). In this sense sādheti is mixed up with sodheti, which is regularly found as v. l., is it almost better to substitute sodheti at all passages for sādheti (cp. iṇa, uddhāra), e. g. J.I,230; II,341, 423; III,106; IV,45; DhA.III,12. -- Cp. abhi°. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sādh + e), 实现，招致，准备，运行，清债。【过】 ~esi。【独】~sādhetvā。【现分】 ~dhenta。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(caus. of sādh+e), 1.实现，努力(to accomplish, further, effect)。2.繁荣(to make prosperous)。3.安排，准备(to arrange, prepare)。4.执行(to perform, execute)。5.澄清，结论(to make clear, bring to a (logical) conclusion, to prove)。【过】sādhesi。【独】sādhetvā。【现分】sādhenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sādhika: {'def': '(sa+adhika),【形】有多余的(having something beyond)。(sādhikaporisa, 深踰人身exceeding a man’s height M.I,74, 365; A.III,403.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有多余的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa+adhika; cp. BSk. sādhika Divy 44] having something beyond D.II,93; Vv 53⁵ (°vīsati). °-porisa exceeding a man’s height M.I,74, 365; A.III,403. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādhita: {'def': '(sādheti 的【过分】)已完成。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sādheti 的【过分】)。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sādhiya: {'def': '(fr. sādh),【形】可完成的(that which can be accomplished)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可完成的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sādh] that which can be accomplished Sdhp.258 etc. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādhu: {'def': '善哉', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic sādhu, fr. sādh] 1. good, virtuous, pious Sn.376, 393; J.I,1; Mhvs 37, 119; PvA.116, 132; asādhu bad, wicked Dh.163, 223; DhA.III,313. -- 2. good, profitable, proficient, meritorious Dh.35, 206 (=sundara, bhaddaka DhA.III,271); D.I,88; Pv.II,9⁷; nt. adv. well, thoroughly Dh.67; J.I,1; Mhvs 36, 97; 37, 73. Very frequent as interjection, denoting (a) request (adhortative, with imper.: sādhu gaccha please go! Miln.18; gacchatha VvA.305), to be translated with “come on, welcome, please,” or similar adverbs. Thus e. g. at Pv IV.1⁴⁰ (=āyācane PvA.232); J.I,92; PvA.6, 35, 272; VvA.69; -- (b) assent & approval in replies to a question “alright, yes” or similarly; usually with the verbs (in ger.) paṭisuṇitvā, vatvā, sampaṭicchitvā etc. Thus e. g. at J.V,297; Vin.I,56; Miln.7; DhA.III,13; VvA.149; DA.I,171; SnA 176 (=sampahaṁsane); PvA.55, 78 and passim.

--kamyatā desire for proficiency VbhA.477. --kāra saying “well,” approval, cheering, applause J.I,223; Miln.13, 16, 18; VvA.132; DhA.I,390; III,385. --kīḷana a festive play, a sacred festivity Mhvs 3, 11; sādhukīḷita the same Mhvs 20, 36; °-divasa Vin.III,285; sādhu-kīḷā J.III,434; V,127; sādhu-kīḷikā J.III,433. --jīvin leading a virtuous life It.71. --phala having wholesome fruits J.I,272 (read sādu°). --rūpa good, respectable Dh.262. --sammata highly honoured D.I,48; S.IV,398; Sn.p. 90 sq.; Miln.4, 21; DA.I,143. --sīliya good character J.II,137. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic sādhu, fr. sādh),【形】1.是的，善的，好的，吉祥的(good, virtuous, pious)。2.利益的，功德的，有品德的，有利润的(profitable, proficient, meritorious Dh.35, 206 (=sundara美丽, bhaddaka 贤能DhA.III,271))。【副】善，好，彻底地。sādhukaṁ,【副】善，好，彻底地。sādhukamyatā,【阴】想要精通。sādhukāra,【阳】喝彩，鼓掌，赞成，叫好。sādhukīḷana,【中】神圣的节日。sādhurūpa,【形】好性情的。sādhusammata,【形】非常尊敬的，有品德所接受的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】是的，好。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】善的，好的，有品德的，有利润的。【副】善，好，彻底地。~kaŋ, 【副】善，好，彻底地。 ~kamyatā, 【阴】想要精通。 ~kāra, 【阳】喝彩，鼓掌，赞成，叫好。 ~kīḷana, 【中】神圣的节日。 ~rūpa, 【形】好性情的。 ~sammata, 【形】非常尊敬的，有品德所接受的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sādhukaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [fr. sādhu] well, thoroughly Vin.I,46; II,208; D.I,62. -- Instr. sādhukena (as adv.) willingly (opp. with force) Pv.II,9². (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādhāraṇa: {'def': '(sa+ādhāraṇa),【形】共通的，一般的(general, common, joint)。sādhāraṇapaññatti, 共通制。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】通常的，一般的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) general, common, joint Vin.II,258; III,35; Th.2, 505; J.I,202, 302; IV,7 (pañca°-bhāva 5 fold connection); Nett 49 sq.; PvA.122, 194, 265. a° J.I,78; DA.I,71. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādisa: {'def': '【形】同样的，相似的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】同样的，相似的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. sadisa] (fem. -sī) like, similar D.II,239; Sn.595; Th.2, 252 (sa° for sā°); Ap 239; J.IV,97; Miln.217 (with Instr.). (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāditar: {'def': '(ag. fr. sādiyati),【中】接受者(one who accepts, appropriates.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[n. ag. fr. sādiyati] one who accepts, appropriates M.III,126. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādiyana: {'def': '【中】sadiyanā,【阴】接受，据为己有。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sādiyanā: {'def': '(‹sādiyati)【阴】appropriating, accepting.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. sādiyati] appropriating, accepting Miln.95. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādiyati: {'def': '(sad + i + ya), 接受，享受，同意，允许。【过】 ~diyi。【过分】sādita。【现分】 ~yanta, ~yamāna。【独】 ~yitvā。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sad坐+i+ya), 接受，享受，同意，允许。【过】sādiyi。【过分】sādita。【现分】sādiyanta, sādiyamāna。【独】sādiyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(cp. BSk. svādīyati; Med.-Pass fr. *sādeti, caus. of svad), 自我享受、允许(lit. to enjoy for oneself, to agree to, permit, let take place)。【过】sādiyi。【未】sādiyissati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. BSk. svādīyati: MVastu II.145; Med.-Pass fr. *sādeti, Caus. of svad] lit. to enjoy for oneself, to agree to, permit, let take place D.I,166; Vin.II,294; A.IV,54, 347; S.I,78; IV,226 sq.; Pug.55; Miln.95 sq.; aor. sādiyi Vin.III,38 sq.; fut. sādiyissati J.VI,158. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādu: {'def': '【形】甜蜜的，愉快的。 ~tara, 【形】更甜的，更愉快的。 ~rasa, 【形】有合意的味道的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic svādu, f. svādvī; fr. svad, cp. Gr. h(duζ, Lat. suavis, Goth. sūts=E. sweet; also Sk. sūda cook; Gr. h(/domai to enjoy, ήdonή pleasure] sweet, nice, pleasant Vin.II,196; M.I,114; Th.2, 273; Sn.102; J.IV,168; V,5; Dhs.629; asādu (ka) J.III,145; IV,509 (text, asādhuka, com. on kaṭuka); sādu-karoti makes sweet J.III,319; Pot. a-sādu-kiyirā makes bitter, ibid. 319; sādu sweet things Vin.II,196; sādu-phala see sādhuphala; for °kamyatā see the latter. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】甜蜜的，愉快的。sādutara,【形】更甜的，更愉快的。sādurasa,【形】有合意的味道的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sādutā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sādu] sweetness Dāvs.I,40 (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sādāna: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+ādāna] attached to the world, passionate Dh.406=Sn.630; DhA.IV,180. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sa+ādāna),【形】黏著於世间、情感(attached to the world, passionate)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāgala: {'def': 'm. 沙竭羅, サーガラ[西北インドの Sialkoṭ. ミリンダ王の都]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sāgalika: {'def': 'Sāgaliya: 海部 [スリランカの三派の一 . Jetavaniya 祗陀林寺派]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sāgaliya: {'def': 'Sāgalika : 海部 [スリランカの三派の一 . Jetavaniya 祗陀林寺派]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sāgara: {'def': '【阳】海洋，大海。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. sāgara] the ocean D.I,89; A.II,56, 140; III,52; V,116 sq.; Vin.I,246; Sn.568; PvA.29; sāgara‹-› ūmi a wave of the ocean, a flood J.IV,165; °-vāri the ocean J.IV,165; sāgaranta or sāgarapariyanta bounded or surrounded by the ocean (said of the earth) J.VI,203; °-kuṇḍala the same J.III,32; VI,278. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】海洋，大海。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāgataŋ: {'def': '【无】冰雹，欢迎。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāgataṁ: {'def': '【无】冰雹，欢迎。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [su+āgata, orij. nt.=wel-come] “greeting of welcome,” hail! D.I,179=M.I,481 (sāgataṁ bhante Bhagavato); D.II,173; M.I,514 (°aṁ bhoto Ānandassa); DA.I,287; DhA.III,293. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāgāra: {'def': '【形】住家的，有家的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】住家的，有家的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+agāra] living in a house, It.111; sleeping under the same roof Vin.II,279. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāha: {'def': 'six days (cp. chāha) J.VI,80 (=chadivasa, C.). (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāhasa: {'def': '[fr. sahas power] violent, hasty Sn.329; (nt.) violence, arbitrary action, acts of violence Sn.943; J.VI,284; Mhvs 6, 39; sāhasena arbitrarily A.V,177; opp. a° ibid.; Dh.257; J.VI,280. sāhasaṁ id. J.VI,358 (=sāhasena sāhasikaṁ kammaṁ katvā ibid. 359); adv. asāhasaṁ=asāhasena J.III,319 (C. sāhasiyataṇhāya ibid. 320, if we do not have to read sāhasiyā taṇhāya, from sāhasī).

--kiriyā violence J.III,321. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】暴力，任意的行动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】暴力，任意的行动。 ~sika, 【形】暴力的，野蛮的。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāhasika: {'def': '(‹sāhasa)﹐【形】暴力的，野蛮的(brutal, violent, savage)。【阳】暴徒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sāhasa] brutal, violent, savage J.I,187, 504; II,11; PvA.209; DhA.I,17. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāhasiyakamma: {'def': '(nt.) a brutal act J.I,412, 438. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāhatthika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sahattha] with one’s own hand J.I,168; DhsA.97; SnA 493; KhA 29. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】亲手做的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】亲手做的。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāhaṁ: {'def': 'contraction of so ahaṁ. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāhin: {'def': '(--°) (adj.) [fr. sah] enduring It.32. See asayha°. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāhu: {'def': '【无】好的，好。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】好的，好。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [=sādhu] good, well Vin.I,45; S.I,8; Pug.71 sq.; Th.1, 43; VvA.284. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāhuneyyaka: {'def': 'see āhuneyya. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāhunna: {'def': '[=sāhuḷa] a strip of ragged cloth Pv III,1⁶; PvA.173; J.P.T.S. 1891, 5; var. read. sāhunda. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāhuḷacīvara: {'def': '(nt.) a coarse cloth M.I,509 (cp. Deśīnāmamālā VIII,52; Karpūramañjarī p. 19; J.P.T.S. 1891, 5, and Prākrit sāhulī, Z.D.M.G., xxviii., p. 415). (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāhāra: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+āhāra] with its food S.III,54 (viññāṇa s.); D.II,96 (Vesālī s.; trslⁿ “with its subject territory”). (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sājīva: {'def': '(nt.) rule of life, precept governing the monastic life of the Buddhist bhikkhus Vin.III,24¹⁶; adj. °-samāpanna ibid.; adj. °-kara one who supports J.IV,42 (=sa-ājīvakara, C.). (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】生命的规则，比丘戒(rule of life, precept governing the monastic life of the Buddhist bhikkhus Vin III.2416。sājīvasamāpanna, 【形】获得了比丘戒及生活规则。sājīvakara, 【形】(one who supports J.IV.42 (=sa-ājīvakara, C.) )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāka: {'def': '(nt.) [Epic Sk. śāka] 1. vegetable, potherb D.I,166; M.I,78, 156; A.I,241, 295; II,206; Pug.55; Vism.70; Vv 33³³; J.III,225; IV,445; V,103. -- 2. (m.) name of a tree (teak; Tectona grandis) D.I,92; DA.I,259; Vism.250. °-vatthu ground for cultivation of vegetables J.IV,446; sāka-paṇṇavaṇṇa “like the colour of vegetable leaf” (said of teeth) J.V,206 (cp. 203). (Page 701)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】蔬菜，叶用蔬菜。 ~paṇṇa, 【中】蔬菜叶。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Epic Sk. wāka),【阳】【中】1.蔬菜，叶用蔬菜(vegetable, potherb)。2.柚木(a teak tree；Tectona grandis。属於马鞭草科落叶乔木。单叶对生，新叶成红褐色，幼嫩部分密被毛茸，摸起来有毛绒绒的感觉，成熟椭圆的叶片十分硕大，叶面粗糙且有硬毛之瘤粒。一般柚木的花期在夏、秋两季，属於圆锥花序；花细小约有5~6片花瓣，花色有黄、蓝、白色且具有芳香气息。柚木枝干粗壮且叶片硕大，生长缓慢，材质细密。)。sākapaṇṇa,【中】蔬菜叶。sākavatthu﹐菜园(ground for cultivation of vegetables)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sākaccha: {'def': '【阳】交谈，讨论。(A.5.65./III,81.：alaṁsākaccho畅谈。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sākaccheti: {'def': '[denom. fr. sākacchā] to converse with, talk over with, discuss D.II,237 (+sallapati); ppr. sākacchanto Vin.I,169; fut. sākacchissanti Vin.II,75; III,159; grd. sākacchātabba Vin.V,123, 196; ppr. med. sākacchā yamāna A.II,189. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sākacchā: {'def': '【阴】交谈，讨论。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) conversation, talking over, discussing D.I,103; II,109; M.I,72; S.I,79; A.II,140, 187 sq.; III,81; Sn.266; Miln.19, 24; DhA.I,90 (°aṁ karoti); J.VI,414. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】交谈，讨论。(p338)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sākalya: {'def': '【中】整体。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】整体。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sakala] totality; KhA 187 (opp. vekalya); sākalya A.I,94 is misprint for sākhalya. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sākatika: {'def': '【阳】运货马车夫。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】运货马车夫(carter)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sākaṭika: {'def': '[fr. sakaṭa¹] a carter S.I,57; Th.2, 443 (ThA.271= senaka); J.III,104; Miln.66, 164. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāketa: {'def': 'n. [〃] 沙計多 [コーラサにある都市, Ayojjhā 付近].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sākhalya: {'def': '& Sakhalla (nt.) [abstr. from sakhila] friendship M.I,446 (=tameness); A.I,94; D.III,213; Dhs.1343; DA.I,287; DhsA.396; J.IV,57, 58 (=maṭṭhavacana “smooth words”). (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sākhapurāṇasanthuta: {'def': '[fr. sakhi+purāṇa°] one with whom one has formerly been friendly J.V,448. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sākhavant: {'def': '(adj.) [sākhā+vant] having branches J.III,493. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sākhā: {'def': '【阴】分枝。 ~nagara, 【中】市郊。 ~palāsa，【中】树枝和树叶。~bhaṅga, 【阳】断枝。 ~miga, 【阳】猴子。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic śākhā, cp. also śaṅku stick, & Goth. hōha plough] a branch Vin.I,28; M.I,135; A.I,152; II,165, 200 sq.; III,19, 43 sq., 200; IV,99, 336; V,314 sq.; Sn.791; J.V,393; J.II,44; a spur of a hill A.I,243; II,140; Miln.36; also sākha (nt.) Mhvs 1, 55; J.I,52; IV,350; J.I,164 (? yāva aggasākhā). -- the rib of a parasol Sn.688. ‹-› adj. sīla-sākha-pasākha whose branches and boughs are like the virtues J.VI,324. In cpds. sākha° & sākhā°.

--nagaraka “little town in the branches,” i. e. a suburb, a small town D.II,146; J.I,391. --patta-palāsa branches and foliage A.III,44; --patta-phal’upeta with branches, leaves & fruit A.III,43. --palāsa id. M.I,488; A.II,200. --bhaṅga faggots J.I,158; III,407; DhA.II,204; III,375. --miga a monkey J.II,73; --ssita living upon branches (i. e. monkey) J.V,233. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】分枝(branch)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sākhābhaṅga: {'def': '【阳】断枝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sākhāmiga: {'def': '【阳】猴子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sākhānagara: {'def': '【中】市郊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sākhāpalāsa: {'def': '【中】树枝(树桠ㄧㄚ，台语：漳音we1，泉音e1)和树叶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sākhī: {'def': '【阳】树。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】树。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sākiya: {'def': 'Sākya [=Sakka, Sakiya] 釈迦, 釈氏. -sāsana 釈迦の教.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【形】释迦族的。sākiyānī,【阴】释迦族女。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】属于释迦族的。 ~yānī, 【阴】释迦族女。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sākkharappabheda: {'def': '[sa³+akkhara+pabheda] together with the distinction of letters, with the phonology D.I,88; A.I,163; Sn, p. 101; Miln.10; DA.I,247 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca). (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sākuntika: {'def': '[fr. sakunta] a fowler, bird-catcher A.II,207; Th.2, 299; ThA.227; DA.I,162. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sākuṇika: {'def': 'sākuntika, 【阳】捕鸟者。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. sakuṇa] a fowler S.II,256; A.III,303; Pug.56; J.I,208. Comb^d with miga-bandhaka & macchaghātaka at SnA 289; with māgavika & maccha-ghātaka at Pug.56. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'sākuntika,【阳】捕鸟者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sākāra: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+ākāra] with its characteristics D.I,13; III,111; M.I,35; Pug.60; Vism.423 (+sa-uddesa). (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāla: {'def': '[cp. Sk. śāla & sāla] a Sal tree (Shorea robusta) M.I,488; D.II,134; A.I,202; III,49, 214; Dh.162.

--māḷaka an enclosure of Sal trees J.I,316. --rukkha Sal tree VvA.176. --laṭṭhi Sal sprout A.II,200. --vana Sal grove D.II,134; M.I,124; S.I,157; Vv 39². (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】姊妹的丈夫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(cp.Sk.wāla & sāla)﹐婆罗树(a Sal tree (Shorea robusta)；见 Assakaṇṇa)。sālarukkha,【阳】粗壮婆罗树。sālavana,【中】婆罗树林。sālalaṭṭhi,【阴】婆罗树新芽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】姊妹的丈夫，粗壮婆罗双（见 Assakaṇṇa）。 ~rukkha, 【阳】粗壮婆罗双树。 ~vana, 【中】粗壮婆罗双树林。 ~laṭṭhi, 【阴】小粗壮婆罗双树。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sālaka: {'def': '[Sk. syāla+ka] a brother-in-law J.II,268. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sālakakimi: {'def': 'a kind of worm Miln.312. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sālaya: {'def': '【形】有附着的。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sa3+ālaya),【形】有意图的(having intentions (on))，有附著的(being attached)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+ālaya] having intentions (on), being attached (to=Loc.) J.III,332. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāli: {'def': '[cp. Sk. śāli] rice D.I,105, 230; II,293; Vin.IV,264; M.I,57; A.I,32, 145; III,49; IV,108 (+yavaka), 231; S.V,10, 48; J.I,66, 178; IV,276; V,37; VI,531; Miln.251; Sn.240 sq.; Vism.418; pl. °-iyo J.I,325; Gen. pl. °-inaṁ J.VI,510. -- lohitaka° red rice Miln.252.

--khetta a rice-field A.I,241; IV,278; Vin.II,256; DhA.I,97; III,6. --gabbha ripening (young) rice DhA.I,97. --bīja rice seed A.I,32; V,213. --bhatta a meal of rice Vism.191. --bhojana rice food J.I,178. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp.Sk.wāli),【阳】粳(ㄍㄥ)米(白米、糙米)。【复】sāliyo。【复.属】sālīnaṁ。lohitakasāli﹐【阳】红米。sālikkhetta,【中】稻田。sāligabbha,【阳】初期的成熟米。sālibhatta,【中】米饭。sālibhojana，【中】米食。akaṭṭhapāko sāli(不必耕作而熟之米、自然粳米)。Tamenaṁ(tam它+enaṁ‹eta这、那) cakkhumā puriso muñcitvā paccavekkheyya–‘ime sālī ime vīhī ime muggā ime māsā ime tilā ime taṇḍulā’ti. (有眼睛的人把它倒出来之后，能观察到：『这些是米(m.p.Nom.)，这些是稻谷(m.p.Nom.)，这些是绿豆(m.p.Nom.)，这些是菜豆(m.p.Nom.)，这些是芝麻(n.p.Nom.)，这些是糙米(n.p.Nom.)。』)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】良米。 ~kkhetta, 【中】稻田。 ~gabbha, 【阳】初期的熟米。~bhatta, 【中】良米饭。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sālika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sāli] belonging to rice DhA.III,33. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sālikā: {'def': '(Sk.sārikā),【阴】八哥(myna-bird﹐一种东南亚星椋鸟，长有黑蓝色或棕黑色的项圈和黄色的嘴，某些品种，尤其是山八哥〔鹩哥科〕，以模仿人类语言而闻名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. sārikā crow, usually comb^d with śuka parrot] a kind of bird S.I,190=Th.1, 1232; J.V,110. See sāliya & sāḷikā. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】八哥（一种东南亚星椋鸟，长有黑蓝色或棕黑色的项圈和黄色的嘴，某些品种，尤其是山八哥〔鹩哥科〕，以模仿人类语言而闻名）。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sālin: {'def': 'excellent Dāvs.I,9. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sālittaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. Sk. saṁlepa?] a sling, catapult (?); slinging stones, throwing potsherds etc. Pv IV.16⁷; PvA.285; J.I,418, 420; DhA.II,69. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sālittaka-sippa: {'def': '【中】投石术。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】投石术。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāliya: {'def': 'or sāliyā the maina bird (=sālikā) J.III,203; sāliyachāpa (a young bird of that kind), and sāliyacchāpa (i. e. sāliyā which is probably the right form) J.III,202. ‹-› madhu-sāliyā J.V,8 (=suvaṇṇa-sālika-sakunā C. p. 9¹¹); J.VI,199 (suva-sāliya-°), 425 (Sāliya-vacana the story of the maina bird, var. read. suva-khaṇḍa; a section of the 546th Jātaka, but sāḷiyā, sālikā, sāliyā is not a paṛrot. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sālohita: {'def': '[fr. sa²+lohita] a kinsman, a blood relation, usually together with ñāti Vin.I,4; D.II,26, 345; A.I,139, 222; II,115; Sn.p. 91; PvA.28; VbhA.108. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāloka: {'def': '[sa²+āloka] sight, view, sāloke tiṭṭhati to expose oneself to view in an open door Vin.II,267. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāluka: {'def': '【中】莲藕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】莲藕。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& °ūka) (nt.) [cp. Sk. śālūka] the edible root of the water-lily Vin.I,246; J.VI,563; VvA.142 (°muṭṭhi). (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sālā: {'def': '(f.) [cv. Vedic śālā, cp. Gr. kali/a hut, Lat. cella cell, Ohg. halla, E. hall] a large (covered & enclosed) hall, large room, house; shed, stable etc., as seen fr. foll. examples: aggi° a hall with a fire Vin.I,25, 49=II.210; āsana° hall with seats DhA.II,65; udapāna° a shed over the well Vin.I,139; II,122; upaṭṭhāna° á service hall Vin.I,49, 139; II,153, 208, 210; S.II,280; V,321; J.I,160; kaṭhina° a hall for the kaṭhina Vin.II,117. kīḷa° playhouse J.VI,332; kutūhala° a common room D.I,179= S.IV,398. kumbhakāra° potter’s hall DhA.I,39; gilāna° sick room, hospital S.IV,210; Vism.259; jantāghāra° (large) bath room Vin.I,140; II,122; dāna° a hall for donations J.I,262; dvāra° hall with doors M.I,382; II,66; pāniya° a water-room Vin.II,153; bhatta° refectory Vism.72; yañña° hall of sacrifice PugA 233; rajana° dyeing workshop Vism.65; ratha° car shed DhA.III,121; hatthi° an elephant stable Vin.I,277, 345; II,194; J.I,187. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】门厅，棚。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】厅(a large (covered & enclosed) hall)，棚。Aggisāla。udapānasāla﹐(a shed over the well)。upaṭṭhānasāla﹐( a service hall)。kutūhalasāla﹐(a common room)。kumbhakārasāla﹐陶工工作室(potter’s hall)。gilānasāla﹐病房、医院(sick room, hospital)。jantāghārasāla﹐大澡堂( (large) bath room)。dānasāla﹐布施厅(a hall for donations)。dvārasāla﹐门厅(hall with doors。pāniyasāla﹐(a water-room)。bhattasāla﹐食堂(refectory)。yaññasāla﹐祭祀堂(hall of sacrifice)。rajanasāla﹐印染工作室(dyeing workshop)。rathasāla﹐(car shed)。hatthisāla﹐(an elephant stable)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sālākiya: {'def': '【中】眼科学。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. wālākya in Suwruta),【中】眼科学(ophthalmology)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. śālākya in Suśruta] ophthalmology D.I,12, 69; DA.I,98. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sālīna: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sāli] fine (rice) Miln.16 (°ṁ odanaṁ; cp. śālīnaṁ odanaṁ Divy 559). (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sālūra: {'def': '[but cp. Sk. śālūra a frog] a dog J.IV,438 (°-saṁgha =sunakhagaṇa, C.; spelling ḷ). (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāma: {'def': '【形】黑色的，黑暗的。【阳】 1. 和平。 2. 吠陀经（印度最古的宗教文献和文学作品的总称）中之一部分的名字。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2(perhaps=Vedic sāman),【中】1.和平。2.吠陀经((印度最古的宗教文献和文学作品的总称)中之一部分的名字。song, sacred song, devotion, worship, propitiation D.II,288.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(cp. Vedic wyāma black & wyāva brown),【形】1.黑色的，黑暗的(black, dark (something like deep brown) (°aṁ mukhaṁ dark, i. e. on account of bad spirits); 【反】白(odāta)。2.黄(yellow, of a golden colour, beautiful; suvaṇṇa-sāmā, suvaṇṇa-vaṇṇa))。【阴】sāmā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Vedic śyāma black & śyāva brown; Av. syāva; Ags. h&amacremacr;ven blue (=E. heaven); Gr. skoiόs, skiά (shadow)=Sk. chāyā; Goth. skeinan=shine, etc.] 1. black, dark (something like deep brown) Vin.IV,120 (kāḷasāma dark blue [?]); D.I,193; M.I,246 (different from kāḷa); J.VI,187 (°aṁ mukhaṁ dark, i. e. on account of bad spirits); Vism.422 (opp. to odāta in colour of skin). -- 2. yellow, of a golden colour, beautiful J.II,44, 45 (migī); V,215 (suvaṇṇa-sāmā), 366 (suvaṇṇa-vaṇṇa). -- f. sāmā, q. v. -- See sabala. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [perhaps=Vedic sāman] song, sacred song, devotion, worship, propitiation D.II,288. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāma-veda: {'def': 'm. 沙磨吠陀, サース•ヴェ一ダ[バラモン聖典]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sāmacca: {'def': '(adj.) [sa²+amacca] together with the ministers D.I,110. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sa2+amacca),【形】连同部长或朋友的(together with the ministers)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】连同部长或朋友的。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāmaggi: {'def': '【阴】 sāmaggiya, 【中】和睦，团结。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāmaggiya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. samagga] completeness, concord Sn.810; sāmaggiya-rasa J.III,21 (“the sweets of concord”); adj. asāmaggiya, unpleasant J.VI,517 (C. on asammodiya). (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmaggī: {'def': '(‹samagga(a.)和合),【阴】sāmaggiya,【中】和合，和睦，团结(completeness, a quorum；meeting, communion; unanimity, concord)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. samagga] completeness, a quorum Vin.I,105, 106; meeting, communion Vin.I,132 sq.; II,243; unanimity, concord Vin.I,97, 136, 357; II,204; D.III,245 sq.; A.III,289; Nd¹ 131; J.I,328; It.12. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmalatā: {'def': '(f.) [sāma¹+latā; Sk. śyāmalatā] the creeper Ichnocarpus J.I,60. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmanta: {'def': '【中】附近，接近。【形】边界的，附近的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. samanta] neighbouring, bordering D.I,101; Vin.I,46 (āpatti° bordering on a transgression); J.II,21; IV,124; connected with M.I,95; °jappā (or °jappana) roundabout talk Vbh.353; Vism.28; Nd¹ 226; VbhA.484. Abl. sāmantā in the neighbourhood of Vin.III,36; D.II,339; Loc. sāmante the same J.IV,152 (Kapila-vatthu-°). (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】附近，接近。【形】边界的，附近的。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāmattha: {'def': '(adj.) [=samattha] able J.II,29. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmatthiya: {'def': '[abstr. fr. samattha] (nt.) ability Mhvs 37, 243 (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】能力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】能力。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāmayika: {'def': '【形】1.宗教性的。2.暂时的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 1. 宗教性的。 2. 暂时的。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. samaya] temporary Sn.54; Miln.302 (so read); see sāmāyika. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmañña: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [abstr. fr. samāna] generality; equality, conformity; unity, company Miln.163; SnA 449 (jāti° identity of descent), 449 (generality, contrasted to visesa detail), 548 (id.); VvA.233 (diṭṭhi°, sīla°, equality). °-gata united D.II,80; °-nāma a name given by general assent DhsA.390. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [abstr. fr. samaṇa] Samaṇaship D.I,51 sq.; III,72, 245; M.I,281 sq.; S.V,25; A.II,27=It.103; Dh.19 sq., 311; DA.I,158; Vism.132; adj., in accordance with true Samaṇaship, striving to be a samaṇa Miln.18; Samaṇaship A.I,142 sq.; Pv.II,7¹⁸ (expl^d at PvA.104 as “honouring the samaṇas”).

--attha the aim of Samaṇaship D.I,230; A.IV,366; M.I,271; S.II,15; III,93; J.I,482; --phala advantage resulting from Samaṇaship, fruit of the life of the recluse D.I,51 sq.; Vism.215, 512; VvA.71; VbhA.317; more especially the fruition of the four stages of the Path, sotāpatti-, sakadāgāmi-, anāgāmi-, and arahattaphala S.V,25; D.III,227, 277; Dhs.1016; DhsA.423; Miln.344, 358; DA.I,158; three samaññaphalas Kvu 112. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】符合，一般性，出家人的身份。 ~tā, 【阴】适合，对出家人的尊敬。 ~phala, 【中】沙门果，出家生活的果报。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】符合，一般性，出家人的身份。sāmaññatā,【阴】适合，对出家人的尊敬。sāmaññaphala,【中】沙门果，出家生活的果报。sāmaññe anapekkhavanto﹐不求符节。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāmaññatā: {'def': '¹ =sāmañña¹ (identity, congruity etc.) J.VI,371 (vaṇṇa°); Vism.234 (maraṇa°). (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² =sāmañña² D.III,145, 169; Dh.332; DhA.III,484; IV,33. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmaŋ: {'def': '【无】自己，独自。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāmaṁ: {'def': '[on etymology, see Andersen Pāli Gloss., p. 268 (contracted from sayamaṁ, Trenckner), cp. Michelson, Indog. Forsch., vol. xxiii, p. 235, n. 3 (=avest., hāmō; slav., samz)] self, of oneself Vin.I,16, 33, 211 (s. pāka); IV,121; D.I,165; M.I,383; II,211; III,253 (sāmaṁ kantaṁ sāmaṁ vāyitaṁ dussayugaṁ); S.II,40; IV,230 sq.; V,390; Sn.270 (asāma-pāka not cooking for oneself), 889; J.I,150; sāmaññeva, i. e. sāmaṁ yeva Sn.p. 101. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】自己，独自(self, of oneself)。asāma-pāka, 自己(not cooking for oneself)。sāmaññeva=sāmaṁ yeva。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāmaṇaka: {'def': '【形】有沙门的价值，沙门所需要的。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有沙门的价值，沙门所需要的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. samaṇa] worthy of or needful for a Samaṇa Mhvs 4, 26; 30, 37; assāmaṇaka unworthy of a Samaṇa Vin.I,45. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmaṇera: {'def': '[fr. samaṇa; cp. BSk. śrāmaṇeraka Divy 342] fem. °-rī a novice Vin.I,62 sq.; IV,121; S.II,261; Miln.2; VbhA.383; are not present at the recital of the Pātimokkha Vin.I,135; °pabbajjā ordination of a novice Vin.I,82. °pēsaka superintendent of Sāmaṇeras Vin.II,177; A.III,275. -- f., also --°ā A.III,276; as --°ī at Vin.I,141. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '沙弥。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '沙弥', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【阳】沙弥。 ~ṇerī, 【阴】沙弥尼。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹samaṇa; cp.BSk. wrāmaṇeraka),【阳】沙弥(a novice)。《南海寄归内法传》卷第三, T54.219.2)︰「室罗末尼罗(译为求寂。言欲求趣涅盘圆寂之处。旧云沙弥者，言略而音讹翻作息慈，意准而无据也。)」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāmaṇerī: {'def': '沙弥尼', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【阴】沙弥尼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāmeti: {'def': 'see sammati¹. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmi: {'def': 'J.V,489, read sāvi. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmika: {'def': '【阳】丈夫，夫婿，主人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】丈夫，主人。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. sāmin] 1. owner M.I,27; J.I,194; Vism.63. ‹-› 2. husband Vin.III,137; J.I,307; II,128; A.II,58 sq.; Pv.II,3⁷. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmin: {'def': '[cp. Sk. svāmin, fr. sva=sa⁴] 1. owner, ruler, lord, master Vin.I,303, 307; Sn.83; Mhvs 37, 241; J.V,253 (°paribhoga, q. v.); Pv IV.6⁶; Vism.63; DA.I,261; PvA.43, 65. Voc. sāmi “Sir” J.VI,300; DhA.I,20. f. sāminī J.V,297; VvA.225. See also suvāmin. -- assāmin not ruling Miln.253; Pv IV.6⁶. --2. husband PvA.31 (sāmi, Voc.=“my lord”), 82. -- f. sāminī wife Mhvs 5, 43; PvA.82, 276.

--vacana (sāmi°) the genitive case J.I,185; III,98 (upayog’atthe); V,42 (karaṇ’atthe), 444; VvA.304; SnA 210 (for upayoga), 310 (id.). (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāminī: {'def': '【阴】主妇，女主人。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】主妇，女主人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāmisa: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+āmisa] 1. holding food Vin.II,214= IV.198. -- 2. fleshly, carnal D.II,298=M.I,59; A.I,81; Ps.II,41. Opp. to nirāmisa spiritual (e. g. Ps.I,59). (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】肉的，肉体的，涂满食物的。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sa有+āmisa财、味、利益),【形】物质的，有味的，肉的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāmivacana: {'def': '(Sk. sasṭhī),〔巴利语法〕【中】属格，领属格(genitive)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】属格，领属格〔巴利语法〕。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāmiya: {'def': 'husband J.I,352; see sāmika. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmudda: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. samudda] sea salt Vin.I,202; Abhp 461. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmuddika: {'def': '【形】航海事业的，海的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】航海事业的，海的。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. samudda] seafaring D.I,222; S.III,155; A.III,368 (vāṇijā); IV,127 (nāvā); Vism.63; DhsA.320. At J.VI,581 s.-mahāsaṅkha denotes a kind of trumpet. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmukkaṁsika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. samukkaṁsati, cp. ukkaṁsaka. The BSk. is sāmutkarṣikī dharmadeśanā Divy 617] exalting, praising (i. e. the 4 truths), as much as “standard.” Kern, Toev. II.64, takes it to mean “condensed, given in brief.” Usually in phrase °ikā dhammadesanā (thus as f. of °aka!) e. g. Vin.I,16, 18; II,156; D.I,110; M.I,380; A.IV,186; V,194; DA.I,277 (expl^d); ThA.137; PvA.38, 195; VvA.50. Only once with ñāṇa at DhsA.9. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmā: {'def': '【阴】粟（见 Piyaṅgu），黑肤色的女人。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f) [Sk. śyāmā Halāyudha 2, 38; see sāma¹, sāmalatā, and sāmāka] a medicinal plant J.IV,92 (bhisasāmā, C. bhisāni ca sāmākā ca); the Priyangu creeper J.I,500; V,405. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】粟(见 Piyaṅgu)，黑肤色的女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāmādhika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. samādhi] consisting in concentration S.I,120. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmājika: {'def': '[fr. Sk. samāja: see samajja] a member of an assembly Dāvs III,27. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】(集会的)成员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】（集会的）成员。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāmāka: {'def': '﹐稗子，像谷的一种草。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic śyāmāka] a kind of millet (Panicum frumentaceum) D.I,166; M.I,78, 156, 343; A.I,295; II,206; Sn.239; Pug.55; J.III,144, 371; Nett 141; DhA.V,81. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmāmigī: {'def': '(f.) a black hind J.II,44. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmāvatī: {'def': '（居士名）沙玛瓦帝，（古音译：）差摩婆帝', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Sāmāyika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. samaya] 1. on a friendly footing, in agreement M.III,110; Miln.22. -- 2. occurring in due season, timely Miln.302 sq., 305. -- 3. temporary A.III,349 sq.; cp. sāmayika. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāmī: {'def': '(Sāmin)(cp. Sk. svāmin, fr. sva=sa4),【阳】1.拥有者，统治者，主人(owner, ruler, lord, master)。2.丈夫(husband；sāmi, Voc.=“my lord”)。Voc. sāmi “Sir”；f. sāminī。See also suvāmin。assāmin not ruling；f. sāminī wife。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】拥有者，统治者，主人，丈夫。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāmīci: {'def': '【阴】适当的进程，友好的待遇。 ~kamma, 【中】适当的行为，尊崇。 ~paṭipanna, 【形】进入适当的进程。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāmīcī: {'def': '& sāmīci-,【阴】适当的进程，友好的待遇(和合)。sāmīcikamma,【中】适当的行为，尊崇。sāmīcipaṭipanna,【形】进入适当的进程。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& sāmīci° (f.) [fr. sammā²=Vedic samyac, of which pl. Nom. f. samīcīḥ freq. in R. V,] right, proper course Vin.III,246; D.II,104; A.II,56, 65; S.V,261, 343; Miln.8; DhA.I,57.

--kamma proper act, homage Vin.II,22, 162, 255; A.I,123; II,180; D.III,83; J.I,218, 219; Miln.8. --paṭipadā right course of life M.I,281; A.II,65. --paṭipanna correct in life D.II,104; S.I,220; A.II,56; IV,310. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sānu: {'def': '【阴】【中】高原(ridge, a table land)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴、中】高原。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. and nt.) [Vedic sānu] ridge Vv 32¹⁰; J.III,172. The commentary on the former passage (VvA.136), translates vana wood, that on the latter paṁsupabbata; sānupabbata a forest-hill J.IV,277; VI,415, 540; pabbatasānu-° J.III,175; girisānu-° J.III,301; IV,195. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sānucara: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+anucara] together with followers Dh.294; J.VI,172. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】连同从者的。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sa3+anucara),【形】连同从者的(together with followers)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sānuseti: {'def': '[sa (=saṁ)+anuseti] to fill (the mind) completely A.II,10. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sānuvajja: {'def': '(sa+anuvajja),【形】可责备的(blameable)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa+anuvajja] blameable A.II,3. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可责备的。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāpa: {'def': '(fr. sap, cp. Sk. wāpa),【阳】诅咒(a curse)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】诅咒。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. sap, cp. Sk. śāpa] a curse VvA.336; DhA.I,41. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāpada: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. śvāpada] a beast of prey J.II,126; VI,79. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. wvāpada),【中】野兽捕食(a beast of prey)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāpadesa: {'def': '【形】有理由的。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sa+apadesa),【形】有理由的(with reasons)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa+apadesa] with reasons D.I,4; A.II,22; M.I,180; III,34, 49; Pug.58; DA.I,76. Opp. anapadesa M.I,287. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāpateyya: {'def': '【中】财产，财富。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sa(sva)+pateyya (abstr. fr. pati主)),【中】财产，财富(property, wealth)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [sā (=guṇa of sva)+pateyya (abstr. fr. pati lord), cp. ādhi-pateyya] property, wealth D.I,142; II,180; III,190; Vin.I,72, 274; III,66; J.I,439, 466; Th.2, 340; ThA.240; J.V,117 (sāpateya, var. read. sāpatiyya); DhA.I,67. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāpattika: {'def': '【形】犯了戒条者。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+āpatti+ka] one who has committed a sin (see āpatti) Vin.I,125; II,240; Nd¹ 102. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sa3+āpatti+ka),【形】犯了戒条者(one who has committed a sin)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāpekha: {'def': '[sa+apekhā] longing for D.II,77; III,43. (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāpekkha: {'def': 'sāpekha(sa+apekhā),【形】有希望之人，期待的，渴望的，挂念的(longing for)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'sāpekha, 【形】有希望之人，期待的，渴望的。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāpānadoṇī: {'def': 'M.II,183=152 (C.=sunakhānaṁ pivanadoṇi a dog’s trough). (Page 704)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāra: {'def': '[Vedic sāra nt.] 1. essential, most excellent, strong A.II,110; Vin.IV,214; J.III,368; Pug.53. -- 2. (m.) the innermost, hardest part of anything, the heart or pith of a tree (see also pheggu) M.I,111; J.I,331; Miln.413; most excellent kind of wood Vin.II,110; D.II,182, 187; sattasārā the elect, the salt of the earth M.III,69. ‹-› 3. substance, essence, choicest part (generally at the end of comp.) Vin.I,184; A.II,141; S.III,83, 140; Sn.5, 330, 364; Dh.11 sq.; PvA.132, 211 (candana°). sāre patiṭṭhito established, based, on what is essential M.I,31; A.II,183. -- 4. value Miln.10; appasāra of small value D.II,346. -- asāra worthless Sn.937; nissāra the same J.II,163 (pithless); mahāsāra of high value J.I,384, 463.

--ādāyin acquiring what is essential S.IV,250. --gandha the odour of the heart of a tree Dhs.625. --gabbha a treasury J.III,408; V,331. --gavesin searching for hard wood M.I,111, 233; sārapariyesana the same ibid. --dāru strong, durable wood J.II,68. --bhaṇḍa(ka) a bundle of one’s best things J.II,225. --bhūmi good soil J.II,188. --mañjūsā a box made of choice wood J.IV,335. --maya being of hard or solid wood J.III,318 (C. sārarukkhamaya, “of sāra wood” trslⁿ). --suvaṇṇa sterling gold SnA 448 (in explⁿ of name Bimbisāra). --sūci a needle made of hard wood J.I,9. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】本质，树的木髓，最精选的部份。【形】必要的，优良的，强壮的。 ~gandha, 【阳】心木的气味。 ~gavesī, 【形】寻求本质者。 ~maya,【形】硬木制的。 ~sūci, 【阴】硬木制的针。 ~vantu, 【形】有价值的，有核心的，有木髓的。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】本质，树的木髓，最精选的部份。【形】必要的，优良的，强壮的。sāragandha,【阳】心木的气味。sāragavesī,【形】寻求本质者。sāramaya,【形】硬木制的。sārasūci,【阴】硬木制的针。sāravantu,【形】有价值的，有核心的，有木髓的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sārada: {'def': 'sāradika(Vedic wārada, fr. warad autumn),【形】秋的(autumnal, of the latest harvest, this year’s, fresh)。bījāni fresh seeds); A.I,135, 181 (badara-paṇḍu); S.III,54; V.380; Miln.255; Dh.149 (but at this passage expld as “scattered by the autumn winds” DhA.III,112).。asārada, 陈旧的，老的(stale, old )。sārada,不成熟的(unripe, not experienced, immature), opp. visārada (der. vesārajja),有经验的，有智的，自信的(experienced, wise, selfconfident)。vīta-sārada, 自信的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic śārada, fr. śarad autumn (of Babyl. origin? cp. Assyr. šabātu corn month)] autumnal, of the latest harvest, this year’s, fresh A.III,404=D.III,354 (bījāni fresh seeds); A.I,135, 181 (badara-paṇḍu); S.III,54; V,380; Miln.255; Dh.149 (but at this passage expl^d as “scattered by the autumn winds” DhA.III,112). -- asārada stale, old D.II,353; S.V,379. Fig. sārada unripe, not experienced, immature (see sārajja shyness), opp. visārada (der. vesārajja) experienced, wise, selfconfident; vīta-sārada id. (e. g. A.II,24; It.123).- Note: At K.S.III,46 (=S.III,54) s. is wrongly taken as sāra+da, i. e. “giving sāra”; but seeds do not give sāra: they contain sāra (cp. sāravant). The C explⁿ as sār-ādāyin is nearer the truth, but of course not literal; °da is not ā+°da, Moreover, the fig. meaning cannot be reconciled with this explⁿ. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'sāradika, 【形】秋的。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāraddha: {'def': '【形】热情的，温暖的。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[=saṁraddha] violent, angry A.I,148, 282; S.IV,125; M.I,21; Vism.134 (opp. passaddha-kāya), 282 (°kāya); VbhA.283 (id.). (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】热情的，温暖的。Sāraddhakāya﹐【阳】身暴躁，身诤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāradika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sārada] autumnal Vin.I,199; II,41; Dh.285=J.I,183; Vv 64¹⁷; DhA.III,428. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārajja: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. sārada=*sāradya] timidity A.III,127, 203; IV,359, 364; Miln.24, 72, 196 (parisa°, cp. Nd² 470); J.I,334; II,66; nissārajja undaunted J.I,274. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārajjanā: {'def': '【阴】附著，执著。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】附着，执着。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. sārajjati] infatuation, feeling infatuated Dhs.389; J.V,446. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārajjati: {'def': '(saṁ+raj+ya), 热爱，依恋。【过】sārajji。【过分】sāratta。【独】sārajitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[saṁ+raj, cp. BSk. sārajyati, Sk. saṁrajyate, cp. sārāga] to be pleased with, to be attached to A.I,260; S.II,172; III,69 sq.; IV,10 sq. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(saŋ + raj + ya), 热爱，依恋。【过】 ~jji。【过分】 sāratta。【独】~jitvā。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sārajjitatta: {'def': '(=sārajjanā) ,【中】附著，执著(infatuation, the state of being infatuated Dhs.389.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [=sārajjanā] infatuation, the state of being infatuated Dhs.389. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārajjāyati: {'def': '(denom. of sārajja) 尴尬(台语︰碍谑)，困窘(to be embarrassed, perplexed, ashamed S.III,92; A.IV,359.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[denom. of sārajja] to be embarrassed, perplexed, ashamed S.III,92; A.IV,359. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāraka: {'def': '³ in the comp. kaṭa-sāraka a mat J.IV,248 (v. l.); IV,474; V,97 (cp. osāraka). (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [fr. sarati¹] a messenger. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (-°) (adj.) [fr. sāra] having as most essential Miln.133; a-sāraka rotten (said of wood) J.II,163. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārakkha: {'def': '【形】保卫的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】保卫的。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sārakkhati: {'def': '=saṁrakkhati Th.1, 729. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārakkhā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sa³+rakkha] “standing under protection” (?), a category of married women Vin.III,139 (cp. M.I,287). (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārambha: {'def': '² [sa+ārambha] involving killing or danger to living creatures Vin.III,149; A.II,42 sq. Cp. samārambha. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [=saṁrambha] 1. impetuosity, anger A.I,100, 299; II,193; M.I,16; Dh.133; J.IV,26; Miln.289 (sasaṁrambha). -- 2. quarrel Sn.483; J.II,223; V,141. ‹-› 3. pride Th.1, 759; VvA.139.

--kathā angry or haughty talk, imperiousness Dh.133; M.I,16; DhA.III,57. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】激烈，忿怒，涉及生物的危险，有难(处)。Pārā.III,151︰Sārambhaṁ nāma kipillikānaṁ vā āsayo hoti, upacikānaṁ vā āsayo hoti, undurānaṁ vā āsayo hoti, ahīnaṁ vā āsayo hoti, vicchikānaṁ vā āsayo hoti, satapadīnaṁ vā āsayo hoti, hatthīnaṁ vā āsayo hoti, assānaṁ vā āsayo hoti, sīhānaṁ vā āsayo hoti, byagghānaṁ vā āsayo hoti, dīpīnaṁ vā āsayo hoti, acchānaṁ vā āsayo hoti, taracchānaṁ vā āsayo hoti, yesaṁ kesañci tiracchānagatānaṁ pāṇānaṁ āsayo hoti, pubbaṇṇanissitaṁ vā hoti, aparaṇṇanissitaṁ vā hoti, abbhāghātanissitaṁ vā hoti, āghātananissitaṁ vā hoti, susānanissitaṁ vā hoti, uyyānanissitaṁ vā hoti, rājavatthunissitaṁ vā hoti, hatthisālānissitaṁ vā hoti, assasālānissitaṁ vā hoti, bandhanāgāranissitaṁ vā hoti, pānāgāranissitaṁ vā hoti, sūnanissitaṁ vā hoti, racchānissitaṁ vā hoti, caccaranissitaṁ vā hoti, sabhānissitaṁ vā hoti, saṁsaraṇanissitaṁ vā hoti. Etaṁ sārambhaṁ nāma. (占用地(有难处)︰蚂蚁窝、白蚁窝、老鼠窝、蛇窝、蠍窝、百足(蜈蚣)窝、象穴、马穴、狮子穴、老虎穴、豹穴、熊穴、鬃狗穴，其中某类动物的住处；或谷类耕地、豆类菜圃；或屠宰场、刑场、坟地、公园；或王地、象棚(象厩ㄐㄧㄡˋ)、马棚、监狱、酒坊、狱所、车道、十字路、集会所、移动之幕(临时台子?)，这些称为‘有难处’。) anārambhaṁ, 非占用地(无难处)(与「有难处」相反)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】激烈，忿怒，涉及生物的危险。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sārambhin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sārambha] impetuous J.III,259. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārameya: {'def': '【阳】狗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic sārameya] a dog (lit. “son of Saramā”) Mhbv 111. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】狗。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sārana: {'def': '[fr. sarati¹] going DhsA.133. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārasa: {'def': '【阳】西伯利亚鹭 (Ardea sibirica)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】西伯利亚鹭 (Ardea sibirica)。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. sārasa] a water bird, Ardea sibirica VvA.57, 163; at both pass.=koñca. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārasamāsa: {'def': 'm. 長部の復註 (ṭīkā)', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sārathi: {'def': 'sārathī, 【阳】战车的御者，马车夫，驾驶者。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. sa-ratha; Vedic sārathi] charioteer, coachman D.II,178, 254; S.I,33; V,6; A.II,112; IV,190 sq.; Sn.83; J.I,59, 180; Pv IV.3³. assadammasārathi a coachman by whom horses are driven, a trainer of horses M.I,124; S.IV,176; purisadammasārathi a coachman of the driving animal called man, a man-trainer Vin.I,35; D.I,49; Sn.p. 103; It.79. -- In similes: Vism.466; KhA 21. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'sārathī(fr. sa-ratha; Vedic sārathi),【阳】战车的御者，马车夫，驾驶者(charioteer, coachman)。payojanakasārathi﹐驾驭的马车夫。assadammasārathi, 驯马的马车。purisadammasārathi, 驯人的(马)车。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāratta: {'def': '(=saṁratta. sārajjati 的【过分】), 已充满激情，已激动，已迷住(impassioned, enamoured, passionately devoted (sārattamānaso))。 asāratta,【反】不执著(unattached Sn.704.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[=saṁratta, pp. of sārajjati] impassioned, enamoured, passionately devoted Vin.III,118; M.II,160, 223; S.I,74, 77; Dh.345; J.I,288; II,140; Mhvs 10, 34 (°mānaso). asāratta unattached Sn.704. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sārajjati 的【过分】), 已激动，已迷住。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāravant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sāra] valuable, having kernel or pith (said of grain or trees) A.IV,170 (syNom. daḷha, opp. palāpa); S.V,163; M.I,111=233. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāraṇā: {'def': '(‹sāreti‹smr)﹐【阴】令忆念，训诫(reminding, remonstrating with)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. sāreti²] reminding, remonstrating with Vin.V,158, 164. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāreti: {'def': 'is Caus. of sarati¹ as well as sarati². Cp. vīti°. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sar(移动﹑记得)+e), 提醒，带领，使进行。【过】sāresi。【过分】sārita。【义】sāretabba。【独】sāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sar + e), 提醒，带领，使进行。【过】 sāresi。【过分】 sārita。【潜】sāretabba。【独】 sāretvā。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāri: {'def': '[cp. *Sk. śāri] chessman DA.I,85. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāribā: {'def': '【阴】印度菝葜(东印度群岛产的一种乔木 (Hemidesmus indicus)〔萝摩科〕)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】印度菝葜（东印度群岛产的一种乔木 (Hemidesmus indicus)〔萝摩科〕）。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sārin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sāreti] wandering, going after, following, conforming to (Loc.) J.V,15; aniketasārin wandering about houseless Sn.844, 970; anokasārin wandering homeless Dh.404; Sn.628; diṭṭhisārin a partisan of certain views Sn.911; vaggasārin conforming to a party, a partisan Sn.371, 800, 912. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. sāreti),【形】(在【合】中)徘徊的，接著的，跟随的(wandering, going after, following, conforming to)。aniketasārin, 漫游，无家(wandering about houseless Sn.844, 970)。anokasārin, 漫游，无家(wandering homeless Dh.404; Sn628)。diṭṭhisārin, 某种见解的跟随者(a partisan of certain views Sn 911)。vaggasārin, 遵照派系(conforming to a party, a partisan Sn.371, 800, 912)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāriputta: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Śāriputra] 舎利弗, 舎利子, 身子[仏弟子中, 智慧第一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（比库名）沙利补答，（古音译：）舍利弗，舍梨子', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '(BSk. Wāriputra),【阳】舍利弗(尊者)(出家前的名字︰邬波底沙)，舍利子，身子。Sāri, 舍利(鸟)，鸲鹆鸟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāropin: {'def': '(adj.) [saṁ+ropin, cp. ropeti¹ & rūhati¹] healing, curative M.II,257 (vaṇa-°). (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāruppa: {'def': '【形】适合的，适当的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】适合的，适当的。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. sarūpa, BSk. sārūpya & sāropya] equal state; as adj. fit, suitable, proper Vin.I,39, 287; D.II,277; S.IV,21 sq.; J.I,65, 362; DhsA.294; Sn.368; p. 79, 97, 104; J.IV,404. (a°) (nt.) Vism.24; PvA.269. paribbājaka-s°, as befits a Wanderer J.V,228. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārāga: {'def': '[=saṁrāga, fr. saṁ+raj] affection, infatuation Vin.II,258; M.I,17, 498; A.I,264; S.III,69 sq., 93; Dhs.1059, 1230; cp. saṁrāga. -- Neg. a° Dhs.32, 312, 315. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārāgin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] attached to M.I,239 (sukha-°); sukha-sārāgita ibid. impassioned. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārānīya: {'def': '【形】应该被提醒的。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】应该被提醒的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sārāṇīya: {'def': '(adj.) [the question of derivation is still unsettled. According to Trenckner (Notes 75) fr. saraṇa (i. e. saraṇa¹ or sarana²?) with double vṛddhi. Kern (Toev. II.74) considers the (B) Sk. saṁrañjanīya as the original and derives it fr. saṁ+raj to rejoice, to gladden: see rañjati. The BSk. is divided: MVastu III,47, 60, 206 etc. has sārāyaṇiya, whereas AvŚ I.229 & Divy 404 read saṁrañjanī and saṁrañjanīya (see below). -- The C. at J.IV,99 derives it fr. saraṇa³ in explaining sārāṇīyā kathā as “sāritabba-yuttakā kathā”] courteous, polite, friendly (making happy, pleasing, gladdening?), only in combⁿ with kathā, dhamma, or dhammakathā, e. g. s. kathā polite speech, either in phrase sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sārāṇīyaṁ vītisāreti to exchange greetings of friendliness & courtesy D.I,52; M.I,16 (expl^d inter alia as “anussariyamānasukhato s.” at MA 110); A.I,55, 281; II,42; cp. BSk. sammodanīṁ saṁrañjanīṁ vividhāṁ k. vyatisārya AvŚ I.229. -- sārāṇīyaṁ kathaṁ. katheti DhA.I,107; IV,87; sārāṇīyā dhammā states of conciliation, fraternal living (Dial. III,231) D.III,245; M.I,322; II,250; A.III,288; V,89; DhsA.294; J.V,382; cp. BSk. saṁrañjanīyan dharmaṁ samādāya Divy 404. -- sārāṇīyaṁ dhammakathaṁ suṇāti DhA.IV,168. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sārīrika: {'def': '【形】连接身体的。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sarīra] connected with the body, bodily M.I,10; A.I,168 sq.; II,153; (nt.) bodily relics Miln.341; °ṁ cetiyaṁ one of the 3 kinds: paribhogika, s., uddesika J.IV,228. (Page 706)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. sarīra),【形】连接身体的(connected with the body, bodily M I.10; A I.168 sq.; II.153)。【中】骨灰(bodily relics Miln 341)。sārīrikaṁ cetiyaṁ, 骨灰塔，舍利塔。3种塔︰paribhogika使用的塔、sārīrika骨灰塔、uddesika纪念塔(J.IV,228.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāsa: {'def': '[Sk. śvāsa, fr. śvas] asthma A.V,110; J.VI,295. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāsana: {'def': '佛陀的教法/教学。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '【中】教学，指示，信息，教义，文字。 ~kara, ~kārī, ~kāraka,【形】遵从自己的指示或教学的。 ~antaradhāna, 【中】佛教的消失。 ~hara,【阳】报信者。 ~avacara, 【形】遵守教规的。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic śāsana] order, message, teaching J.I,60, 328; II,21; Pv IV.3⁵⁴ (Buddhānaṁ); KhA 11 sq.; the doctrine of the Buddha Vin.I,12; D.I,110; II,206; A.I,294; Dh.381; Sn.482 etc.; J.I,116. sāsanaṁ āroceti to give a message (dūtassa to the messenger) Vin.III,76.

--antaradhāna the disappearance or decline of the teaching of the Buddha. Said of the doctrine of Kassapa Bhagavā SnA 156 (cp. sāsane parihāyamāne SnA 223), and with ref. to the Pāli Tipiṭaka VbhA.432 sq., where 3 periods of the development of the Buddhist doctrine are discussed, viz. sāsana-ṭhita-kāla, °osakkana-kāla, °antaradhāna. --kara complying with one’s order and teaching M.I,129; --kāraka the same Sn.445; --kārin the same A.II,26; susāsanaṁ dussānaṁ J.I,239 (English transl.: “true and false doctrine,” “good and bad news”). --hara (+°jotaka) taking up (& explaining) an order SnA 164. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】教学，指示，资讯，教义，文字。sāsanakara, sāsanakārī, sāsanakāraka,【形】遵从自己的指示或教学的。sāsanantaradhāna,【中】佛教的消失。sāsanahara,【阳】报信者。sāsanavacara,【形】遵守教规的。aṅgavasena navavidhaṁ﹑navaṅgaṁ satthu sāsanaṁ (naṅangaṁ-buddha-sāsanaṁ；梵navāṅga-wāsana)﹐九分教：修多罗(sutta契经)、祇夜(geyya)、受记(veyyākaraṇa记别)、伽陀(gāthā偈诵)、优陀那(udāna因缘)、伊帝目多迦(itivuttaka(梵itivrttaka)如是语)、闍陀伽(jātaka本生)、毗佛略(vedalla(梵vaipulya)方广)、阿浮陀达磨(abbhutadhamma希法)等为九部(《善见律毗婆沙注》及《长部经注》)。后有「十二分教」的成立。Tathāgatavacanaṁ (CS:DA.1.pg.1.25) Suttanti veditabbaṁ. Sabbampi Sagāthakaṁ suttaṁ Geyyanti veditabbaṁ. Visesena Saṁyuttake sakalopi Sagāthavaggo, sakalampi abhidhammapiṭakaṁ, niggāthakaṁ suttaṁ, yañca aññampi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi asaṅgahitaṁ Buddhavacanaṁ, taṁ Veyyākaraṇanti veditabbaṁ. Dhammapadaṁ, Theragāthā, Therīgāthā, Suttanipāte Nosuttanāmikā Suddhikagāthā ca Gāthāti veditabbā. Somanassaññāṇamayikagāthā paṭisaṁyuttā dve-asīti suttantā Udānanti veditabbaṁ. “Vuttañhetaṁ Bhagavatā”ti-ādinayappavattā dasuttarasatasuttantā Itivuttakanti veditabbaṁ. Apaṇṇakajātakādīni paññāsādhikāni pañcajātakasatāni ‘Jātakan’ti veditabbaṁ. “Cattārome, bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande”ti-ādinayappavattā (dī.ni.2.209) sabbepi Vedallanti veditabbaṁ. Evaṁ aṅgavasena navavidhaṁ.(如来所说：应知是‘修多罗’；一切附偈的经应知是应知是‘祇夜’；应知是‘受记’；法句、长老偈、长老尼偈、经集、应知是‘伽陀’；应知是‘优陀那’；应知是‘伊帝目多迦’；应知是‘闍陀伽’；应知是‘方广’；应知是‘阿浮陀达磨’。1.修多罗(sutta契经)--是结集义，为原始结集的通称。2.祇夜(geyya)--偈颂。结集后不久，由於文体的类别，分化为二︰称长行部分为「修多罗」，大致与《杂阿含经》的「蕴诵」、「六处诵」、「因诵」、「道品诵」相当。称偈颂部分为「祇夜」，与「八众诵」相当。这是「相应教」的核心，原始结集部分。在固有的「修多罗」与「祇夜」外，又有长行与偈颂，集出流行。长行部分，以分别、解答为主，称为「记说」。这是对於「修多罗」及「祇夜」(通称)，以分别或解答方式，而阐明佛法的意义。在问答、分别中，显示、决了深秘教证(佛法本质问题)的特性，逐渐表达出来。这一部分，附编於「相应教」中，与《杂阿含经》弟子所说、如来所说分相当。《杂阿含经》集三部分而成，与「九分教」中的「修多罗」、「祇夜」、「记说」的次第成立，完全吻合。这所以杂阿笈摩，被称为「一切事相应教」的根本。3.受记(veyyākaraṇa记别)--广问答的《满月大经》、《帝释所问经》、《六净经》；广分别体的《梵网经》、《沙门果经》等，在圣典自身，都是称为「记说」的。阿毘达摩也归属此类。4.伽陀(gāthā偈颂)--「伽陀」是以偈颂，宣说法要(除「祇夜」、「优陀那」以外)的通称。从古代的传诵来说，大致与《小部》、《经集》中的〈义品〉、〈波罗延拏品〉、〈蛇经〉、〈陀尼耶经〉、〈犀角经〉、〈牟尼偈〉等相当。这类传诵广而影响大的法偈，当时已有类集(与现存的当然有多少距离)，但始终不曾集入四部、四阿含中。5.优陀那(udāna因缘)--以感兴语为主的法句。前五支，重於形式的分类，内容是重於法义的。6.伊帝目多迦(itivuttaka如是语、本事)--只是传闻的佛说如是，或集出传闻如是的法义，或集出传闻如是的先贤的善行盛德)。7.闍陀伽(Jātaka本生)--结合过去人事与现在人事，而成前后因果系。8.阿浮陀达磨(abbhutadhamma希法)--「方广」是深广义，「希法」是奇特事。如︰《有明小经》(M.44.Cūḷavedalla)、《有明大经》(M.43.Mahāvedalla)、《正见经》(M.9.Sammādiṭṭhi)、《帝释所问经》(D.21.Sakkapañha)、《？经》(Saṅkhārabhājaniya)、《满月大经》(M.109.Mahāpuṇṇamasutta)，sabbepi vedañca tuṭṭhiñca laddhā laddhā pucchitasuttantā.9.毗佛略(Vedalla方广、毗陀罗)--法义的阐述更广，成为更有体系的说明，与旧有的「记说」，不大相合。 (节录自《中华佛教百科全书(二)p.110.1-2)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāsanavaṃsa: {'def': 'm. 教史[ビルマで書かれた仏教史].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sāsanika: {'def': '【形】与佛教有关的。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】与佛教有关的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāsapa: {'def': '【阳】芥菜籽、芥子(mustard seed)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】芥菜籽，芥子。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. sarṣapa] a mustard seed S.II,137; V,464; A.V,170; J.VI,174 (comp. with mt. Meru); Sn.625, 631, p. 122; Dh.401; DA.I,93; DhA.I,107; II,51; IV,166; Vism.306 (ār’agge), 633; PvA.198 (°tela). --°kuṭṭa mustard powder Vin.I,205; II,151. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāsati: {'def': '[śās, Dhtp 300=anusiṭṭhi] to instruct, teach, command; tell J.VI,472 (dūtāni, =pesesi C.); inf. săsituṁ J.VI,291 (=anusāsituṁ C.). (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sās+a), 教，指导，规定。【过】sāsi。【过分】sāsita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sās + a), 教，指导，规定。【过】 sāsi。【过分】 sāsita。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāsava: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³=āsava] connected with the āsavas D.III,112; A.I,81; Dhs.990, 1103; Nett 80. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sa3=āsava),【形】与漏有关的(connected with the āsavas)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】与堕落有关的。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāsaṅka: {'def': '【形】可疑的。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. sa3+āsaṅkā),【形】危险的，可疑的(dangerous, fearful, suspicious)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sa³+āsaṅkā] dangerous, fearful, suspicious S.IV,175 (opp. khema); Th.2, 343; ThA.241; Vism.107; J.I,154; PvA.13; Miln.351. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāta: {'def': '【中】快乐，安乐。【形】愉快的，惬意的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. *Sk. śāta] pleasant, agreeable It.114; Nett 27. Often comb^d with piya, e. g. It.114; Vbh.103; DA.I,311. -- Opp. kaṭuka. -- sāta (nt.) pleasure, joy M.I,508; A.I,81 sq.; S.II,220; J.I,410; Dh.341 (°sita= sāta-nissita DhA.IV,49); Sn.867 sq.; Nd¹ 30 (three, of bhava); Pv.II,11³; IV,5⁴ (+sukha); Dhs.3. asāta disagreeable, unpleasant Dhs.1343; J.I,410; J.I,288; II,105; Sn.867 sq.; sātabhakkha Pug.55, read haṭabhakkha. --odaka with pleasant water D.II,129; M.I,76; Vin.III,108. --kumbha gold VvA.13. See also v. l. under hāṭaka. --putta a noble son J.VI,238 (=amacca-putta C.). (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. *Sk. wāta),【中】快乐，安乐(pleasant, agreeable)。【形】愉快的，惬意的。sātakumbha,【阳】愉悦的水壶(指黄金gold)。sāṇilakkhaṇa﹐【中】舒适相。asāta,【反】不快乐。cf. kaṭuka,【形】【中】苦痛(的)。D.16./II,128~9.︰acchodakā sātodakā sītodakā setodakā suppatitthā ramaṇīyā.(其水澄洁，愉悦，清凉，纯净，易得，令人喜悦。) JA.VI,238.︰sātaputtāti amaccaputtā.(高贵的孩子︰枢密院官员的孩子。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sātacca: {'def': '【中】继续，毅力。 ~kārī, 【阳】不断地行动。~kiriyā, 【阴】毅力。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】继续，毅力(ge7 lek8)。sātaccakārī,【阳】不断地行动。sātaccakiriyā,【阴】毅力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. satata] perseverance M.I,101; S.II,132; A.III,249 sq.; IV,460 sq.; V,17 sq.; Th.1, 585; Vism.4; VbhA.346. °-kārin persevering S.III,268, 271, 277 sq.; Dh.293; °-kiriyatā persevering performance Dhs.1367. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sātaka: {'def': 'name of a kind of bird J.VI,539 (koṭṭhapokkhara-°, cp. 540); SnA 359 (id.). (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sātakumbha: {'def': '【中】黄金。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】黄金。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sātataṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [fr. satata] continually S.I,17=57. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sātatika: {'def': '【形】不断地行动的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] persevering Dh.23; S.II,232; It.74; DhA.I,230. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不断地行动的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sātatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. sāta] tastiness, sweetness A.I,32. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sātatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. sāta] happiness S.I,17. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sātava: {'def': '(nt.) sweet result (of good words) kalyāṇakamma, Com.) J.VI,235, 237. Is it misspelling for sādhava (fr. sādhu)? (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāthalika: {'def': '【形】昏睡的，不严格的习惯。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [śrath, cp. saṭhila & sithila] lethargic, lax M.I,14, 200 sq.; III,6; A.I,71; II,148; III,108, 179 sq. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】昏睡的，不严格的习惯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāti: {'def': '【阴】亢宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】亢宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sātireka: {'def': '【形】拥有多出的东西的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】拥有多出的东西的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa+atireka, cp. BSk. sātirikta Divy 27] having something in excess D.II,93. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sātisāra: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+atisāra] trespassing Vin.I,55. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sātiya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sāta] pleasant Sn.853. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sātrā-yāga: {'def': 'identical with sammāpāsa (Sn.303) SnA 322 (? conjecture yātrā°). (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāttha: {'def': 'sātthaka,【形】有用的，有利的，有意思的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'sātthaka, 【形】有用的，有利的，有意思的。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[sa³+attha] with the meaning, in spirit D.I,62; II,48; It.79, 111; Sn.p. 100; Vin.I,21; DA.I,176; Vism.214. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sātthaka: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+atthaka] (fem. --ikā) useful PvA.12. (Page 703)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāva: {'def': '[fr. sru] juice VvA.186. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāvajja: {'def': '(sa有+avajja无可责备的),【形】可责备的，有过失的。【中】可指责的。sāvajjatā,【阴】罪行，过失。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可责备的，有过失的。【中】可指责的。 ~tā, 【阴】罪行，过失。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa+avajja] blameable, faulty D.I,163; II,215; M.I,119; S.V,66, 104 sq.; Sn.534; Pug.30, 41; (nt.) what is censurable, sin J.I,130; Miln.392; VbhA.382 (mahā° or appa°, with ref. to var. crimes). (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāvajjatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. last] guilt Miln.293. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāvaka: {'def': '【阳】听者，弟子。 ~tta, 【中】弟子的身份。 ~saṅgha, 【阳】弟子的集合。 ~vikā, 【阴】女弟子。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. śru] a hearer, disciple (never an Arahant) D.I,164; II,104; III,47, 52, 120 sq., 133; A.I,88; M.I,234; S.II,26; It.75 sq., 79; J.I,229; Vism.214, 411. -- fem. sāvikā D.II,105; III,123; Th.2, 335; S.IV,379; A.I,25, 88. (Cp. ariya-°, agga-°, mahā).

--saṅgha the congregation of the eight Aryas M.II,120; S.I,220 (cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā); II,79 sq.; It.88. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹su(梵wru) 听),【阳】听者，弟子，声闻弟子(Sāvaka [fr. wru] a hearer, disciple)。sāvakatta,【中】弟子的身份。āvakasaṅgha,【阳】弟子众(声闻僧)。savikā,【阴】女弟子。Asīti mahāsāvakā﹐八十位大声闻弟子(见Aṭ3.59./CS:pg.2.132︰Asīti mahāsāvakāti(八十位大声闻弟子) Aññāsikoṇḍañño, Vappo, Bhaddiyo(Kāḷigodhāyaputto), Mahānāmo, Assaji, Nāḷako, Yaso, Vimalo, Subāhu, Puṇṇaji, Gavampati, Uruvelakassapo, Nadīkassapo, Gayākassapo, Sāriputto, Mahāmoggallāno, Mahākassapo, Mahākaccāno, Mahākoṭṭhiko, Mahākappino, Mahācundo, Anuruddho, Kaṅkhārevato(=Kaṅkhārevato), ānando, Nandako, Bhagu, Nandiyo, Kimilo, Bhaddiyo, Rāhulo, Sīvali, Upāli, Dabbo(=Dabbo Mallaputto), Upaseno(=Upaseno Vaṅgantaputto), Khadiravaniyarevato (=Revato Khadiravaniyo), Puṇṇo Mantāniputto, Puṇṇo Sunāparantako, Soṇo Kuṭikaṇṇo, Soṇo Koḷiviso, Rādho, Subhūti, Aṅgulimālo, Vakkali, Kāḷudāyī, Mahā-udāyī, Pilindavaccho, Sobhito, Kumārakassapo, Raṭṭhapālo, Vaṅgīso, Sabhiyo, Selo, Upavāṇo, Meghiyo, Sāgato, Nāgito, Lakuṇḍakabhaddiyo, Piṇḍolo Bhāradvājo, Mahāpanthako, Cūḷapanthako, Bākulo, Kuṇḍadhāno, Dārucīriyo(=Bāhiyo Dārucīriyo), Yasojo, Ajito Tissametteyyo, Puṇṇako, Mettagu, Dhotako, Upasīvo, Nando, Hemako, Todeyyo, Kappo, Jatukaṇṇī, Bhadrāvudho, Udayo, Posalo, Mogharājā, Piṅgiyoti ete asīti mahāsāvakā nāma.(标紫色的尊者是A.1.14.已提到的)(另外见：(《长老偈注释》Theragāthā-aṭṭhakathā CS:pg.2.541~2))。Cv.II,75.︰Yaṁ kiñci sāvakena pattabbaṁ, sabbaṁ mayā anuppattaṁ. Natthi ca me kiñci uttarikaraṇīyaṁ, katassa vā paticayo.(凡声闻所应达成的，一切我已达成。没有更高要做的或要增加的。)(陀骠--摩罗子(Dabbo Mallaputto)七岁时证得阿罗汉果的自述)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāvakatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. last] the state of a disciple M.I,379 sq. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāvana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sāveti] shouting out, announcement, sound, word J.II,352; Sdhp.67. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāvasesa: {'def': '【形】不完全的，有剩余物的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不完全的，有剩余物的。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+avasesa] with a remainder, incomplete, of an offence which can be done away Vin.I,354; II,88; V,153; A.I,88. -- Of a text (pāṭha) KhA 238; SnA 96. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāvatthī: {'def': '【阴】舍卫城(乔萨罗国 (Kosala) 的首都，古译有时误作：舍卫国)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（城市名）沙瓦提，（古音译：）舍卫，室罗筏，室罗伐', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 'f. [BSk. Śrāvastī ] 舎衛城[コーサラ国の首都].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阴】舍卫城（乔萨罗国 (Kosala) 的首都）。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāvaṇa: {'def': '【中】公告，宣言。【阳】萨瓦那月（月份名，大约七月至八月之间）。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】公告，宣言。【阳】萨瓦那月(月份名，大约七月至八月之间，阴历6月16至7月15)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāvaṭa: {'def': '(nt.) name of a certain throw in playing at dice J.VI,281 (v. l. sāvaṭṭa). (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāvaṭṭa: {'def': '(adj.) [sa³+āvaṭṭa] containing whirlpools It.114. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有漩涡的。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有漩涡的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāvetar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. sāveti] one who makes others hear, who tells D.I,56; A.IV,196. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāveti: {'def': 'is Caus. of suṇāti. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(su+e), 使听取，通告，宣布。【过】sāvesi。【过分】sāvita。【现分】sāventa, sāvayamāna。【义】sāvetabba。【独】sāvetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(su + e), 使听取，通告，宣布。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 sāvita。【现分】 sāventa, sāvayamāna。【潜】 ~vetabba。【独】 sāvetvā。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāvetu: {'def': '【阳】宣布的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】宣布的人。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāvi: {'def': '[Sk. śvāvidh, see Lüder’s Z.D.M.G. 61, 643] a porcupine J.V,489 (MSS. sāmi and sāsi, cp. Manu. V.18). (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāvittī: {'def': '(f.) the Vedic verse Sāvitrī Sn.457, 568=Vin.I,246 (Sāvitthī); J.IV,184. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'f. [Sk. Sāvitrī] 裟毘底[最も有名で重要な吠陀讃歌=Gāyatrī].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sāya: {'def': '(cp. Sk. Sāyaṁ)evening, only adverbially sāyaṁ, at night; usually opposed to pāto (pātaṁ) in the morning, early e. g. sāya-pātaṁ; sāyaṁ-pātaṁ; sāyañ ca pāto ca(朝暮); sāya-tatiyaka for the third time in the evening; sāyamāsa supper; sāyaṁ as quqsi-nominative: sāyaṁ ahosi; atisāyaṁ too late; sāyataraṁ later in the evening。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. sāyaṁ, on which Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 380, remarks: “this word seems to be the gerund of sā, and to have signified originally “having finished.” A masc. sāya does not exist.” Cp. Vedic °sāya] evening, only adverbially sāyaṁ, at night Vin.III,147; J.II,83; DhA.I,234; usually opposed to pāto (pātaṁ) in the morning, early e. g. sāya-pātaṁ D.II,188; Miln.419; J.I,432, 460; V,462; sāyaṁ-pātaṁ Vin.II,185; DhA.II,66; sāyañ ca pāto ca Pv.I,6³; II,9³⁷; PvA.127; sāya-tatiyaka for the third time in the evening D.I,167; A.II,206; V,263, 266, 268; M.I,343; sāyamāsa supper J.I,297; V,461; DhA.I,204. sāyaṁ as quâsi-nominative: sāyaṁ ahosi J.VI,505; atisāyaṁ too late Th.1, 231; J.II,362; V,94; sāyataraṁ later in the evening (compar.) J.VI,366. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāyaka: {'def': '【形】品尝的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】品尝的人。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāyana: {'def': '【中】尝味。 ~nīya, 【形】适合被品尝的。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² the Nāga tree (cp. nāga 3) J.VI,535 (vāraṇā sā yanā=nāgarukkhā, C., ibid. 535, var. read. vāyana). Kern, Toev. II.77 conjectures sāsanā “with Asana’s Terminalia’s.” (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】尝味。sāyanīya,【形】适合被品尝的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. sāyati] tasting, taste Dhtp 229. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāyati: {'def': ' [svad, Sk. svādate, cp. sādiyati] to taste, eat; pres. sāyati Vin.II,121; ppr. sāyanto D.III,85; grd. sāyanīya savoury Vin.I,44; S.I,162; ger. sāyitvā S.IV,176; A.III,163. Cp. saṁsāyati. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(sā + ya), 品尝。【过】 sāyi。【过分】 sāyita。【现分】 sāyanta。【独】sāyitvā。(p341)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sā使得细或纯+ya), 品尝。【过】sāyi。【过分】sāyita。【现分】sāyanta。【独】sāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāyaṇha: {'def': '[sāyaṁ+aṇha, cp. Sk. sāyāhna] evening D.II,9; J.I,144; --°samayaṁ at evening time D.II,205; M.I,147; Vin.I,21; sāyaṇhasamaye J.I,148, 279; PvA.33, 43, 100; °-kāle the same J.IV,120; sāyaṇhe (Loc.) J.I,144, 237; atisāyaṇha late evening J.VI,540. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】傍晚。 ~samaya, ~kāla, 【阳】黄昏。(p340)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sāyaṁ+aṇha, cp. Sk. Sāyāhna),【阳】傍晚(evening)。sāyaṇhasamaya, sāyaṇhakāla,【阳】黄昏(at evening time)。atisāyaṇha,【阳】很晚的黄昏(late evening)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāyika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. śī] lying, sleeping, resting in (-°) Dh.141; M.I,328 (vatthu°); Th.1, 501=Miln.367. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāyin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. śī] lying Dh.325. (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāyita: {'def': '[pp. of sāyati, cp. sāditar] (having) tasted, tasting D.I,70; II,95, 292; M.I,188, 461; Miln.378; Vism.258 (khāyita+). (Page 705)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāḷava: {'def': '【阳】沙拉，凉拌生菜，沙律。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. ṣāḍava, which is given in diff. meaning, viz. “comfits with fruits”] a certain dish, perhaps a kind of salad, given as “lambila,” i. e. bitter or astringent at DhsA.320 (made of badara or kapiṭṭha); cp. Vin.IV,259. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】色拉，凉拌生菜，沙律。(p342)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāḷika: {'def': 'a bird; f. °ā the Maina bird J.I,429; VI,421. Spelt sāḷiyā at J.VI,425. See sālikā & sāliya. (Page 707)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāṅgaṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [sa+aṅgaṇa] full of lust, impure M.I,24 (var. read saṅgaṇa; this is also the reading at Sn.279, see above). (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāṇa: {'def': '² [sa+iṇa] having a debt, indebted, fig. subjected to the kilesas, imperfect M.III,127=S.II,221 (=sakilesa, sa-iṇa K.S. II.203); ThA.8; cp. anaṇa under aṇa. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】麻，麻布。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】麻，麻布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Sk. śāṇa hempen, fr. śaṇa=P. saṇa; cp. bhaṅga¹] hemp D.II,350; Miln.267; a coarse hempen cloth Vin.I,58; D.I,166; III,41; M.I,78; A.I,240; S.II,202, 221; Pug.55; Vism.54 (°sāṭaka). -- sāṇavāka the same Th.2, 252; J.III,394 (var. read). (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāṇadhovana: {'def': '(nt.) a kind of play DA.I,84=saṇadhovikā. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāṇavāsi-Sambhūta: {'def': '= Sambhūta-Sāṇavāsi 商那和修[第二結集比丘. 阿難の弟子とされる]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sāṇi: {'def': '【阴】屏，帘。 ~pasibbaka, 【阳】麻布袋。 ~pākāra, 【阳】屏壁（麻布制的）。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāṇikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sāṇī] a curtain J.III,462. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāṇipasibbaka: {'def': '【阳】麻布袋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāṇipākāra: {'def': '【阳】(麻布制的)屏壁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāṇī: {'def': '(fr. saṇa),【阴】1.麻布(hemp-cloth)。2.屏，帘。(a screen, curtain, tent)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. saṇa] hemp-cloth D.II,350; Vin.III,17; a screen, curtain, tent J.I,58, 148 sq., 178, 419; DhA.I,194; II,49. °-pākāra a screen-wall Vin.IV,269, 279; J.II,88; DhA.II,68, 71, 186; VvA.173; PvA.283; Mhvs 7, 27; sāṇipasibbaka a sack or bag of hempcloth Vin.III,17¹⁰. -- paṭṭa-sāṇī a screen of fine cloth J.I,395. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāṭa: {'def': '[cp. Sk. śāṭa] a garment, cloth Th.2, 245; sāṭi (f.) the same S.I,115; Dh.394; J.I,230 (udaka° bathing mantle), 481. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. wāṭa), 外衣，衣料(a garment, cloth)。sāṭi【阴】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāṭaka: {'def': '[sāṭa+ka] an outer garment, cloak; cloth ThA.246; J.I,89, 138, 195, 373, 426; Vism.54 (sāṇa°), 275 (alla°); DhA.I,393 (thūla°). Cp. antara°, alaṁ°.

--lakkhaṇa prognostication drawn from pieces of cloth J.I,371. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 sāṭikā, 【阴】衣料，宽大外衣。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sāṭa+ka),【阳】sāṭikā,【阴】宽大外衣，衣料(an outer garment, cloak, cloth)。sāṭakalakkhaṇa﹐(prognostication drawn from pieces of cloth)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sāṭetar: {'def': '(ag. fr. sāṭeti),【中】拂(one who dispels, drives away)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[n. ag. fr. sāṭeti] one who dispels, drives away M.I,220; A.V,347 sq., 351, 359. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāṭeti: {'def': '[śat to cut, destroy] to cut open, to destroy; fig. to torment: Kern’s proposed reading (see Toev. s. v. sāveti) for sāveti at J.III,198 (amba-pakkāni); IV,402 (attānaṁ sāṭetvā dāsakammaṁ karissāni); VI,486 (kāyaṁ s.). He compares MVastu III,385: śāṭeti gātrāni. Cp. visāṭita & visāta. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sāṭheyya: {'def': '(梵sāṭhya),【中】谄(诈骗，属於覆真实，瞋。AA.2.16./II,163.：「骗人的相，称为‘谄’。」Kerāṭikalakkhaṇaṁ sāṭheyyaṁ.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. saṭha=*śāṭhya] craft, treachery M.I,15, 36, 281, 340; A.I,95, 100; Nd¹ 395; Pug.19, 23; Miln.289. Cp paṭi°. (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】手艺，背叛。(p339)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sāṭikā: {'def': '(f.)=sāṭaka Vin.I,292 sq.; II,31; 272, 279 (udaka° bathing mantle) J.I,330; Vism.339 (in simile); Miln.240 (cp. M.III,253). sāṭiya the same Vin.II,177 (°gāhāpaka receiver of undergarments). (Page 702)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīamttha: {'def': '【形】在边界之内的，在边界上的。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sīdana: {'def': '【中】沉没。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】沉没。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sīdati] sinking Mhvs 30, 54. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīdati: {'def': '(sad+a), 下沉，平息，产生。【过】sīdi。【过分】sīna。【独】sīditvā。【现分】sīdamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sad + a), 下沉，平息，产生。【过】 sīdi。【过分】 sīna。【独】 sīditvā。【现分】 sīdamāna。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': ' [sad, Idg. *si-ƶd-ō, redupl. formation like tiṣṭhati; cp. Lat. sīdo, Gr. i(/zw; Av. hidaiti. -- The Dhtp (50) gives the 3 meanings of “visaraṇa-gaty-avasādanesu”] to subside, sink; to yield, give way S.I,53; Sn.939 (=saṁsīdati osīdati Nd² 420); It.71; Mhvs 35, 35; 3^rd pl. sīdare J.II,393; Pot. sīde It.71; fut. sīdissati: see ni°. -- pp. sanna. -- Caus. sādeti (q. v.); Caus. II. sīdāpeti to cause to sink Sdhp.43. -- Cp. ni°, vi°. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīgha: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. śīghra] quick, rapid, swift M.I,120; A.I,45; Dh.29; Pug.42; °-gāmin walking quickly Sn.381; sīghasota swiftly running D.II,132; A.II,199; Sn.319; °-vāhana swift (as horses) J.VI,22; cp. adv. sīghataraṁ Miln.82; sīghaṁ (adv.) quickly Miln.147; VvA.6; VbhA.256; usually redupl. sīgha-sīghaṁ very quickly J.I,103; PvA.4. (Page 711)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】快的，迅速的，敏捷的。 ~gāmī, 【形】迅速地走动或移动的。~taraŋ, 【副】很快地，更快地。 ~sīghaŋ, 【副】非常快地，匆忙地。 ~sota,【形】有水流的。 ~ghaŋ, 【副】很快地，敏捷地。(p344)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】快的，迅速的，敏捷的。sīghagāmī,【形】迅速地走动或移动的。sīghataraṁ,【副】很快地，更快地。sīghasīghaṁ,【副】非常快地，匆忙地。sīghasota,【形】有水流的。sīghaṁ,【副】很快地，敏捷地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sīha: {'def': '【阳】狮子。 ~camma, 【中】狮皮。 ~nāda, 【阳】狮子吼，勇敢的演讲。 ~nādika, 【形】做狮子吼者。 ~pañjara, 【阳】狮子笼，窗户。~potaka, 【阳】小狮。 ~vikkīḷita, 【中】狮子的行动，舞狮。 ~seyyā, 【阴】狮子卧。 ~ssara, 【形】声音如狮子的。 ~hanu, 【形】颚如狮子的。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵siṃha),【阳】狮子(印度狮子现存於印度Gujarat的Gir森林，亚洲狮比非洲狮较少头发(Manes)，清楚见到耳朵，可能中国舞狮，是受印度狮影响，依照它的短发做型。根据DNA鉴定，印度狮和波斯狮简直就是双胞胎，可能十万年前来自非洲。)。sīhacamma,【中】狮皮。sīhanāda,【阳】狮子吼，勇敢的演讲。sīhanādika,【形】做狮子吼者。sīhapañjara,【阳】狮子笼，窗户。sīhapotaka,【阳】小狮。sīhavikkīḷita,【中】狮子的行动，舞狮。sīhaseyyā,【阴】狮子卧。sīhassara,【形】声音如狮子的。sīhanu,【形】颚如狮子的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic siṁha] 1. a lion D.II,255; S.I,16; A.II,33, 245; III,121; Sn.72; J.I,165; Miln.400; Nd² 679 (=migarājā); VbhA.256, 398 (with pop. etym. “sahanato ca hananato ca sīho ti vuccati”); J.V,425 (women like the lion); KhA 140; often used as an epithet of the Buddha A.II,24; III,122; S.I,28; It.123; fem. sīhī lioness J.II,27; III,149, and sīhinī Miln.67.

--āsana a throne Mhvs 5, 62; 25, 98. --kuṇḍala “lion’s ear-ring,” a very precious ear-ring J.V,348; SnA 138; also as °mukha-kuṇḍala at J.V,438. --camma lion’s hide A.IV,393. --tela “lion-oil,” a precious oil KhA 198. --nāda a lion’s roar, the Buddha’s preaching, a song of ecstasy, a shout of exultation “halleluiah” A.II,33; M.I,71; D.I,161, 175; S.II,27, 55; J 119; Miln.22; DhA.II,43, 178; VbhA.398; (=seṭṭha-nāda abhīta-nāda); SnA 163, 203. --nādika one who utters a lion’s roar, a song of ecstasy A.I,23. --pañjara a window J.I,304; II,31; DhA.I,191. --papātaka “lion’s cliff,” N. of one of the great lakes in the Himavā SnA 407 and passim. --piṭṭhe on top of the lion J.II,244. --potaka a young lion J.III,149. --mukha “lion’s mouth,” an ornament at the side of the nave of the king’s chariot KhA 172. See also °kuṇḍala. --ratha a chariot drawn by lions Miln.121. --vikkīḷita the lion’s play, the attitude of the Buddhas and Arahants Nett 2, 4, 7, 124. --seyyā lying like a lion, on the right side D.II,134; A.I,114; II,40, 244; J.I,119, 330; VbhA.345; DhA.I,357. --ssara having a voice like a lion J.V,284, 296 etc. (said of a prince). --hanu having a jaw like a lion, of a Buddha D.III,144, 175; Bu XIII,1=J.I,38. (Page 714)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīhalaṭṭhakathā: {'def': 'f. セイロン語の義疏[註釈書].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sīhalā: {'def': 'f. [Sīhaḷa-bhāsā] セイロン語.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sīhaḷa: {'def': 'Ceylon; (adj.) Singhalese Mhvs 7, 44 sq.; 37, 62; 37, 175; Dhvs 9, 1; KhA 47, 50, 78; SnA 30, 53 sq., 397. --°kuddāla a Singhalese hoe Vism.255; VbhA.238; --°dīpa Ceylon J.VI,30; DhsA.103; DA.I,1; KhA 132; --°bhāsā Singhalese (language) DA.I,1; Tikp 259. See Dict. of Names. (Page 714)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Siṃhala] セイロン, 師子胤, 師子国[国, 族, 島]. -dīpa師子洲, セイロン島. -bhāsā [=Sīhalā] セイロン語. -kuddālaセイロン鋤.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【形】斯里兰卡的。【阳】僧伽罗人。 ~dīpa, 【阳】斯里兰卡岛。~bhāsā, 【阴】僧伽罗语言。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】斯里兰卡的。【阳】僧伽罗人。sīhaḷadīpa,【阳】斯里兰卡岛。sīhaḷabhāsā,【阴】僧伽罗语言。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sīhaḷaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] Singhalese SnA 397. (Page 714)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīla: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. śīla. It is interesting to note that the Dhtp puts down a root sīl in meaning of samādhi (No. 268) and upadhāraṇa (615)] 1. nature, character, habit, behaviour; usually as --° in adj. function “being of such a nature,” like, having the character of . . ., e. g. adāna° of stingy character, illiberal Sn.244; PvA.68 (+maccharin); kiṁ° of what behaviour? Pv.II,9¹³; keḷi° tricky PvA.241; damana° one who conquers PvA.251; parisuddha° of excellent character A.III,124; pāpa° wicked Sn.246; bhaṇana° wont to speak DhA.IV,93; vāda° quarrelsome Sn.381 sq. -- dussīla (of) bad character D.III,235; Dhs.1327; Pug.20, 53; Pv.II,8² (noun); II,9⁶⁹ (adj.); DhA.II,252; IV,3; Sdhp.338; Miln.257; opp. susīla S.I,141. -- 2. moral practice, good character, Buddhist ethics, code of morality. (a) The dasa-sīla or 10 items of good character (not “commandments”) are (1) pāṇâtipātā veramaṇī, i. e. abstinence from taking life; (2) adinn’ādānā (from) taking what is not given to one; (3) abrahmacariyā adultery (oṭherwise called kāmesu micchā-cārā); (4) musāvādā telling lies; (5) pisuna-vācāya slander; (6) pharusa-vācāya harsh or impolite speech; (7) samphappalāpā frivolous and senseless talk; (8) abhijjhāya covetousness; (9) byāpādā malevolence; (10) micchādiṭṭhiyā heretic views. -- Of these 10 we sometimes find only the first 7 designated as “sīla” per se, or good character generally. See e. g. A.I,269 (where called sīla-sampadā); II,83 sq. (not called “sīla”), & sampadā. -- (b) The pañca-sīla or 5 items of good behaviour are Nos. 1--4 of dasa-sīla, and (5) abstaining from any state of indolence arising from (the use of) intoxicants, viz. surā-meraya-majjapamāda-ṭṭhānā veramaṇī. These five also from the first half of the 10 sikkha-padāni. They are a sort of preliminary condition to any higher development after conforming to the teaching of the Buddha (saraṇaṁgamana) and as such often mentioned when a new follower is “officially” installed, e. g. Bu II.190: saraṇâgamane kañci nivesesi Tathāgato kañci pañcasu sīlesu sīle dasavidhe paraṁ. From Pv IV.1⁷⁶ sq. (as also fr. Kh II. as following upon Kh I.) it is evident that the sikkhāpadāni are meant in this connection (either 5 or 10), and not the sīlaṁ, cp. also Pv IV.3⁵⁰ sq., although at the above passage of Bu and at J.I,28 as well as at Mhvs 18, 10 the expression dasa-sīla is used: evidently a later development of the term as regards dasa-sīla (cp. Mhvs trslⁿ 122, n. 3), which through the identity of the 5 sīlas & sikkhāpadas was transferred to the 10 sikkhāpadas. These 5 are often simply called pañca dhammā, e. g. at A.III,203 sq., 208 sq. Without a special title they are mentioned in connection with the “saraṇaṁ gata” formula e. g. at A.IV,266. Similarly the 10 sīlas (as above a) are only called dhammā at A.II,253 sq.; V,260; nor are they designated as sīla at A.II,221. -- pañcasu sīlesu samādapeti to instruct in the 5 sīlas (alias sikkhāpadāni) Vin.II,162. -- (c) The only standard enumerations of the 5 or 10 sīlas are found at two places in the Saṁyutta and correspond with those given in the Niddesa. See on the 10 (as given under a) S.IV,342 & Nd² s. v. sīla; on the 5 (also as under b) S.II,68 & Nd² s. v. The so-called 10 sīlas (Childers) as found at Kh II. (under the name of dasa-sikkhāpada) are of late origin & served as memorial verses for the use of novices. Strictly speaking they should not be called dasa-sīla. -- The eightfold sīla or the eight pledges which are recommended to the Buddhist layman (cp. Miln.333 mentioned below) are the sikkhāpadas Nos. 1--8 (see sikkhāpada), which in the Canon however do not occur under the name of sīla nor sikkhāpada, but as aṭṭhaṅga-samannāgata uposatha (or aṭṭhaṅgika u.) “the fast-day with its 8 constituents.” They are discussed in detail at A.IV,248 sq., with a poetical setting of the eight at A.IV,254=Sn.400, 401 -- (d) Three special tracts on morality are found in the Canon. The Cullasīla (D.I,3 sq.) consists first of the items (dasa) sīla 1-7; then follow specific injunctions as to practices of daily living & special conduct, of which the first 5 (omitting the introductory item of bījagāma-bhūtagāma-samārambha) form the second 5 sikkhāpadāni. Upon the Culla° follows the Majjhima° (D.I,5 sq.) & then the Mahāsīla D.I,9 sq. The whole of these 3 sīlas is called sīlakkhandha and is (in the Sāmaññaphala sutta e. g.) grouped with samādhi- and paññākkhandha: D.I,206 sq.; at A.V,205, 206 sīla-kkhandha refers to the Culla-sīla only. The three (s., samādhi & paññā) are often mentioned together, e. g. D.II,81, 84; It.51; DA.I,57. -- The characteristic of a kalyāṇa-mitta is endowment with saddhā, sīla, cāga, paññā A.IV,282. These four are counted as constituents of future bliss A.IV,282, and form the 4 sampadās ibid. 322. In another connection at M.III,99; Vism.19. They are, with suta (foll. after sīla) characteristic of the merit of the devatās A.I,210 sq. (under devat’ânussati). -- At Miln.333 sīla is classed as: saraṇa°, pañca°, aṭṭhaṅga°, dasaṅga°, pātimokkhasaṁvara°, all of which expressions refer to the sikkhāpadas and not to the sīlas. -- At Miln.336 sq. sīla functions as one of the 7 ratanas (the 5 as given under sampadā up to vimuttiñāṇadassana; plus paṭisambhidā and bojjhaṅga). -- cattāro sīlakkhandhā “4 sections of morality” Miln.243; Vism.15 & DhsA.168 (here as pātimokkha-saṁvara, indriya-saṁvara, ājīvapārisuddhi, paccaya-sannissita. The same with ref. to catubbidha sīla at J.III,195). See also under cpds. ‹-› At Ps.I,46 sq. we find the fivefold grouping as (1) pāṇâtipatassa pahānaṁ, (2) veramaṇī, (3) cetanā, (4) saṁvara, (5) avītikkama, which is commented on at Vism.49. -- A fourfold sīla (referring to the sikkhāpada) is given at Vism.15 as bhikkhu°, bhikkhunī°, anupasampanna° gahaṭṭha°. -- On sīla and adhisīla see e. g. A.I,229 sq.; VbhA.413 sq. -- The division of sīla at J.III,195 is a distinction of a simple sīla as “saṁvara,” of twofold sīla as “caritta-vāritta,” threefold as “kāyika, vācasika, mānasika,” and fourfold as above under cattāro sīlakkhandhā. -- See further generally: Ps.I,42 sq.; Vism.3 sq.; Tikp 154, 165 sq., 269, 277; Nd¹ 14, 188 (expl^d as “pātimokkha-saṁvara”); Nd² p. 277; VbhA.143.

--aṅga constituent of morality (applied to the pañcasikkhāpadaṁ) VbhA.381. --ācāra practice of morality J.I,187; II,3. --kathā exposition of the duties of morality Vin.I,15; A.I,125; J.I,188. --kkhandha all that belongs to moral practices, body of morality as forming the first constituent of the 5 khandhas or groups (+samādhi°, paññā°, vimutti°, ñāṇadassana-kkhandha), which make up the 5 sampadās or whole range of religious development; see e. g. Nd¹ 21, 39; Nd² p. 277. -- Vin. 162 sq.; III,164; A.I,124, 291; II,20; S.I,99 sq.; It.51, 107; Nett 90 sq., 128; Miln.243; DhA.III,417. --gandha the fragrance of good works Dh.55; Vism.58. --caraṇa moral life J.IV,328, 332. --tittha having good behaviour as its banks S.I,169, 183 (trslⁿ Mrs. Rh. D. “with virtue’s strand for bathing”). --bbata [=vata²] good works and ceremonial observances Dh.271; A.I,225; S.IV,118; Ud.71; Sn.231, etc.; sīlavata the same Sn.212, 782, 790, 797, 803, 899; It.79 sq.; °-parāmāsa the contagion of mere rule and ritual, the infatuation of good works, the delusion that they suffice Vin.I,184; M.I,433; Dhs.1005; A.III,377; IV,144 sq.; Nd¹ 98; Dukp 245, 282 sq.; DhsA.348; see also explⁿ at Cpd. 171, n. 4. ‹-› sīlabbatupādāna grasping after works and rites D.II,58; Dhs.1005, 1216; Vism.569; VbhA.181 sq. -- The old form sīlavata still preserves the original good sense, as much as “observing the rules of good conduct,” “being of virtuous behaviour.” Thus at Th.1, 12; Sn.212, 782 (expl^d in detail at Nd¹ 66), 790, 797, 803; It.79; J.VI,491 (ariya°). --bheda a breach of morality J.I,296. --mattaka a matter of mere morality D.I,3; DA.I,55. --maya consisting in morality It.51; VvA.10 (see maya, defⁿ 6). --vatta morality, virtue S.I,143; cp. J.III,360. --vipatti moral transgression Vin.I,171 sq.; D.II,85; A.I,95; 268 sq.; III,252; Pug.21; Vism.54, 57. --vipanna trespassing D.II,85; Pug.21; Vin.I,227. --vīmaṁsaka testing one’s reputation J.I,369; II,429; III,100, 193. --saṁvara self-restraint in conduct D.I,69; Dhs.1342; DA.I,182. --saṁvuta living under moral self-restraint Dh.281. --sampatti accomplishment or attainment by moral living Vism.57. --sampadā practice of morality Vin.I,227; D.II,86; M.I,194, 201 sq.; A.I,95, 269 sq., II.66; Pug. 25, 54. --sampanna practising morality, virtuous Vin.I,228; D.I,63; II,86; M.I,354; Th.2, 196; ThA.168; DA.I,182. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】自然，习惯，戒，道德规范。 ~kathā, 【阴】戒论。 ~kkhandha,【阳】戒蕴。 ~gandha, 【阳】戒香（=名望）。 ~bbata, ~vata, 【中】仪式。 ~bheda, 【阳】破戒。 ~maya, 【形】与道德有关的。 ~vantu, 【形】有品德的，守戒的。 ~vipatti, 【阴】犯戒。 ~vipanna, 【形】犯戒者。~sampatti, 【阴】守戒。 ~sampanna, 【形】守戒者。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '戒', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '戒。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(‹sīl学习，梵 wīla‹wīl),【中】1.戒(音译「尸罗」，作为防过止恶之用。「尸罗者是数习义，常习善法故曰尸罗。」《大毘婆沙论》卷第四十四﹐T27.230.1)，道德规范( moral practice, good character)。2.自然，习惯(nature, character, habit, behaviour)。sīlakathā,【阴】戒论。sīlakkhandha,【阳】戒蕴。sīlagandha,【阳】戒香(=名望)。sīlabbata, sīlavata,【中】仪式。sīlabheda,【阳】破戒。sīlamaya,【形】与道德有关的。sīlavantu,【形】有品德的，守戒的。sīlavipatti,【阴】犯戒。sīlavipanna,【形】犯戒者。sīlasampatti,【阴】守戒。sīlasampanna,【形】守戒者。aṭṭhaṅgasīla,【中】八戒。dasasīla,【中】十戒。kusalāni sīlāni【中.复】﹐善戒。S.47.15.：imāni kusalāni sīlāni yāvadeva catunnaṁ satipaṭṭhānānaṁ bhāvanāya vuttāni Bhagavatā(善戒者，乃为修习四念处，是世尊所说。) D.16./II,94.︰ “Ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgato hoti akhaṇḍehi acchiddehi asabalehi akammāsehi bhujissehi viññūpasatthehi aparāmaṭṭhehi samādhisaṁvattanikehi.(圣者所喜爱的戒上，具足：无毁、无孔、无斑点、令人自由、圣者所赞叹、不为其他所污、三昧增长。)D.4./I,124.(c.f.《长阿含种德经》大正1.96b)︰“evameva kho, bho Gotama, sīlaparidhotā paññā, paññāparidhotaṁ sīlaṁ. Yattha sīlaṁ tattha paññā, yattha paññā tattha sīlaṁ.(尊者瞿昙！如是，由戒净化慧，由慧净化戒。凡有戒则有慧，有慧则有戒。)三增上学是互相关联的，不只是持戒、得定、发慧的单一路径，有时可以定来净化戒(定共戒)，以慧(反省)来净化戒，以慧(技术)来助长定。tri-vidhāni wīlāni, trividhāni wīlāni,【梵】三聚净戒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sīlana: {'def': '【中】练习，抑制。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】练习，抑制。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sīlatā: {'def': '(f.) (-°) [abstr. fr. sīla] character(istic), nature, capacity DhA.III,272. (Page 713)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīlavant: {'def': '(adj.) [sīla+vant] virtuous, observing the moral precepts D.III,77, 259 sq., 285; A.I,150; II,58, 76; III,206 sq., 262 sq.; IV,290 sq., 314 sq.; V,10 sq., 71 sq.; Vism.58; DA.I,286; Tikp 279. -- Nom. sg. sīlavā D.I,114; S.I,166; It.63; Pug.26, 53; J.I,187; Acc. --vantaṁ Vin.III,133; Sn.624; Instr. --vatā S.III,167; Gen. --vato S.IV,303; Nom. pl. --vanto Pug.13; Dhs.1328; Nett 191; Acc. pl. --vante J.I,187; Instr. --vantehi D.II,80; Gen. pl. --vantānaṁ M.I,334; Gen. pl. --vataṁ Dh.56; J.I,144; f. --vatī D.II,12; Th.2, 449. compar. --vantatara J.II,3. (Page 713)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīlika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. sīla]=sīlin J.VI,64. (Page 713)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'sīlī,【形】(在【合】中) 有…性质的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'sīlī, 【形】 (在【合】中) 有…性质的。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sīlin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sīla] having a disposition or character; ariyasīlin having the virtue of an Ārya D.I,115; DA.I,286; niddāsīlin drowsy, Sn.96; vuddhasīlin increased in virtue D.I,114; sabhāsīlin fond of society Sn.96. (Page 713)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīliya: {'def': '(abstr. fr. sīla, Sk. wīlya for wailya),【中】行为(conduct, behaviour, character; said of bad behaviour)。dussīlya﹐坏行为。opp. sādhu-sīliya(=sundara-sīla-bhāva).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. sīla, Sk. śīlya for śailya] conduct, behaviour, character; said of bad behaviour, e. g. J.III,74=IV.71; emphasized as dussīlya, e. g. S.V,384; A.I,105; V,145 sq.; opp. sādhu-sīliya J.II,137 (=sundara-sīla-bhāva C.). (Page 713)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīmantinī: {'def': '【阴】女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】女人。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) a woman J.IV,310; VI,142. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīmattha: {'def': '【形】在边界之内的，在边界上的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sīmā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. sīmā] boundary, limit, parish Vin.I,106 sq., 309, 340; Nd¹ 99 (four); DhA.IV,115 (mālaka°); antosīmaṁ within the boundary Vin.I,132, 167; ekasīmāya within one boundary, in the same parish J.I,425; nissīmaṁ outside the boundary Vin.I,122, 132; bahisīmagata gone outside the boundary Vin.I,255. bhinnasīma transgressing the bounds (of decency) Miln.122. -- In compⁿ sīma° & sīmā°.

--anta a boundary Mhvs 25, 87; sin Sn.484; J.IV,311. --antarikā the interval between the boundaries J.I,265; Vism.74. --âtiga transgressing the limits of sin, conquering sin Sn.795; Nd¹ 99. --kata bounded, restricted Nd² p. 153 (cp. pariyanta). --ṭṭha dwelling within the boundary Vin.I,255. --samugghāta removal, abolish‹-› ing, of a boundary Mhvs 37, 33. --sambheda mixing up of the boundary lines Vism.193, 307, 315. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】边界，界限，界坛（戒堂）。 ~kata, 【形】限制的。 ~tiga, 【形】越过界限的。 ~samugghāta, 【阳】解除旧界。 ~sammuti, 【阴】设置新界（设置界坛）。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '戒堂，僧团用来传授具足戒、每半月诵戒的地方。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '【阴】边界，界限，戒坛(戒堂)。sīmākata,【形】限制的。sīmātiga,【形】越过界限的。sīmāsamugghāta,【阳】解除旧界(结界之前要先解除旧界，解除过去世比丘所结的戒坛)。sīmāsammuti,【阴】设置新界(设置界坛)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sīna: {'def': '(sīdati 的【过分】)。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(sīdati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pp. of sīyati; Sk. śīna] congealed; cold, frosty M.I,79. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of śṛ to crush; Sk. śīrṇa] fallen off, destroyed Miln.117 (°patta leafless); J.II,163 (°patta, so read for sīta°). See also saṁsīna. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīpada: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. slīpada] the Beri disease (elephantiasis) morbid enlargement of the legs; hence sīpadin and sīpadika suffering from that disease Vin.I,91, 322. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】象皮病（腿）。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】象皮病(腿)(elephantiasis)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sīra: {'def': '[Vedic sīra] plough ThA.270 (=naṅgala). (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīsa: {'def': '【中】头，顶点，玉米穗，标题，提示。 ~kapāla, ~kaṭāha, 【阳】头骨，颅骨，脑壳。 ~cchavi, 【阴】头皮。 ~cchejja, 【形】造成斩首的。~cchadana, 【中】斩首。 ~ppacālana, 【中】摇头。 ~paramparā, 【阴】换头顶负担。 ~veṭhana, 【中】缠头巾，头巾。 ~ābādha, 【阳】头的疾病。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Sk. sīsa] lead D.II,351; S.V,92; Miln.331; VbhA.63 (=kāḷa-tipu); a leaden coin J.I,7; °-kāra a worker in lead Miln.331; °-maya leaden Vin.I,190. (Page 713)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】头，顶点，玉米穗，标题，提示。sīsakapāla, sīsakaṭāha,【阳】颅骨，头盖骨，脑壳(a skull; a cranium)。sīsacchavi,【阴】头皮。sīsacchejja,【形】造成斩首的。sīsacchadana,【中】斩首。sīsappacālana,【中】摇头。sīsaparamparā,【阴】换头顶负担。sīsabhāra,枕头。sīsaveṭhana,【中】缠头巾，头巾。sīsavedanā,【阴】头部的感受。sīsābādha,【阳】头的疾病。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [Vedic śīrṣa: see under sira] 1. the head (of the body) Vin.I,8; A.I,207; Sn.199, 208, p. 80; J.I,74; II,103; sīsaṁ nahāta, one who has performed an ablution of the head D.II,172; PvA.82; āditta-sīsa, one whose turban has caught fire S.I,108; III,143; V,440; A.II,93; sīsato towards the head Mhvs 25, 93; adho-sīsa, head first J.I,233. -- 2. highest part, top, front: bhūmi° hill, place of vantage Dpvs 15, 26; J.II,406; caṅkamana° head of the cloister Vism.121; saṅgāma° front of the battle Pug.69; J.I,387; megha° head of the cloud J.I,103. In this sense also opposed to pāda (foot), e. g. sopāṇa° head (& foot) of the stairs DhA.I,115. Contrasted with sama (plain) Ps.I,101 sq. -- 3. chief point Ps.I,102. -- 4. panicle, ear (of rice or crops) A.IV,169; DA.I,118. -- 5. head, heading (as subdivision of a subject), as “chanda-sīsa citta-sīsa” grouped under chanda & citta Vism.376. Usually instr °sīsena “under the heading (or category) of,” e. g. citta° Vism.3; paribhoga° J.II,24; saññā° DhsA.200; kammaṭṭhāna° DhA.III,159.

--ânulokin looking ahead, looking attentively after something M.I,147. --ābādha disease of the head Vin.I,270 sq.; J.VI,331. --âbhitāpa heat in the head, headache Vin.I,204. --kaṭāha a skull D.II,297=M.I,58; Vism.260=KhA 60; KhA 49. --kalanda Miln.292. [Signification unknown; cp. kalanda a squirrel and kalandaka J.VI,227; a blanket [cushion?] or kerchief.] --cchavi the skin of the head Vin.I,277. --cola a headcloth, turban Mhvs 35, 53. --cchejja resulting in decapitation A.II,241. --ccheda decapitation, death J.I,167; Miln.358. --ppacālakaṁ swaying the head about Vin.IV,188. --paramparāya with heads close together DhA.I,49. --virecana purging to relieve the head D.I,12; DA.I,98. --veṭha head wrap S.IV,56. --veṭhana headcloth, turban M.II,193; sīsaveṭha id. M.I,244=S.IV,56. --vedanā headache M.I,243; II,193. (Page 713)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīsaka: {'def': '(nt.) [=sīsa] head, as adj. --° heading, with the head towards; uttarasīsaka head northwards D.II,137; pācīna° (of Māyā’s couch: eastward) J.I,50. heṭṭhāsīsaka head downwards J.III,13; dhammasīsaka worshipping righteousness beyond everything Miln.47, 117. (Page 714)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīta: {'def': '1,【形】凉爽，寒冷的。【中】冷，寒冷。sītabhīruka,【形】能冷的。sītibhavissanti﹐成为清凉、成为冷静。(《中阿含经》译：竟冷)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2,【中】帆，走路(sail J.IV.21. So also in BSk.: Jtm 94.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】凉爽，寒冷的。【中】冷，寒冷。 ~bhīruka, 【形】能冷的。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic śīta] cold, cool D.I,74, 148; II,129; A.II,117, 143; Sn.467, 1014; Vin.I,31, 288. (nt.) cold Vin.I,3; J.I,165; Mhvs 1, 28; Sn.52, 966. In compⁿ with kṛ & bhū the form is sīti°, e. g. sīti-kata made cool Vin.II,122; sīti-bhavati to become cooled, tranquillized S.II,83; III,126; IV,213; V,319; Sn.1073 (sīti-siyā, Pot. of bhavati); It.38; °-bhūta, tranquillized Vin.I,8; II,156; S.I,141, 178; Sn.542, 642; A.I,138; V,65; D.III,233; Vv 53²⁴; Pv.I,8⁷; IV,1³². sīti-bhāva coolness, dispassionateness, calm A.III,435; Th.2, 360; Ps.II,43; Vism.248; VbhA.230; PvA.230; ThA.244. ‹-› At J.II,163 & V,70 read sīna (“fallen”) for sīta.

--āluka susceptible of cold Vin.I,288 (synon. sītabhīruka). --uṇha cold and heat J.I,10. --odaka with cool water (pokkharaṇī) M.I,76; Pv.II,10⁴; sītodika (°iya) the same J.IV,438. --bhīruka being a chilly fellow Vin.I,288¹⁶ (cp. sītāluka). (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(nt.) sail J.IV,21. So also in BSk.: Jtm 94. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīta-vana: {'def': '(梵名 Witavana)﹐尸陀林、寒林、尸多婆那林、尸摩赊那林、深摩舍那林。位於中印度摩揭陀国王舍城北方之森林。林中幽邃且寒，初为该城人民弃屍之所，后为罪人之居地。其后泛称弃置死屍之所为寒林。(《佛光大辞典》p.942)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sītaka: {'def': '=sīta S.IV,289 (vāta). (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sītala: {'def': '【形】凉爽，寒冷的。【中】冷。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】凉爽、寒冷的(cold, cool)，宁静(tranquil J.I.3; VvA.44, 68, 100; PvA.77, 244.)。【中】冷(coolness)。sītalībhāva, 变成冷(becoming cool)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic śītala] cold, cool J.II,128; DA.I,1; Miln.246; tranquil J.I,3; (nt.) coolness Miln.76, 323; VvA.44, 68, 100; PvA.77, 244. sītalībhāva becoming cool Sdhp.33. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sītibhāva: {'def': '【阳】冷，平静。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】冷，平静。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sītibhūta: {'def': '【过分】已平静，已安静。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已平静，已安静。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sīti°: {'def': 'see sīta. The word sītisiyāvimokkha Ps.II,43, must be artificial, arisen from the pāda, sīti-siyā vimutto Sn.1073 (on which see explⁿ at Nd² 678). (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sītodaka: {'def': '【中】冷水。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】冷水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sītā: {'def': '【阴】犁沟。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】犁沟(furrow)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) a furrow Vin.I,240 (satta sītāyo); gambhīrasīta with deep mould (khetta) A.IV,237, 238 (text, °-sita).

--āloḷī mud from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin.I,206. (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīvana: {'def': '& sīveti: see vi°. (Page 713)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sīvathikā: {'def': '【阴】丢尸处。(p345)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [etym. doubtful; perhaps=*Sk. śivālaya; Kern derives it as śīvan “lying”+atthi “bone,” problematic] a cemetery, place where dead bodies are thrown to rot away Vin.III,36; D.II,295 sq.; A.III,268, 323; J.I,146; Pv III,5² (=susāna PvA.198); Vism.181, 240; PvA.195. (Page 713)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(etym. doubtful; perhaps=*Sk. wivālaya; Kern derives it as wīvan “lying”+atthi “bone,” problematic),【阴】弃屍处(a cemetery, place where dead bodies are thrown to rot away)。台语：墓仔埔bong7 a bo，塚仔埔(tiong a bo)。A.5.249./III,268︰“Pañcime, bhikkhave, ādīnavā sivathikāya. Katame pañca? Asuci, duggandhā, sappaṭibhayā, vāḷānaṁ amanussānaṁ āvāso, bahuno janassa ārodanā.(诸比丘！这五个是塚间的过患。什么是五？即：不净，恶臭，可怕，野兽及非人住处，多人恸哭。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sīveyyaka: {'def': 'Siveyyaka a. [＜Sivi] シビ国産の, 高価な布.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Sīyati: {'def': '[for Sk. śyāyati] to congeal or freeze: see visīyati & visīveti. -- pp. sīna². (Page 712)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sū: {'def': '(indecl.) an onomat. part. “shoo,” applied to hissing sounds: see su¹. Also doubled: sū sū DhA.I,171; III,352. Cp. sūkara & sūsūyati. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūcaka: {'def': '[fr. sūc to point out] an informer, slanderer S.II,257 (=pesuñña-kāraka C.); Sn.246. Cp. saṁ°. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】指出的，指出者，告知者，间谍(spy，台语：抓耙仔jiau3 pe5 a2，三脚仔sann kha a2)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】指出的，指出者，告知者。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sūcana: {'def': '【中】指示。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】指示。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) indicating, exhibiting Dhtp 592 (for gandh). (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūci: {'def': '【阴】针，发夹，发卡，小门闩。sūcikā,【阴】门闩，目次。sūcikāra,【阳】造针的铁匠。sūcighaṭikā,【阴】门闩的插壳。sūcighara,【中】针盒。sūcimukha,【阳】蚊子。sūciloma,【形】头发像针的。sūcivijjhana,【中】锥子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】针，发夹，发卡，小门闩。 ~kā, 【阴】门闩，目次。 ~kāra, 【阳】造针的铁匠。 ~ghaṭikā, 【阴】门闩的插壳。 ~ghara, 【中】针盒。 ~mukha,【阳】蚊子。 ~loma, 【形】头发象针的。 ~vijjhana, 【中】锥子。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. sūci; doubtful whether to sīv] a needle Vin.II,115, 117, 177; S.II,215 sq., 257; J.I,111, 248; Vism.284 (in simile); a hairpin Th.2, 254; J.I,9; a small door-bolt, a pin to secure the bolt M.I,126; Th.2, 116; J.I,360; V,294 (so for suci); ThA.117; cross-bar of a rail, railing [cp. BSk. sūcī Divy 221] D.II,179.

--kāra a needle-maker S.II,216. --ghaṭikā a small bolt to a door Vin.II,237; Ud.52; A.IV,206; J.I,346; VI,444; Vism.394. --ghara a needle case Vin.II,301 sq.; IV,123, 167; S.II,231; J.I,170. --nāḷikā a needle-case made of bamboo Vin.II,116. --mukha “needle-mouthed,” a mosquito Abhp 646; a sort of intestinal worm; °ā pāṇā (in the Gūthaniraya purgatory) M.III,185. --loma needle-haired, having hair like needles S.II,257; name of a Yakkha at Gayā S.I,207; Sn.p. 48; SnA 551; Vism.208. --vatta needle-faced, having a mouth like a needle Pgdp 55. --vāṇijaka a needle-seller S.II,215. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūcikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. sūci] 1. a needle; (fig.) hunger Pv.II,8³; PvA.107. -- 2. a small bolt to a door Vin.II,120, 148. ‹-› sūcik’aṭṭha whose bones are like needles (?) Pv III,2³; PvA.180 (sūcigātā ti vā pāṭho. Vijjhanatthena sūcikā ti laddhanāmāya khuppipāsāya ajjhāpīḷitā. Sūcikaṇṭhā ti keci paṭhanti. Sūcichiddasadisā mukhadvārā ti attho). (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūda: {'def': 'sūdaka,【阳】厨子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. sūda; for etym. see sādu] a cook D.I,51; S.V,149 sq.; J.V,292; DA.I,157; Vism.150 (in simile); Pv.II,9³⁷, 9⁵⁰. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'sūdaka, 【阳】厨子。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sūdaka: {'def': '=sūda (cook) J.V,507. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūju: {'def': '(adj.) [su+uju] upright Sn.143=Kh IX.1 (=suṭṭhu uju KhA 236). (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=su-huju),【形】正直的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】直立的。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sūka: {'def': '【阳】(大麦等的)芒(awn of barley)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. śūka] the awn of barley etc. S.V,10, 48; A.I,8. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】（大麦等的）芒。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sūkara: {'def': '【阳】猪。 ~potaka, 【阳】小猪。 ~maŋsa, 【中】猪肉。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. sūkara, perhaps as sū+kara; cp. Av. hū pig, Gr. u(_s; Lat. sūs; Ags. sū=E. sow] a hog, pig Vin.I,200; D.I,5; A.II,42 (kukkuṭa+), 209; It.36; J.I,197 (Muṇika); II,419 (Sālūka); III,287 (Cullatuṇḍila & Mahā-tuṇḍila); Miln.118, 267; VbhA.11 (vara-sayane sayāpita). -- f. sūkarī J.II,406 (read vañjha°).

--antaka a kind of girdle Vin.II,136. --maṁsa pork A.III,49 (sampanna-kolaka). --maddava is with Franke (Dīgha trslⁿ 222 sq.) to be interpreted as “soft (tender) boar’s flesh.” So also Oldenberg (Reden des B. 1922, 100) & Fleet (J.R.A.S. 1906, 656 & 881). Scarcely with Rh. D. (Dial. II.137, with note) as “quantity of truffles” D.II,127; Ud.81 sq.; Miln.175. --potaka the young of a pig J.V,19. --sāli a kind of wild rice J.VI,531 (v. l. sukasāli). (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】猪(a hog, pig)。sūkarapotaka,【阳】小猪。sūkaramaṁsa,【中】猪肉。sūkarakhata, 猪掘的(洞)。sūkara maddava，栴檀树耳(檀栴树产於印度，属白檀科，为一种寄生植物)。北传藏经皆谓佛陀因食栴檀树耳致死，然佛音尊者谓有数种说法：(一)不嫩也不老的美味野羊之肉。(二)在柔软的饭中注入牛乳，成为五味之食。(三)又有译为「乾的野猪肉」。近代学者 Dr. Hoey 言佛陀受供之当地，至今犹有农夫喜食丛林中长成一种茸之球状根，称为 sūkara-kaṇḍa。汉译作「栴檀树耳」，以「茸」之说较为适当。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sūkarika: {'def': '[fr. sūkara; BSk. saukarika Divy 505] a pigkiller, pork-butcher S.II,257; A.II,207; III,303; Pug.56; Th.2, 242; J.VI,111; ThA.204. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】猪的经销商，猪肉商贩。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】猪的经销商，猪肉商贩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sūla: {'def': '[cp. Vedic śūla] (m. and nt.) 1. a sharp-pointed instrument, a stake Th.2, 488; S.V,411; Pv IV.1⁶; Vism.489 (in compar.), 646 (khadira°, ayo°, suvaṇṇa°); ThA.288; J.I,143, 326; sūle uttāseti to impale A.I,48; J.I,326; II,443; IV,29; appeti the same J.III,34; VI,17, or āropeti PvA.220. ayasūla an iron stake J.IV,29; Sn.667; cp. asi° & satti°. -- 2. a spit J.I,211; roasted on a spit, roasted meat J.III,220; maṁsa° the same, or perhaps a spit with roasted meat J.III,52, 220. -- 3. an acute, sharp pain DhsA.397; sūlā (f.) the same A.V,110⁵. Cp. defⁿ of sūl as “rujā” at Dhtp 272.

--āropana impaling, execution Miln.197, 290. --koṭi the point of the stake DhA.II,240. (Page 722)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】柱，矛。 ~āropaṇa, 【中】刺穿。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】柱，矛。sūlāropaṇa,【中】刺穿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sūna: {'def': '【阴】切肉台。 ~ghara, 【中】屠场。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】切肉台。sūnaghara,【中】屠场。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. śūna] swollen Miln.357¹⁹; J.VI,555; often wrongly spelt suna (q. v.) Vin.II,253=A.IV,275 (cp. Leumann, Gött. Anz., 1899, p. 595); DhsA.197 (suna-bhāva). (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】肿胀的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】肿胀的。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sūnu: {'def': '[Vedic sūnu, fr. sū, cp. sūti] a son, child Mhvs 38, 87. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】儿子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】儿子。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sūnā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. sūnā] a slaughter-house Vin.I,202; II,267; asisūnā the same Vin.II,26; M.I,130, 143; also sūna J.VI,111; and sūṇā J.V,303; sūnāpaṇa J.VI,111; sūnaghara Vin.III,59; sūna-nissita Vin.III,151; sūnakāraghara VbhA.252. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūpa: {'def': '【阳】咖哩饭菜，菜肴。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic sūpa, cp. Ags. sūpan=Ger. saufen; Ohg. sūf=soup] broth, soup, curry Vin.II,77, 214 sq.; IV,192; D.I,105; S.V,129 sq. (their var. flavours); A.III,49 (aneka°); J.II,66; Vism.343. samasūpaka with equal curry Vin.IV,192. Also nt. Vin.I,239²¹ (-āni) and f. sūpi J.IV,352 (bidalasūpiyo); sūpavyañjanaka a vessel for curry and sauce Vin.I,240.

--vyañjana curry J.I,197. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic sūpa),【阳】菜肴，咖哩饭菜(broth, soup, curry)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sūpadhārita: {'def': '【过分】已考虑好。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '=su+upadhārita well-known Miln.10. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已考虑好。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sūpatittha: {'def': '(su+upa近+tittha), 有美丽的浅滩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(su + upa + tittha), 有美丽的浅滩。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [su+upatittha, the latter=tittha, cp. upavana: vana] with beautiful banks. Usually spelt su°, as if su+patittha (see patittha), e. g. Vin.III,108; J.VI,518, 555 (=sobhana°); D.II,129; Ud.83; Pv.II,1²⁰ (=sundara-tittha PvA.77). But sū° at M.I,76, 283; Ap 333. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūpeyya: {'def': '【形】可做咖哩的。 ~paṇṇa, 【中】咖哩菜。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】可做咖哩的。sūpeyyapaṇṇa,【中】咖哩菜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sūpa=Sk. sūpya] 1. belonging to soup, broth, soup M.I,448; S.III,146. -- 2. curry D.II,198; Nd² 314; DhA.IV,209.

--paṇṇa curry leaf, curry stuff Vism.250=VbhA.233; J.I,98, 99; --sāka a potherb for making curry J.IV,445. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūpika: {'def': '【阳】厨子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sūpa+ika] a cook DA.I,157; J.VI,62 (v. l.), 277. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】厨子。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Sūpin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sūpa] having curry, together with curry J.III,328. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūra: {'def': '² [Vedic sūra] the sun ThA.150 (Ap. V,90); J.V,56. (Page 722)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'sūriya, 【阳】太阳。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1(‹Vedic wūra, fr. wū),【形】英勇的、勇敢的(valiant, courageous)。【阳】英雄。sūratā,【阴】sūrabhāva,【阳】勇气(strength, valour)。sūrakathā﹐【阴】英雄论、英雄故事(a tale about heroes)。Parosahassaṁ kho panassa puttā bhavanti sūrā vīraṅgarūpā parasenappamaddanā.(将有逾千王子(皆具)勇猛与英雄气慨，善伐敌军)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic śūra, fr. śū] valiant, courageous S.I,21; J.I,262, 320; II,119; (m.) a hero, a valiant man D.I,51, 89; III,59, 142, 145 sq; A.IV,107, 110; Sn.831; DA. 157, 250; (nt.) valour S.V,227, read sūriya.

--kathā a tale about heroes D.I,8; DA.I,90. --kāka the valiant crow DhA.III,352. --bhāva strength, valour J.I,130; Vism.417 (in def. of suriya). (Page 722)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】英勇的，勇敢的。【阳】英雄。 ~tā, 【阴】 ~bhāva, 【阳】勇气。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2, sūriya(Vedic sūra),【阳】太阳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sūrasena: {'def': 'm. 首羅先那, ス一ラセ一ナ [西インドの国, 十六大国の一, 首都はマドウラ]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Sūrata: {'def': '(=surata) 温顺，柔和(soft, mild J.VI,286; Mhbv 75; kindly disposed S.IV,305.)。Cp. surata & sorata。soracciya,【中】温顺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[=surata] soft, mild J.VI,286; Mhbv 75; kindly disposed S.IV,305. Cp. surata & sorata. (Page 722)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūrin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. sūra¹] wise Mhvs 26, 23. (Page 722)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūriya: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. sūra¹] valour S.V,227 (text, sūra); J.I,282; Miln.4. (Page 722)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūsūyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. sū] to make a hissing sound “sū sū” (of a snake) DhA.II,257 (v. l. susumāyati). (Page 722)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūta: {'def': '【阳】战车的御者。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】驾驶战车的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. sūta] a charioteer J.IV,408; a bard, panegyrist J.I,60; V,258. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūtighara: {'def': '【中】临盆室。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】临盆室。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [sūti+ghara] a lying-in-chamber J.IV,188; VI,485; Vism.259 (KhA pasūti°); VbhA.33, 242. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūyati: {'def': 'is passive of suṇāti. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(suṇāti 的【被】), 被听到。【现分】 sūyamāna。(p351)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(suṇāti 的【被】), 被听到。【现分】sūyamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Sūḷāra: {'def': '(adj.) [su+uḷāra] magnificent Mhvs 28, 1. (Page 722)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Sūṇā: {'def': '(f.) a slaughter-house J.VI,62; see sūnā. (Page 721)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

T: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第十六个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中清音的 d。(p140)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第十六个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中清音的 d。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ta: {'def': '(指示的【代】), 那，(so = 他，sā = 她，taṁ = 某事，那件事)。【阳】：单.主.so & sa；复.主te(﹑ne)；单.宾.taṁ(﹑naṁ)；复.宾.te(﹑ne)；单.具.tena(﹑nena)；复.具.tehi & tebhi(﹑nehi﹑nebhi)；单.离.tasmā & tamhā；复.离.tehi & tebhi(﹑nehi﹑nebhi)；单.与.﹑属tassa(﹑nassa)；复.与.属.tesaṁ & tesānaṁ(﹑nesaṁ﹑nesānaṁ)；单.处.tasmiṁ & tamhi(﹑nasmiṁ﹑namhi)；复.处.tesu(﹑nesu)。【中】：单.主.taṁ (the usual form) ﹑tad(older)﹑naṁ；复.主.tāni﹑nāni；单.宾.taṁ﹑tad﹑naṁ；复.宾.tāni﹑nāni。(其余同阳性)。【阴】：单.主sā；复.主.tā & tāyo(﹑nā﹑nāyo)；单.宾.taṁ；复.宾.te单.具.tāya(﹑nāya)；复.具.tāhi & tābhi(﹑nāhi﹑nābhi)；单.离tāya(﹑nāya)；复.离.tāhi & tābhi(﹑nāhi﹑nābhi)；单.与﹑属.tāya(﹑nāya﹑tassā ﹑tassāya﹑tissā﹑tissāya)；复.与﹑属.tāsaṁ﹑tāsānaṁ；单.处.tāyaṁ(﹑tāsaṁ﹑tassaṁ﹑tissaṁ)；复.处.tāsu。tesaṁ tesaṁ﹐各种，彼彼。taṁ enaṁ﹐立即(at once, presently (=tāvad-eva))。tadeva(ta+d+eva强调语气)﹐他正是、正是他。tenetaṁ﹐所以这样。tassa me，我这个人的(ta, 那(sg.Gen.)，用来强调me(sg.Gen.)‹amha)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(指示的【代】), 那，(so = 他， sā = 她， taŋ = 那一件事物，是这一些的词形)。(p140)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tabbahula: {'def': '【形】有丰富地，有时常的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有丰富地，有时常的。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tabbhāva: {'def': '【阳】那个境界，真正的本性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】那个境界，真正的本性。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tabbipakkha: {'def': '【形】与那敌对的。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】与那敌对的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tabbiparīta: {'def': '【形】不同的(different)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】与那不同的。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tabbisaya: {'def': '【形】不同的(various)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有那为对象的。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tab°: {'def': 'in cpds. tabbisaya, tabbahula, etc.=taṁ°, see under ta° I. a. (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taca: {'def': '(& taco nt.) [Vedic tvak (f.), Gen. tvacaḥ] 1. bark. ‹-› 2. skin, hide (similar to camma, denoting the thick, outer skin, as contrasted with chavi, thin skin, see chavi & cp. J.I,146). -- 1. bark: M.I,198, 434, 488; A.V,5. -- 2. skin: often used together with nahāru & aṭṭhi (tendons & bones), to denote the outer appearance (framework) of the body, or that which is most conspicuous in emaciation: A.I,50=Sdhp. 46; tacamaṁsâvalepana (+aṭṭhī nahārusaṁyutta) Sn.194= J.I,146 (where °vilepana); SnA 247; aṭṭhi-taca-mattâvasesasarīra “nothing but skin & bones” PvA.201. ‹-› Of the cast-off skin of a snake: urago va jiṇṇaṁ tacaṁ jahāti Sn.1, same simile Pv.I,12¹ (=nimmoka PvA.63). -- kañcanasannibha-taca (adj.) of golden-coloured skin (a sign of beauty) Sn.551; Vv 30²=32³; Miln.75; VvA.9. -- valita-tacatā a condition of wrinkled skin (as sign of age) Nd² 252≈; Kh III,; KhA 45; Sdhp.102.

--gandha the scent of bark Dhs.625; --pañcaka-kammaṭṭhāna the fivefold “body is skin,” etc, subject of kammaṭṭhāna-practice. This refers to the satipaṭṭhānā (kāye kāy’ânupassanā:) see kāya I. (a) of which the first deals with the anupassanā (viewing) of the body as consisting of the five (dermatic) constituents of kesā lomā nakhā dantā, taco (hair of head, other hair, nails, teeth, skin or epidermis: see Kh III,). It occurs in formula (inducing a person to take up the life of a bhikkhu): taca-p-kammaṭṭhānaṁ ācikkhitvā taṁ pabbājesi J.I,116; DhA.I,243; II,87, 140, 242. Cp. also Vism.353; DhA.II,88; SnA 246, 247; --pariyonaddha with wrinkled (shrivelled) skin (of Petas: as sign of thirst) PvA.172; --rasa the taste of bark Dhs.629, --sāra (a) (even) the best (bark, i. e.) tree S.I,70=90= It.45; -- (b) a (rope of) strong fibre J.III,204 (=veṇudaṇḍaka). (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐taco(梵tvak【中】) 【中】【阳】皮，皮肤，树皮，兽皮。tacagandha,【阳】树皮的气味。tacapañcaka,【中】皮组的五个(与皮组成的一组的五个，即：发、毛、爪、齿、皮＝ kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco)。tacapariyosāna,【形】以皮为限的。tacarasa，树皮味。tacasāra﹐竹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】皮，皮肤，树皮，兽皮。 ~gandha, 【阳】树皮的气味。 ~pañcaka,【中】皮组的五个（与皮组成的一组的五个，即：发、毛、爪、齿、皮＝kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco）。 ~pariyosāna, 【形】以皮为限的。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Taccarita: {'def': '(adj.) in combⁿ with tabbahula taggaruka tanninna tappoṇa tappabhāra freq. as formula, expressing: converging to this end, bent thereon, striving towards this (aim): Nd² under tad. The same combⁿ with Nibbāna-ninna, N.-poṇa, N.-pabhāra freq. (see Nibbāna). (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taccha: {'def': '【形】真实的，真正的。【中】事实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】真实的，真正的。【中】事实。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic takṣan, cp. taṣṭṛ, to takṣati (see taccheti), Lat. textor, Gr. tέktwn carpenter (cp. architect), tέxnh art] a carpenter, usually as °ka: otherwise only in cpd. °sūkara the carpenter-pig (=a boar, so called from felling trees), title & hero of Jātaka No. 492 (IV.342 sq.). Cp. vaḍḍhakin. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [Der. fr. tathā+ya=tath-ya “as it is,” Sk. tathya] true, real, justified, usually in combⁿ w. bhūta. bhūta taccha tatha, D.I,190 (paṭipadā: the only true & real path) S.V,229 (dhamma; text has tathā, v. l. tathaṁ better); as bhūta t. dhammika (well founded and just) D.I,230. bhūta+taccha: A.II,100=Pug.50; VvA.72. -- yathā tacchaṁ according to truth Sn.1096. which is interpreted by Nd² 270: tacchaṁ vuccati amataṁ Nibbānaṁ, etc. -- (nt.) taccha a truth Sn.327. -- ataccha false, unreal, unfounded; a lie, a falsehood D.I,3 (abhūta+); VvA.72 (=musā). (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tacchaka: {'def': '【阳】木匠，切木材的工具(錾，凿，切碎机，切片机，削片机等)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '=taccha¹. (a) a carpenter Dh.80 (cp. DhA.II,147); Miln.413. magga° a road-builder J.VI,348. -- (b)=taccha-sūkara J.IV,350. -- (c) a class of Nāgas D.II,258. -- f. tacchikā a woman of low social standing (=veṇī, bamboo-worker) J.V,306. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】木匠，切木材的工具（錾，凿，切碎机，切片机，削片机等）。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tacchana: {'def': '【中】切下，削去(掉)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】切下，削去（掉）。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tacchanī: {'def': '【阴】锛子。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】锛子(chip-axe)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tacchati: {'def': '(tacch+a), 削，切(成小片)，削(成薄片)，削尖，刨削，凿，铲，刻。【过】tacchi。【过分】tacchita。【独】tacchitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(tacch + a), 削，切（成小片），削（成薄片），削尖，刨削，凿，铲，刻。【过】 tacchi。【过分】 tacchita。【独】 tacchitvā。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. taccha¹, cp. taccheti] to build, construct; maggaṁ t. to construct or repair a road J.VI,348. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taccheti: {'def': '[probably a denom. fr. taccha¹=Lat. texo to weave (orig. to plait, work together, work artistically), cp. Sk. taṣṭṛ architect =Lat. textor; Sk. takṣan, etc., Gr. tέxnh craft, handiwork (cp. technique), Ohg. dehsa hatchet. Cp. also orig. meaning of karoti & kamma] to do wood-work, to square, frame, chip J.I,201; Miln.372, 383. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tacch + e), 削。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 tacchita。【现分】 tacchenta,【独】 tacchetvā。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tacch+e), 削。【过】tacchesi。【过分】tacchita。【现分】tacchenta,【独】tacchetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tadagge: {'def': '【副】自此以后，今后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】自此以后，今后。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tadaha: {'def': 'tadahu,【中】同一天。tadahuposathe,【处】在布萨日(在斋戒日)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'tadahu, 【中】同一天。 ~huposathe, 【处】在布萨日（在斋戒日）。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tadanurūpa: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. ta° I a] befitting, suitable, going well with J.VI,366; DhA.IV,15. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】符合那样的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】符合那样的。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tadatthaŋ: {'def': '【无】 (taŋ + atthaŋ), 对那（实用）场合来说。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tadatthaṁ: {'def': '【无】(taṁ+atthaṁ), 对那(实用)场合来说。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tadaṅga: {'def': '【形】当时的 (?)。【中】那部分。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】暂时的(日语：とうぶんのあいだ,当分の间)。【中】那部分。tadaṅgappahāna,【中】暂断(彼分断)，暂时断除烦恼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tadupeta: {'def': '【形】赋予那的，有那的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】赋予那的，有那的。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tadupiya: {'def': '【形】与那一致的，与那相符合的，适合的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】与那一致的，与那相符合的，适合的。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tadā: {'def': '【无】那时，然后。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic; cp. kadā] then, as that time (either past or future) D.II,157; J.II,113, 158; Pv.I,10⁵; PvA.42. Also used like an adj.: te tadā-mātāpitaro etarahi m° ahesuṁ “the then mother & father” J.I,215 (cp. Lat. quondam); tadā-sotāpanna-upāsaka J.II,113. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】那时，然后。tadāssu﹐【祈.1.复】【祈.3.复】那时，令我们(他们)…。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tadārammaṇa: {'def': '【中】彼所缘。(Vibhv.CS:p.125)：Taṁtaṁjavanaggahitārammaṇassa ārammaṇakaraṇaṁ tadārammaṇakiccaṁ.(以速行所取的所缘，作为所缘，是彼所缘的作用。)当目标不明显或不清晰，以及当心路过程并不属於欲界时，「彼所缘」的作用不会产生。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tadūpika: {'def': '& Tadūpiya see ta° I. a. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tagara: {'def': '【中】冠状狗牙花（(Ervatamia coronaria)〔荚竹桃科〕的一种栽培灌木，花冠卷起或波状—亦称亚当苹果 (Adam’s apple)）。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】冠状狗牙花((Ervatamia coronaria)〔荚竹桃科〕的一种栽培灌木，花冠卷起或波状—亦称亚当苹果 (Adam’s apple))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) the shrub Tabernaemontana coronaria, and a fragrant powder or perfume obtained from it, incense Vin.I,203; It.68 (=Udānavarga p. 112, No. 8); Dh.54, 55, 56 (candana+); J.IV,286; VI,100 (the shrub) 173 (id.); Miln.338; Dāvs.V,50; DhA.I,422 (tagara-mallikā two kinds of gandhā). (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taggaruka: {'def': '【形】在其上弯曲的。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】在其上弯曲的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '=tad+garuka, see taccarita. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taggha: {'def': '（肯定语的虚词）真实地，当然，如果它是如此。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[tad+gha, cp. in-gha & Lat. ec-ce ego-met, Gr. e)gw/--ge] affirmative particle (“ekaṁsena” DA.I,236; ekaṁsa-vacana J.V,66; ekaṁse nipāta J.V,307): truly, surely, there now! Vin.II,126, 297; D.I,85; M.I,207, 463; III,179; J.V,65 (v. l. tagghā); Sn.p. 87. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(肯定语的虚词)真实地，当然，如果它是如此。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tahaŋ: {'def': 'tahiŋ, 【副】那里，在其上，在那个地方中。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tahaṁ: {'def': 'tahiṁ,【副】那里，在其上，在那个地方中。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tajja: {'def': '【形】从那出现的。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tad+ya, cp.Sk.tadīya),【形】属於这个(belonging to this)，基於这个(founded on this or that; on the ground of this (or these))。tajjo ca vāyāmo, 适当的努力(a suitable effort)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[tad+ya, cp. Sk. tadīya] “this like,” belonging to this, founded on this or that; on the ground of this (or these), appropriate, suitable; esp. in combⁿ with vāyāma (a suitable effort as “causa movens”) A.I,207; Miln.53. Also with reference to sense-impressions, etc. denoting the complemental sensation S.IV,215; M.I,190, 191; Dhs.3--6 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 6 & Com. expl. anucchavika). -- PvA.203 (tajjassa pāpassa katattā: by the doing of such evil, v. l. SS tassajjassa, may be a contraction of tādiyassa otherwise tādisassa). Note. The explⁿ of Kern, Toev. II.87 (tajja=tad+ja “arising from this”) is syntactically impossible. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tajjaniya: {'def': '[grd. of tajjeti] to be blamed or censured Vism.115 (a°); (n.) censure, blame, scorn, rebuke. M 50th Sta; Miln.365. As t. t. °kamma one of the saṅgha-kammas: Vin.I,49, 53, 143 sq., 325; II,3 sq., 226, 230; A.I,99. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】被责难的，被指责的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】被责难的，被指责的。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tajjanā: {'def': '【阴】威胁。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹tajjeti),【阴】威胁(threat, menace)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [from tajjeti] threat, menace J.II,169; Vv 50⁹; VvA.212 (bhayasantajjana). (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tajjanī: {'def': '【阴】食指(日语：人差し指hitosashi yubi)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】食指。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tajjeti: {'def': '(tajj+e), 惊吓，恐吓。【过】tajjesi。【过分】tajjita。【现分】tajjenta。【独】tajjetvā。maraṇabhayatajjitā,以死来恐吓。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(tajj + e), 惊吓，恐吓。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 tajjita。【现分】 tajjenta。【独】 tajjetvā。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of tarjati, to frighten. Cp. Gr. taρbos fright, fear, tarbέw; Lat. torvus wild, frightful] to frighten, threaten; curse, rail against J.I,157, 158; PvA.55. ‹-› pp. tajjita. -- Caus. tajjāpeti to cause to threaten, to accuse PvA.23 (=paribhāsāpeti). (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tajjita: {'def': '[pp. of tajjeti] threatened, frightened, scared; spurred or moved by (-°) D.I,141 (daṇḍa°, bhaya°); Dh.188 (bhaya°); Pug.56. Esp. in combⁿ maraṇabhaya° moved by the fear of death J.I,150, 223; PvA.216. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tajjārī: {'def': 'a linear measure, equal to 36 aṇu’s and of which 36 form one rathareṇu VbhA.343; cp. Abhp 194 (tajjarī). (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taka: {'def': 'a kind of medicinal gum, enumerated with two varieties, viz. takapattī & takapaṇṇī under jatūni bhesajjāni at Vin.I,201. (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Takka: {'def': '¹ [Sk. tarka doubt; science of logic (lit. “turning & twisting”) *treik, cp. Lat. tricæ, intricare (to “trick,” puzzle), & also Sk. tarku bobbin, spindle, Lat. torqueo (torture, turn)] doubt; a doubtful view (often= diṭṭhi, appl. like sammā°, micchā-diṭṭhi), hair-splitting reasoning, sophistry (=itihītihaṁ Nd² 151). Opp. to takka (=micchā-saṅkappo Vbh.86, 356) is dhammatakka right thought (:vuccati sammā-saṅkappo Nd² 318; cp. Dhs.7, 298), D.I,16 (°pariyāhata); M.I,68 (id.); Sn.209 (°ṁ pahāya na upeti saṅkhaṁ) 885 (doubt), 886; Dhs.7, 21, 298 (+vitakka, trsl. as “ratiocination” by Mrs. Rh. D.); Vbh.86, 237 (sammā°) 356; Vism.189. See also vitakka.

--āgama the way of (right) thought, the discipline of correct reasoning Dāvs.V,22; --âvacara as neg. atakkâvacarâ in phrase dhammā gambhīrā duddasā a° nipuṇā (views, etc.) deep, difficult to know, beyond logic (or sophistry: i. e. not accessible to doubt?), profound Vin.I,4=D.I,12=S.I,136=M.I,487. Gogerley trsl. “unattainable by reasoning,” Andersen “being beyond the sphere of thought”; --āsaya room for doubt Sn.972; --gahaṇa the thicket of doubt or sophistry J.I,97; --vaḍḍhana increasing, furthering doubt or wrong ideas Sn.1084 (see Nd² 269); --hetu ground for doubt (or reasoning?) A.II,193=Nd² 151. (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [Should it not belong to the same root as takka¹?] buttermilk (with 1/4 water), included in the five products from a cow (pañca gorasā) at Vin.I,244; made by churning dadhi Miln.173; J.I,340; II,363; DhA.II,68 (takkâdi-ambila). (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(Sk. tarka doubt; science of logic),【阳】想，推论，逻辑。Opp. to takka (=micchā-saṅkappo Vbh 86, 356) is dhammatakka right thought (:vuccati sammā-saṅkappo Nd2 318; cp. Dhs 7, 298), D I.16 (takkapariyāhata); M I.68 (id.); Sn 209 (takkaṁ pahāya na upeti saṅkhaṁ) 885 (doubt), 886; Dhs 7, 21, 298 (+vitakka, trsl. as “ratiocination” by Mrs. Rh. D.); Vbh 86, 237 (sammātakka) 356; Vism 189.。takkāgama, (正确的)推论而来(Dāvs V.22)。takkāvacara as neg. atakkqvacarq in phrase dhammā gambhīrā duddasā a° nipuṇā (views, etc.) deep, difficult to know, beyond logic (or sophistry: i. e. not accessible to doubt?), profound Vin I.4=D I.12=S I.136=M I.487. Gogerley trsl. “unattainable by reasoning,” Andersen “being beyond the sphere of thought”。takkāsaya room for doubt Sn 972。takkagahaṇa the thicket of doubt or sophistry J I.97。takkavaḍḍhana increasing, furthering doubt or wrong ideas Sn 1084 (see Nd2 269)。takkahetu ground for doubt (or reasoning?) A II.193=Nd2 151.。See also vitakka.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2,【中】酪乳(buttermilk。凝乳(dadhi)加1/4水搅拌而成。Miln.173; J.I.340; II.363)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】想，推论，逻辑。【中】酪乳。(p140)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Takkana: {'def': '【中】思考，推理。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】思考，推理。(p140)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Takkara: {'def': '【形】在其中的行为者。【阳】小偷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】在其中的行为者。【阳】小偷。(p140)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (=tat-kara) a doer thereof D.I,235, M.I,68; Dh.19. (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² a robber, a thief J.IV,432. (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Takkasilā: {'def': 'f. [Sk. Takṣaśilā] 德迦尸羅, タクシラ(Takkasilā) [印度西北的都市].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '【阴】呾叉始罗(犍陀罗国 (Gandhāra) 的一城名。在那里有一所衆所周知的大学)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'f. [Sk. Takṣaśilā] 徳迦ㄕ羅, タクシラ [西北インドの都市].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（城市名）答咖西喇，（古音译：）德叉尸罗，呾叉始罗', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【阴】呾叉始罗（健陀罗国 (Gandhāra) 的一座城市的名字。在那里有一所众所周知的大学）。(p140)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Takkaḷa: {'def': '(nt.) a bulbous plant, a tuberose J.IV,46, 371 (biḷāli°, expl. at 373 by takkala-kanda)=VI,578. (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Takkaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) thought, representation (of: --°) J.I,68 (ussāvabindu°). (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Takketi: {'def': '[denom. of tarka] to think, reflect, reason, argue DA.I,106; DhsA.142. -- attānaṁ t. to have self-confidence, to trust oneself J.I,273, 396, 468; III,233. (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(takk + e), 思考，说服，争论，信赖。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 takkita。【独】 takketvā。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(takk寻+e), 思考，说服，争论，信赖。【过】takkesi。【过分】takkita。【独】takketvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Takkika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. takka¹] doubting, having wrong views, foolish; m. a sophist, a fool Ud.73; J.I,97; Miln.248. (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'takkī,【阳】诡辩学者，论理学者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'takkī, 【阳】诡辩学者，论理学者。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Takkin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. takka¹] thinking, reasoning, esp. sceptically; a sceptic D.I,16≈(takkī vīmaṁsī); M.I,520; DA.I,106 (=takketvā vitakketvā diṭṭhi-gāhino etaṁ adhivacanaṁ), cp. pp. 114, 115 (takki-vāda). (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Takkola: {'def': '【中】芳香树胶（见 Guggulu），一种香水（由 Kakkola植物的浆果制成的香水）。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】芳香树胶(见 Guggulu)，一种香水(由 Kakkola 植物的浆果制成的香水)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. kakkola & takkola] Bdellium, a perfume made from the berry of the kakkola plant J.I,291; also as Npl. at Miln.359 (the Takola of Ptolemy; perhaps= Sk. karkoṭa: Trenckner, Notes, p. 59). (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Takkoṭaka: {'def': '[is reading correct?] a kind of insect or worm Vism.258. Reading at id. p. KhA 58 is kakkoṭaka. (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Takkārī: {'def': '(f.) the tree Sesbania Aegyptiaca (a kind of acacia) Th.2, 297 (=dālika-laṭṭhi ThA.226). (Page 292)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tala: {'def': '【中】平面，平地面，基础，平坦的屋顶，舞台，武器的刀锋，手掌或脚掌(日语：つちふままず, 土踏まず)。talaghātaka,【中】掌掴。talasattika,【中】举手示威的模样，举手作武器。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】平面，平地面，基础，平坦的屋顶，舞台，武器的刀锋，手掌或脚掌。 ~ghātaka, 【中】掌掴。 ~sattika, 【中】举手以示威胁的模样。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Sk. tala m. & nt.; cp. Gr. thli/Q (dice-board), Lat. tellus (earth), tabula (=table). Oir. talam (earth), Ags. pel (=deal), Ohg. dili=Ger. diele] (a) flat surface (w. ref. to either top or bottom: cp. Ger. boden), level, ground, base J.I,60, 62 (pāsāda° flat roof); III,60 (id.); paṭhavī° (level ground) J.II,111, cp. bhūmi° PvA.176; ādāsa° surface of a mirror Vism.450, 456, 489; salila° (surface of pond) PvA.157; VvA.160; heṭṭhima° (the lowest level) J.I,202; PvA.281; -- J.I,233 (base); 266 (khagga° the flat of the sword); II,102 (bheri°). -- (b) the palm of the hand or the sole of the foot J.II,223; Vism.250; & cpds. -- See also taṭa, tāla, tālu.

--ghātaka a slap with the palm of the hand Vin.IV,260, 261; --sattika in °ṁ uggirati to lift up the palm of the hand Vin.IV,147; DhA.III,50; cp. Vin. Texts I.51. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Talika: {'def': '(adj.) [from tala] having a sole, in eka-°upāhanā a sandal with one sole J.II,277; III,80, 81 (v. l. BB. paṭilika); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1887, 165. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taluṇa: {'def': '=taruṇa DhsA.333 (cp. Burnouf, Lotus 573). (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 Taruṇa。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Taluna(=taruṇa),【形】年轻的，幼嫩的。【阳】年轻人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tam: {'def': 'enaṁ= Tamenaṁ(tam它+enaṁ‹eta这、那)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tama: {'def': '【阳、中】 (mano-组) 黑暗，无知。 (在【合】中它变成 tamo)。 ~khandha,【阳】大黑暗。 ~naddha, 【形】被黑暗包围的。 ~nuda, 【形】驱散黑暗者。 ~parāyaṇa, 【形】有黑暗状态的命运的。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Tamo(Sk. tamas, tam & tim),【阳】【中】(mano-group) 黑暗，无知(darkness (syn. andhakāra, opp. joti))。(在【合】中它变成 tamo)。tamakhandha,【阳】大黑暗。tamanaddha,【形】被黑暗包围的。tamandhakāraṁ,【阳】大黑暗((complete) darkness (of night)JA.III,39、60.)。tamanuda,【形】驱散黑暗者。tamaparāyaṇa,【形】有黑暗状态的命运的。S.3.21./I,93.︰“Kathañca, mahārāja puggalo tamotamaparāyano hoti? Idha, mahārāja, ekacco puggalo nīce kule paccājāto hoti, 1caṇḍālakule vā 2venakule vā 3nesādakule vā 4rathakārakule vā 5pukkusakule vā dalidde appannapānabhojane (S.3.21./I,94.) kasiravuttike yattha kasirena ghāsacchādo labbhati. So ca hoti dubbaṇṇo duddasiko okoṭimako bavhābādho kāṇo vā kuṇī vā khañjo vā pakkhahato vā, na lābhī annassa pānassa vatthassa yānassa mālāgandhavilepanassa seyyāvasathapadīpeyyassa. So kāyena duccaritaṁ carati, vācāya duccaritaṁ carati, manasā duccaritaṁ carati. So kāyena duccaritaṁ caritvā vācāya duccaritaṁ caritvā manasā duccaritaṁ caritvā, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjati.(大王！如何为由闇入闇？大王！今有人生於卑贱之家(nīce kule)--1生於旃陀罗家、或2猎师家、或3竹匠家、或4车匠家、或5清洁工家庭，贫穷而缺乏饮食受用，活命困难且衣食乏少。又，他是脸丑，形丑，矮陋(驼背 okoṭimako=lakuntako?)，病多，或眼盲、或手残、或跛者、成半身不遂，而不得食、饮、衣、车，鬘、香、涂油，卧具、座敷、灯明。彼身为恶行、语为恶行、意为恶行。彼为此身、语、意之恶行，身体毁坏死后，堕於苦处、恶处、地狱。大王！譬喻人由闇入闇，由闇入闇，即由血暗入血暗。大王！我说譬喻此人。大王！如是等人是由闇入闇。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & tamo [Sk. tamas, tam & tim, cp. tamisra= Lat. tenebræ; also timira dark & P. tibba, timira; Ohg. dinstar & finstar; Ags. thimm, E. dim] darkness (syn. andhakāra, opp. joti), lit. as well as fig. (mental darkness=ignorance or state of doubt); one of the dark states of life & rebirth; adj. living in one of the dark spheres of life (cp. kaṇhajāta) or in a state of suffering (duggati) Sn.248 (pecca tamaṁ vajanti ye patanti sattā nirayaṁ avaṁsirā), 763 (nivutānaṁ t. hoti andhakāro apassataṁ), 956 (sabbaṁ tamaṁ vinodetvā); Vbh.367 (three tamāni: in past, present & future). adj.: puggalo tamo tama-parāyaṇo D.III,233; A.II,85= Pug.51; J.II,17. -- tamā tamaṁ out of one “duggati” into another Sn.278 (vinipātaṁ samāpanno gabbhā gabbhaṁ t. t. . . . dukkaṁ nigacchati), cp. M Vastu II.225, also tamāto tamaṁ ibid. I.27; II,215. -- tamat. --agge beyond the region of darkness (or rebirth in dark spheres), cp. bhavagge (& Sk. tamaḥ pāre) S.V,154, 163.

--andhakāra (complete) darkness (of night) v. l. for samandha° at J.III,60 (Kern: tamondhakāra); --nivuta enveloped in d. Sn.348; --nuda (tama° & tamo°), dispelling darkness, freq. as Ep. of the Buddha or other sages Sn.1133, 1136; It.32, 108; Nd² 281; Vv 35² (=VvA.161); Miln.1, 21, etc.; --parāyaṇa (adj.) having a state of darkness or “duggati” for his end or destiny S.I,93; A.II,85=Pug.51. (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tamba: {'def': '(Sk. tāmra, orig. adj.=dark coloured, leaden),【形】铜色，褐色。【中】铜(copper)。tambakesa,【形】有黄褐色头发的。tambacūla,【阳】公鸡。tambanakha,【形】有褐色指甲的。tambanetta,【形】有褐色眼睛的。tambabhājana,【中】铜器皿。Tāmrapaṃīya-nikāya(梵), 赤铜鍱部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. tāmra, orig. adj.=dark coloured, leaden; cp. Sk. adj. taṁsra id., to tama] copper (“the dark metal”); usually in combinations, signifying colour of or made of (cp. loha bronze), e. g. lākhātamba (adj.) Th.2, 440 (colour of an ox); °akkhin Vv 32³ (timira°) Sdhp.286; °nakhin J.VI,290; °nettā (f.) ibid.; °bhājana DhA.I,395; °mattika DhA.IV,106; °vammika DhA.III,208; °loha PvA.95 (=loha). (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】铜色，褐色。【中】铜。 ~kesa, 【形】有黄褐色头发的。~cūla, 【阳】公鸡。 ~nakha, 【形】有褐色指甲的。 ~netta, 【形】有褐色眼睛的。 ~bhājana, 【中】铜器皿。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tambapaṇṇi: {'def': 'm. 銅葉, 赤銅葉, 銅掌, セイロン(Ceylon, 錫蘭)島. = Laṅkā(楞伽,斯里蘭卡島的古名), Sīhaḷa.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. 銅葉, 赤銅葉, 銅掌, セイロン島. = Laṅkā, Sīhaḷa.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Tambūla: {'def': '(Sk. tambūla),【中】槟榔(betel or betel-leaves)。tambūlapasibbaka,【阳】装槟榔的皮包。tambūlapeḷā,【阴】装槟榔的盒子。槟榔是用卵圆形叶子的蒌叶(蒟酱叶betel-leaf﹐学名Piper betel L.)来包裹槟榔子。蒌叶与黑胡椒同属胡椒科，光滑油绿的叶片大约手掌大，可以整片摊开涂抹香料，也可以像春卷一样卷起来，所包的料，例如槟榔子、冰糖、丁香、豆蔻、茴香、肉桂、姜、柠檬香茅、芫荽叶(香菜)、广霍香叶、玫瑰花瓣、露兜树糖浆、茉莉糖浆、岩兰草糖浆等。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】蒌叶（卵圆形叶子用来包裹槟椰子作为刺激性咀嚼物来咀嚼）。~pasibbaka, 【阳】装蒌叶的皮包。 ~peḷā, 【阴】装蒌叶的盒子。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. tambūla] betel or betel-leaves (to chew after the meal) J.I,266, 291; II,320; Vism.314; DhA.III,219. --°pasibbaka betel-bag J.VI,367. (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tamāla: {'def': '【阳】印度月桂树 (Cinnamomum tamala)。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. tamāla] 树名(Xanthochymus pictorius)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(Sk. tamāla),【阳】印度月桂树 (Cinnamomum tamala)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. tamāla] N. of a tree (Xanthochymus pictorius) Pv III,10⁵ (+uppala). (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tan: {'def': '(梵tan, tā)﹐【字根VI.】使伸展、使延伸(to spread)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tanaya: {'def': 'tanuja, 【阳】儿子，后代。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& tanuya [at S.I,7, v. l. tanaya, cp. BSk. tanuja AvŚ II.200] offspring, son Mhvs VII.28. pl. tanuyā [=Sk. tanayau] son & daughter S.I,7. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'tanuja,【阳】儿子，后代。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tanayā: {'def': 'tanujā, 【阴】女儿。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'tanujā,【阴】女儿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tandi: {'def': '﹐tandī (梵tandrī﹐疲倦),【阴】疲倦，怠惰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tandita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of tandeti=Sk. tandrayate & tandate to relax. From *ten, see tanoti] weary, lazy, giving way Miln.238 (°kata). Usually a° active, keen, industrious, sedulous Dh.305, 366, 375; Vv 33²²; Miln.390; VvA.142. Cp. next. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】疲倦的，懒惰的，不活跃的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】疲倦的，懒惰的，不活跃的。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tandī: {'def': '【阴】疲倦，怠惰。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. tanita] weariness, laziness, sloth S.V,64; M.I,464; A.I,3; Sn.926, 942; J.V,397 (+ālasya); Vbh.352 (id.). (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tanoti: {'def': '[*ten; cp. Sk. tanoti, Gr. tei/nw, tόnos, tέtanos; Lat. teneo, tenuis, tendo (E. ex-tend); Goth. panjan; Ohg. denen; cp. also Sk. tanti, tāna, tantra] to stretch, extend; rare as finite verb, usually only in pp. tata. ‹-› Pgdp 17. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tan+o), 扩充，伸展。【过】tani。【过分】tata。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(tan + o), 扩充，伸展。【过】 tani。【过分】 tata。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tanta: {'def': '【中】线，细绳，织布机。 ~vāya, 【阳】织布者。 ~ākulakajāta, 【形】缠得像线球一般的。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic tantra, to tanoti; cp. tantrī f. string] a thread, a string, a loom J.I,356 (°vitata-ṭṭhāna the place of weaving); DhA.I,424. At J.IV,484 tanta is to be corrected to tata (stretched out).

--âkula tangled string, a tangled skein, in phrase tantākulajātā guḷāguṇṭhikajāta “entangled like a ball of string & covered with blight” S.II,92; IV,158; A.II,211; Dpvs XII.32. See guḷā; --āvuta weaving, weft, web S.V,45; A.I,286; --bhaṇḍa weaving appliances Vin.II,135; --rajjuka “stringing & roping,” hanging, execution J.IV,87; --vāya a weaver J.I,356; Miln.331; Vism.259; DhA.I,424. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】线，细绳，织布机。tantavāya,【阳】织布者。tantākulakajāta,【形】像紊乱线球一样的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tantaka: {'def': '(nt.) “weaving,” a weaving-loom Vin.II,135. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tanti: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic tantrī, see tanta] 1. the string or cord of a lute, etc.; thread made of tendon Vin.I,182; Th.2, 390 (cp. ThA.257); J.IV,389; DhA.I,163; PvA.151. -- 2. line, lineage (+paveṇi custom, tradition) J.VI,380; DhA.I,284. --dhara bearer of tradition Vism.99 (+vaṁsânurakkhake & paveṇipolake). -- 3. a sacred text; a passage in the Scriptures Vism.351 (bahu-peyyāla°); avimutta-tanti-magga DA.I,2; MA.I,2.

--ssara string music Vin.I,182; J.III,178. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】琴弦，绳，世系，传统，神圣的本文。 ~dhara, 【形】维持传统者。 ~ssara, 【阳】弦音乐，琵琶的乐声。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】琴弦，绳，世系，传统，神圣的本文。tantidhara,【形】维持传统者。tantissara,【阳】弦音乐，琵琶的乐声。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tantu: {'def': '【阳】线，绳索，细绳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic tantu, cp. tanta] a string, cord, wire (of a lute) J.V,196. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】线，绳索，细绳。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tanu: {'def': '【阴】【中】身体。tanuruha,【中】在身体上的毛发。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】瘦的，苗条的。tanuka,【形】瘦的。tanukata,【形】减肥的(做给它瘦的)，减少的。tanukaraṇa,【中】减肥，减少。tanutara,【形】较瘦的。tanutā, tanutta,【中】tanubhāva,【阳】瘦，减少。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴、中】身体。 ~ruha, 【中】在身体上的毛发。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】瘦的，苗条的。 ~ka, 【形】瘦的。 ~kata, 【形】减肥的（做给它瘦的），减少的。 ~karaṇa, 【中】减肥，减少。 ~tara, 【形】较瘦的。 ~tā, ~tta, 【中】 ~bhāva, 【阳】瘦，减少。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic tanu, f. tanvī; also n. tanu & tanū (f.) body *ten (see tanoti)=Gr. taQu-, Lat. tenuis, Ohg. dunni, E. thin] 1. (adj.) thin, tender, small, slender Vv 16² (vara° graceful=uttamarūpa-dhara VvA.79; perhaps to 2); PvA.46 (of hair: fine+mudhu). -- 2. (n. nt.) body (orig. slender part of the body=waist) Vv 53⁷ (kañcana°); Pv.I,12¹; Vism.79 (uju+). Cp. tanutara.

--karaṇa making thinner, reducing, diminishing Vin.II,316 (Bdhgh on CV. V.9, 2); --bhāva decrease Pug.17; --bhūta decreased, diminished Pug.17; esp. in phrase °soka with diminished grief, having one’s grief allayed DhA.III,176; PvA.38. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tanuka: {'def': '(adj.)=tanu; little, small Dh.174 (=DhA 175); Sn.994 (soka). (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tanutara: {'def': 'the waist (lit. smaller part of body, cp. body and bodice) Vin.IV,345 (sundaro tanutaro “her waist is beautiful”). (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tanutta: {'def': '(nt.) [n.-abstr. of tanu] diminution, reduction, vanishing, gradual disappearance A.I,160 (manussānaṁ khayo hoti tanuttaṁ paññāyati); II,144 (rāga°, dosa°, moha°); esp. in phrase (characterizing a sakadāgāmin) “rāga-d.-mohānaṁ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hoti” D.I,156; S.V,357 sq., 376, 406; A.II,238; Pug.16. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tapa: {'def': '﹐Tapo(‹tapati),【阳】【中】(mano-group), 苦修(penance)，宗教性的苦行(religious austerity, ascetic practice)，锻链。(在【合】中它的尾母音 a 被改成 o 而得词形 tapo) 。tapakamma, 苦行(ascetic practice) 。Tapajigucchā, 厌恶的苦行(disgust for asceticism)。Tapapakkama(=tapa+upakkama, or tapo-kamma?)= tapakamma苦行。tapavana﹐苦行林(the ascetic’s forest)。Tapodārāma﹐温泉林(温泉精舍)，位於王舍城旧址附近，至今仍有温泉。SA.1.58.︰Tapoti indriyasaṁvara-dhutaṅgaguṇa-vīriya-dukkarakārikānaṁ nāmaṁ, idha pana ṭhapetvā dukkarakārikaṁ sabbāpi kilesasantāpikā paṭipadā vaṭṭati. (苦行︰转向守护根门、头陀支、英雄本色、做难做的事，烧烤一切污染的行道。) KhA.CS:p.128：tapo cāti ettha pāpake dhamme tapatīti tapo.(热心：指燃烧诸恶法)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】 (mano-组), 苦修，宗教性的苦行，道德。 (在【合】中它的尾元音 a 被改成 o 而得词形 tapo) Tapokamma, 【中】苦行。 ~dhana,【形】以自制为财富的，苦行者。 ~vana, 【中】道场（适合宗教性修行的地方）。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Tapo [from tapati, cp. Lat. tepor, heat] 1. torment, punishment, penance, esp. religious austerity, selfchastisement, ascetic practice. This was condemned by the Buddha: Gotamo sabbaṁ tapaṁ garahati tapassiṁ lūkhajīviṁ upavadati D.I,161=S.IV,330; anattha-sañhitaṁ ñatvā yaṁ kiñci aparaṁ tapaṁ S.I,103; J.IV,306 (tattatapa: see tatta). -- 2. mental devotion, self-control, abstinence, practice of morality (often= brahmacariyā & saṁvara); in this sense held up as an ideal by the Buddha. D.III,42 sq., 232 (attan & paran°), 239; S.I,38, 43; IV,118, 180; M.II,155, 199; D.II,49= Dh.184 (paramaṁ tapo), 194 (tapo sukho); Sn.77= S.I,172 (saddhā bījaṁ tapo vuṭṭhi); Sn.267 (t. ca brahmacariyā ca), 655 (id.), 901; Pv.I,3² (Instr. tapasā= brahmacariyena PvA.15); J.I,293; Nett 121 (+indriyasaṁvara); KhA 151 (pāpake dhamme tapatī ti tapo): VvA.114 (Instr. tapasā); PvA.98.

--kamma ascetic practice S.I,103; --jigucchā disgust for asceticism D.I,174; III,40, 42 sq., 48 sq.; A.II,200; --pakkama=°kamma D.I,165 sq. (should it be tapopakkama=tapa+upakkama, or tapo-kamma?). --vana the ascetic’s forest Vism.58, 79, 342. (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tapana: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [to tapati & tapa] burning, heat; fig. torment, torture, austerity. -- 1. (as nt.) PvA.98 (kāya °saṅkhāto tapo). -- 2. (as f.) tapanī J.V,201 (in metaphorical play of word with aggi & brahmacārin; Com. visīvana-aggiṭṭha-saṅkhātā-tapanī). (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】【形】燃烧，热，折磨，苦修(burning, heat; fig. torment, torture, austerity)。【阴】tapanī。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】光亮，明亮。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tapanīya: {'def': '² (nt.) also tapaneyya (J.V,372) & tapañña (J.VI,218) [orig. grd. of tapati] shining; (n.) the shining, bright metal, i. e. gold (=rattasuvaṇṇa J.V,372; ThA.252) Th.2, 374; Vv 84¹⁶; VvA.12, 37, 340. (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(tapaneyya (J V.372) & tapañña (J VI.218), orig. grd. of tapati),【中】照亮，亮金属(shining; (n.) the shining, bright metal, i. e. gold (=rattasuvaṇṇa))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(grd. of tapati), 燃烧，自我折磨，苦修(burning: fig. inducing selftorture, causing remorse, mortifying)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】使懊悔的。【中】黄金。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [grd. of tapati] burning: fig. inducing selftorture, causing remorse, mortifying A.I,49=It.24; A.IV,97 (Com. tāpajanaka); V,276; J.IV,177; Dhs.I305. (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tapas: {'def': '热;苦行', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Tapassin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [tapas+vin; see tapati & tapa] one devoted to religious austerities, an ascetic (non-Buddhist). Fig. one who exercises self-control & attains mastery over his senses Vin.I,234=A.IV,184 (tapassī samaṇo Gotamo); D.III,40, 42 sq., 49; S.I,29; IV,330, 337 sq.; M.I,77; Sn.284 (isayo pubbakā āsuṁ saññatattā tapassino); Vv 22¹⁰; Pv.I,3² (°rūpa, under the appearance of a “holy” man: samaṇa-patirūpaka PvA.15); II,6¹⁴ (=saṁvāraka PvA.98; tapo etesaṁ atthī ti ibid.). (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tapassī: {'def': '【形】献身于宗教性的苦行。【阳】隐士，苦行僧。 ~sinī，【阴】苦行尼。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Tapassin, tapas+vin),【形】【中】献身於宗教性的苦行。【阳】隐士，苦行僧。tapassinī，【阴】苦行尼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tapati: {'def': '(tap + a), 照耀，照亮。【过】 tapi。【现分】 tapanta, tapamāna。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tap+a), 燃烧，照亮。【过】tapi。【现分】tapanta, tapamāna。ger. tapanīya。pp. tatta1。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. tapati, *tep, cp. Lat. tepeo to be hot or warm, tepidus=tepid] 1. to shine, to be bright, Dh.387 (divā tapati ādicco, etc.=virocati DhA.IV,143); Sn.348 (jotimanto narā tapeyyuṁ), 687 (suriyaṁ tapantaṁ). -- ger. tapanīya: see sep. -- pp. tatta¹. (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tapokamma: {'def': '【中】苦行(ascetic practice)。tapokammadhana,【形】以自制为财富的，苦行者。tapokammavana,【中】道场(适合宗教性修行的地方)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tappara: {'def': '【形】献身于，彻底地赠予。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. tatpara] quite given to or intent upon (-°), diligent, devoted ThA.148 (Ap. 57, 66) (mānapūjana° & buddhopaṭṭhāna°). (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. tatpara),【形】献身於，彻底地赠予(quite given to or intent upon (-°), diligent, devoted)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tappati: {'def': '1(Sk. tapyate, pass. of tapati‘照亮’、‘燃烧’), 燃烧(to burn)，折磨(to be tormented)。【过】tappi。【现分】tappamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. tapyate, Pass. of tapati] to burn, to be tormented: to be consumed (by remorse) Dh.17, 136 (t. sehi kammehi dummedho=paccati DhA.III,64). (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [Sk. tṛpyate, caus. tarpayati; *terp=Gr. tέrpw] (Instr.) to be satiated, to be pleased, to be satisfied J.I,185 (puriso pāyāsassa t.); II,443; V,485=Miln.381 (samuddo na t. nadīhi the ocean never has enough of all the rivers); Vv 84¹³. -- grd. tappiya satiable, in atappiya-vatthūni (16) objects of insatiability J.III,342 (in full). Also tappaya in cpd. dut° hard to be satisfied A.I,87; Pug.26. -- pp. titta. -- Caus. tappeti to satisfy, entertain, regale, feed It.67 (annapānena); Pv.II,4⁸ (id.) Miln.227; -- pp. tappita. (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (Sk. trpyate, caus. Tarpayati) (Instr.)满足(to be satiated, to be pleased, to be satisfied)。grd. tappiya satiable, in atappiya-vatthūni (16) objects of insatiability J III.342 (in full). Also tappaya in cpd. dut° hard to be satisfied; pp. titta. -- Caus. tappeti to satisfy, entertain, regale, feed It 67 (annapānena); Pv II.48 (id.) Miln 227。【过分】tappita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(tapati 的【被】), 燃烧，照耀，懊恼。【过】 tappi。【现分】tappamāna。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tappaṇa: {'def': '【中】使饱足，点心，饮料。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. tarpaṇa] satiating, refreshing; a restorative, in netta° some sort of eye-wash D.I,12 (in combⁿ w. kaṇṇa-tela & natthu-kamma). (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. tarpaṇa),【中】使饱足，点心，饮料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tappetar: {'def': '[n. ag. to tappeti] one who satisfies, a giver of good things in combⁿ titto ca tappetā ca: self-satisfied & satisfying others A.I,87; Pug.27 (of a Sammāsambuddha). (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tappeti: {'def': '(tapp + e), 饱足，使满足。【过】 ~esi。【现分】 tappenta。【独】tappetvā, tappiya。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tapp使满意+e), 饱足，使满足。【过】tappesi。【现分】tappenta。【独】tappetvā, tappiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tappetu: {'def': '【阳】饱足的人。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】饱足的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tappita: {'def': '(tappeti 的【过分】)。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tappeti‘使满足’) 的【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tappiya: {'def': '【形】可满足的。【独】饱足了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可满足的。【独】饱足了。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tara: {'def': '[see tarati] (n.) crossing, “transit,” passing over Sn.1119 (maccu°). -- (adj.) to be crossed, passable, in duttara hard to cross S.IV,157; Sn.174, 273 (oghaṁ t. duttaraṁ); Th.2, 10; It.57. Also as su-duttara S.I, 35; V,24.

--esin wanting to pass over J.III,230 (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中)横越，渡过(crossing, “transit,” passing over)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 横越，渡过。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Taraccha: {'def': '(梵taraksu & taraksa),【阳】鬣狗、土狼(hyaena)。【阴】taracchi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Derivation unknown. The Sk. forms are tarakṣu & tarakṣa] hyena Vin.III,58; A.III,101; Miln.149, 267; Dh.A 331; Mhbv 154. -- f. taracchi J.V,71, 406; VI,562. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鬣狗。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tarahi: {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic tarhi, cp. carahi & etarahi] then, at that time Vin.II,189. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taramāna-rūpa: {'def': '【形】匆忙。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Taramānarūpa: {'def': '(Taramāna-rūpa),【形】形色匆匆的。taramāna：ppr. of tarati (匆匆)。 -rūpa : adj. 像…的样子；像…似的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tarati: {'def': '1(tar+a), 越过，渡过。【过】tari。【独】taritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic tarati, *ter (tṛ) to get to the other side, cp. Lat. termen, terminus, Gr. tέrma, tέrqron; also Lat. trans=Goth. pairh=Ags. purh=E. through] (lit.) to go or get through, to cross (a river), pass over, traverse; (fig.) to get beyond, i. e. to surmount, overcome, esp. oghaṁ (the great flood of life, desire, ignorance, etc.) S.I,53, 208, 214; V,168, 186; Sn.173, 273, 771, 1069; saṅgaṁ Sn.791; visattikaṁ Sn.333, 857; ubhayaṁ (both worlds, here & beyond) Pv IV.13¹ (=atikkameti PvA.278); Nd² 28Q -- ppr. taranto Vin.I,191 (Aciravati); grd. taritabba Vin.IV,65 (nadī); aor. atari J.III,189 (samuddaṁ) & atāri Sn.355, 1047 (jāti-maraṇaṁ), pl. atāruṁ Sn.1045. -- See also tāreti (Caus.), tāṇa, tāyate, tiro, tiriyaṁ, tīra, tīreti. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tar + a), 越过，渡过，匆忙。【过】 tari。【过分】 tarita。【现分】taranta, taramāna, 【独】 taritvā。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2, 匆忙(to be in a hurry, to make haste)。【过分】tarita。【现分】taranta, taramāna。grd. taraṇīya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [tvarate, pp. tvarita; also turati, turayati from *ter to turn round, move quickly, perhaps identical with the *ter of tarati¹; cp. Ohg. dweran=E. twirl; Gr. toru/nh=Lat. trua=Ger. quirl twirling-stick, also Lat. torqueo & turba & perhaps Ger. stūren, zerstören; E. storm, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under trua] to be in a hurry, to make haste Th.1, 291; ppr. taramāna in °rūpa (adj.) quickly, hurriedly Sn.417; Pv.II,6²; PvA.181 (=turita) & ataramāna Vin.I,248; grd. taraṇīya Th.1, 293. -- See also tura, turita, turiya. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taraṅga: {'def': '(tara+ga),【阳】波(a wave, Vism.157)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[tara+ga] a wave Vism.157. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】波。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Taraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [see tarati] going across, passing over, traversing Vin.IV,65 (tiriyaṁ°); Ps.I,15; II,99, 119. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】横越，渡过。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】横越，渡过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Taraṇī: {'def': '【阴】船，舟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】船，舟。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tari: {'def': '【阴】船，舟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [from tarati] a boat Dāvs.IV,53. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taritatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. of tarita pp. of tarati¹] the fact of having traversed, crossed, or passed through VvA.284. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taritu: {'def': '【阳】渡过的人，越过的人。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】渡过的人，越过的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Taru: {'def': '【阳】树。 ~saṇḍa, 【阳】小树林。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Perhaps dialect. for dāru),【阳】树。tarusaṇḍa,【阳】小树林。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Perhaps dialect. for dāru] tree, PvA.154 (°gaṇā), 251. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taruṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic taruṇa, cp. Gr. tέrus, tέrhQ; Lat. tener & perhaps tardus] 1. tender, of tender age, young; new, newly (°-) fresh. Esp. appl^d to a young calf: M.I,459 (in simile); °vaccha, °vacchaka, °vacchī: Vin.I,193; J.I,191; DhA.II,35; VvA.200. -- Vin.I,243 (fresh milk); D.I,114 (Gotamo t. c’eva t.-paribbājako ca “a young man and only lately become a wanderer”); PvA.3, 46 (°janā), 62 (°putta); Bdhd 93, 121. -- 2. (m. & nt.) the shoot of a plant, or a young plant Vin.I,189 (tāla°); M.I,432; Vism.361 (taruṇa-tāla). (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】年轻的，娇嫩的。【阳】年轻人。 ~ṇī, 【阴】年轻女子，年轻未婚女子。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】1.年轻的，娇嫩的，新鲜的(tender, of tender age, young; new, newly)。2.【阳】【阴】幼苗(the shoot of a plant, or a young plant)。【阳】年轻人。taruṇī,【阴】少女，年轻未婚女子。cf. yuvatī,【阴】少女(young woman)。taruṇavaccha, taruṇavacchaka,【阳】幼犊。taruṇavacchī,【阴】雌幼犊。DhA.v.135./CS:pg.2.38.︰“taruṇabhāveyeva patikulagamanatthāyā”ti.(希望嫁给如意郎君(青少男))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tasa: {'def': '【形】可移动的，发抖的。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(from tasati2),【形】1.发抖的，会惊慌的(trembling, frightened)。2.移动的(moving, running)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [from tasati²] 1. trembling, frightened J.I,336=344 (vakā, expl. at 342 by tasita); perhaps the derived meaning of: -- 2. moving, running (cp. to meaning 1 & 2 Gr. trέw to flee & to tremble), always in combⁿ tasa-thāvarā (pl.) movable & immovable beings [cp. M Vastu I.207 jaṅgama-sthāvara; II,10 calaṁ sthāvara]. Metaphorically of people who are in fear & trembling, as distinguished from a thāvara, a selfpossessed & firm being (=Arahant KhA 245). In this sense t. is interpreted by tasati¹ as well as by tasati² (to have thirst or worldly cravings) at KhA 245: tasantī ti tasā, sataṇhānaṁ sabhayānañ c’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ; also at Nd² 479: tasa ti yesaṁ tasitā (tasiṇā?) taṇhā appahīnā, etc., & ye te santāsaṁ āpajjanti. ‹-› S.I,141; IV,117, 351; V,393; Sn.146, 629; Dh.405, Th.1, 876; J.V,221; Nd² 479; DhA.IV,175. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tasara: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic tasara, cp. tanta, etc.] a shuttle Sn.215, 464, 497; DhA.I,424; III,172. Cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 160. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tasati: {'def': '¹ [Sk. tṛṣyati=Gr. tέrsomoi to dry up, Lat. torreo (=E. torrid, toast), Goth. gapairsan & gapaúrsnan, Ohg. derren; see also taṇhā & taṇhīyati] to be thirsty, fig. to crave for S.II,13; Miln.254. -- pp. tasita¹. Cp. pari°. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tas + a), 战栗，被惊吓，口渴，渴望。【过】 tasi。【过分】 tasita。【现分】 tasanta。【独】 tasitvā。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [Vedic trasati=Gr. trέw, Lat. terreo (=terror); *ters fr. *ter in Sk. tarala, cp. also Lat. tremo (=tremble) and trepidus] to tremble, shake, to have fear; to be frightened Sn.394 (ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke); Nd² 479 (=santāsaṁ āpajjati); KhA 245 (may be taker as tasati¹, see tasa). -- pp. tasita², cp. also tasa & uttasati. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (tas+a﹐梵trsyati), 口渴(to be thirsty)，渴望(to crave for)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (tas +a), 战栗(to tremble)，被惊吓(to be frightened)。【过】tasi。【过分】tasita。【现分】tasanta。【独】tasitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tasinā: {'def': '(=taṇhā),【阴】渴望，口渴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】渴望，口渴。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tasita: {'def': '² [pp. of tasati²] frightened, full of fear J.I,26 (bhīta+). 342, IV.141 (id.): Nd² 479 (or=tasiṇā?). ‹-› atasita fearless S.III,57. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of tasati¹] dried up, parched, thirsty S.II,110, 118; Sn.980, 1014 (not with Fausböll=tasita²); J.IV,20; Pv.II,9³⁶ (chāta+), 10³ (=pipāsita PvA.143); III,6⁵ (=pipāsita PvA.127, 2Q2); Miln.318 (kilanta+). (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tasiṇā: {'def': '(f.) [Diæretic form of taṇhā, cp. dosiṇā › juṇhā, kasiṇa › kṛtsṇa, etc.] thirst; fig. craving (see taṇhā) S.V,54, 58; Nd² 479 (to be read for tasitā?); Dh.342, 343. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tasmā: {'def': '(ta的阳.中.单.离), 从它，由此，是故。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tasmātiha: {'def': '(tasmā(ta的离格)+t+iha这里)﹐从这里。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tassa-pāpiyyasikā: {'def': '(f.) (viz. kiriyā) N. of one of the adhikaraṇa-samathā: guilt (legal wrong) of such & such a character Vin.I,325; in detail expl. M.II,249; + tiṇavatthāraka D.III,254; A.I,99. °kammaṁ karoti to carry out proceedings against someone guilty of a certain legal offence Vin.II,85, 86; °kata one against whom the latter is carried out A.IV,347. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tata: {'def': '[pp. of tanoti] stretched, extended, spread out S.I, 357 (jāla); J.IV,484 (tantāni jālāni Text, katāni v. l. for tatāni). Note: samo tata at J.I,183 is to be read as samotata (spread all over). (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tanoti 的【过分】), 已延长，已展开。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tanoti 的【过分】), 已延长，已展开。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tatha: {'def': '【形】真实的，真正的。【中】事实。tathatā,【阴】真实，如此的相像，如性。tathatta,【中】如此的情况，事实。tathavacana,【形】说实在的。(SA.12.20./II,41.；Pṭs.CS:p.1.227；Vism.518.)︰So panāyaṁ tehi tehi paccayehi anūnādhikeheva tassa tassa dhammassa sambhavato tathatāti, sāmaggiṁ upagatesu paccayesu muhuttampi tato nibbattadhammānaṁ asambhavābhāvato avitathatāti, aññadhammapaccayehi aññadhammānuppattito anaññathatāti, yathāvuttānaṁ etesaṁ jarāmaraṇādīnaṁ paccayato vā paccayasamūhato vā idappaccayatāti vutto.(这（缘起）由於这样不少不多的缘而发生那样的法，故说「如性」；因为诸缘和合之时，虽一须臾，想不从此而发生诸法是不可能的。所以说「不违如性」。不能由其他诸法的（生起之）缘而生起别的法，所以说「不他性」；是上面所述的此等老死等的缘之故，或为它们的缘的聚合之故，说为「此缘性」。而此（此缘性的）语义是这样：是此等（老死等）的缘为此缘，此缘即为此缘性；或以此缘的聚合为此缘性。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [an adjectivized tathā out of combⁿ tathā ti “so it is,” cp. taccha] (being) in truth, truthful; true, real D.I,190 (+bhūta taccha); M.III,70; Th.1, 347; Sn.1115 (=Nd² 275 taccha bhūta, etc.). (nt.) tathaṁ=saccaṁ, in cattāri tathāni the 4 truths S.V,430, 435; Ps.II,104 sq. (+avitathāni anaññathāni). As ep. of Nibbāna: see derivations & cp. taccha. Abl. tathato exactly v. l. B for tattato at J.II,125 (see tatta²). -- yathā tathaṁ (cp. yathā tacchaṁ) according to truth, for certain, in truth Sn.699, 732, 1127. – Cp. vitatha.

--parakkama reaching out to the truth J.V,395 (=saccanikkama); --vacana speaking the truth (cp. tathāvādin) Miln.401. (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】真实的，真正的。【中】事实。 ~tā, 【阴】真实，如此的相像。 ~tta, 【中】如此的情况，事实。 ~vacana, 【形】说实在的。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tathatta: {'def': '(nt.) [*tathātvaṁ] “the state of being so,” the truth, Nibbāna; only in foll. phrases: (a) tathattāya paṭipajjati to be on the road to (i. e. attain) Nibbāna D.I,175, similarly S.II,199; S.II,209 (paṭipajjitabba being conducive to N.); Miln.255; Vism.214. -- (b) tathattāya upaneti (of a cittaṁ bhāvitaṁ) id. S.IV,294=M.I,301; S.V,90, 213 sq. -- (c) tathattāya cittaṁ upasaṁharati id. M.I,468. -- Abl. tathattā in truth, really Sn.520 sq. (cp. M Vastu III,397). (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tathatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. tathā›tatha] state of being such, such-likeness, similarity, correspondence Vism.518. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tathiya: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. tathya =taccha] true, Sn.882, 883. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tathā: {'def': '… , yathā ..., 如此…，以便…。tathāsaññī, 信以为真。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Sk. tathā, cp. also kathaṁ] so, thus (and not otherwise, opp. aññathā), in this way, likewise Sn.1052 (v. l. yathā); J.I,137, etc. -- Often with eva: that’eva just so, still the same, not different D.III,135 (taṁ that’eva hoti no aññathā); J.I,263, 278; Pv.I,8³; PvA.55. Corresponding with yathā: tathā-yathā so --that Dh.282; PvA.23 (tathā akāsi yathā he made that . . ., cp. Lat. ut consecutive); yathā-tathā asso also Sn.504; J.I,223; Pv.I,12³ (yath’āgato tathā gato as he has come so he has gone). -- In cpds. that’before vowels.

--ûpama such like (in comparisons, following upon a preceding yathā or seyyathā) Sn.229 (=tathāvidha KhA 185), 233; It.33, 90; --kārin acting so (corresp. w. yathāvādin: acting so as he speaks, cp. tāthāvādin) Sn.357; It.122; --gata see sep.; --bhāva “the being so,” such a condition J.I,279; --rūpa such a, like this or that, esp. so great, such Vin.I,16; Sn.p. 107; It.107; DA.I,104; PvA.5, 56. nt. adv. thus PvA.14. Cp. evarūpa; --vādin speaking so (cp. °kārin) Sn.430; It.122 (of the Tathāgata); --vidha such like, so (=tathārūpa) Sn.772, 818, 1073, 1113; Nd² 277 (=tādisa taṁsaṇṭhita tappakāra). (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'tatra【副】如此，那样，以这种方式。tathākārī,【形】如此行动的。Tathāgata,【形】如来。tathābhāva,【阳】如此性，如此情况。tathārūpa,【形】如此的，像那样的，如此这般的，十分地。tatheva,【副】同样地。tathevāhaṁ = tathā eva ahaṁ, 同样地，我…。Yathā idaṁ tathā etaṁ, yathā etaṁ tathā idaṁ, 那个就像这个，这个就像那个。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】如此，那样，以这种方式。 ~kārī, 【形】如此行动的。 ~gata, 【形】真人，如来（佛）。 ~bhāva, 【阳】如此性，如此情况。 ~rūpa,【形】如此的，像那样的。 ~eva, 【副】同样地。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tathāgata: {'def': '[Derivation uncertain. Buddhaghosa (DA.I,59--67) gives eight explanations showing that there was no fixed tradition on the point, and that he himself was in doubt]. The context shows that the word is an epithet of an Arahant, and that non-Buddhists were supposed to know what it meant. The compilers of the Nikāyas must therefore have considered the expression as pre-Buddhistic; but it has not yet been found in any pre-Buddhistic work. Mrs. Rhys Davids (Dhs. tr. 1099, quoting Chalmers J.R.A.S. Jan., 1898) suggests “he who has won through to the truth.” Had the early Buddhists invented a word with this meaning it would probably have been tathaṁgata, but not necessarily, for we have upadhī-karoti as well as upadhiṁ karoti. -- D.I,12, 27, 46, 63; II,68, 103, 108, 115, 140, 142; III,14, 24 sq., 32 sq., 115, 217, 264 sq., 273 sq.; S.I,110 sq.; II,222 sq.; III,215; IV,127, 380 sq.; A.I,286; II,17, 25, 120; III,35, etc.; Sn.236, 347, 467, 557, 1114; It.121 sq.; KhA 196; Ps.I,121 sq.; Dhs.1099, 1117, 1234; Vbh.325 sq., 340, etc., etc.

--balāni (pl.) the supreme intellectual powers of a T. usually enum^d as a set of ten: in detail at A.V,33 sq. =Ps.II,174; M.I,69; S.II,27; Nd² 466. Other sets of five at A.III,9; of six A.III,417 sq. (see bala); --sāvaka a disciple of the T. D.II,142; A.I,90; II,4; III,326 sq.; It.88; Sn.p. 15. (Page 296)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'the \'Perfect One\', lit. the one who has \'thus gone\', or \'thus come\', is an epithet of the Buddha used by him when speaking of himself.

To the often asked questions, whether the Tathāgata still exists after death, or not, it is said (e.g. S. XXII, 85, 86) that, in the highest sense (paramattha, q.v.) the Tathāgata cannot, even at lifetime, be discovered, how much less after death, and that neither the 5 groups of existence (khandha, q.v.) are to be regarded as the Tathāgata, nor can the Tathāgata be found outside these corporeal and mental phenomena. The meaning intended here is that there exist only these ever-changing corporeal and mental phenomena, arising and vanishing from moment to moment, but no separate entity, no personality.

When the commentaries in this connection explain Tathāgata by \'living being\' (satta), they mean to say that here the questioners are using the merely conventional expression, Tathāgata, in the sense of a really existing entity.

Cf. anattā, paramattha, puggala, jīva, satta.

A commentarial treatise on "The Meaning of the Word \'Tathāgata\' " is included in The All-Embracing Net of Views (Brahmajāla Sutta), tr. Bhikkhu Bodhi (BPS).', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '(tathā如+āgata来),【形】如来，真人，音译：多陀阿伽陀、多他阿伽度、多陀阿伽度、怛萨阿竭、怛他多、多阿竭。Yathāvādī bhikkhave Tathāgato tathākārī yathākarī tathāvārī iti yathāvādī tathākārī yathākārī tathāvārī, tasmā Tathāgato ti vuccati.(比丘们！如来是如是说而如是行者，如是行而如是说者，如此，如是说而如是行，如是行而如是说，故被称为如来。) Sadevake bhikkhave loke samārake sabrahmake sassamanabrahmaniyā pajayā sadevamanussāya Tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī, tasmā Tathāgato ti vuccati.(诸比丘！於天、魔、梵天、沙门、婆罗门、神、人世间中，如来是胜利者，不被征服者，见一切者，有自在力者，故被称为如来。) mā bhikkhave Tathāgataṁ nāmena ca āvusovādena ca samudācaratha.(诸比丘！汝等从今后勿以「名」、以「卿」称呼世尊！) “Yaṁ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa samārakassa sabrahmakassa sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya diṭṭhaṁ sutaṁ mutaṁ viññātaṁ pattaṁ (A.4.23./II,24.) pariyesitaṁ anuvicaritaṁ manasā, sabbaṁ taṁ Tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṁ. Tasmā ‘Tathāgato’ti vuccati.(诸比丘！天、魔、梵天、世间之沙门、婆罗门、天、人众之所见、所闻、所觉(即：香、味、触)、所了别、所得、所求、於意所伺察之一切，如来皆已觉了，故名‘如来’。) “Yañca, bhikkhave, rattiṁ Tathāgato anuttaraṁ sammāsambodhiṁ abhisambujjhati yañca rattiṁ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṁ etasmiṁ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati sabbaṁ taṁ tatheva hoti, no aññathā. Tasmā ‘Tathāgato’ti vuccati.(诸比丘！又，如来自觉悟之日，至於如来般涅盘日，於其中间，所说一切、所谈，乃至所解说者，祇是‘如’而已，而非不如，故名‘如来’。)(《中阿含137经》︰「…若如来口有所言说，有所应对者，彼一切是真谛，不虚不离於如，亦非颠倒，真谛审实，若说师子者，当如说如来。」(T1.645.2)) “Yathāvādī, bhikkhave, Tathāgato tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Iti yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī. Tasmā ‘Tathāgato’ti vuccati.( 诸比丘！如来行如所说，言如所行，唯行如所言，言如所行，故名‘如来’。) A.1.13./I,22.︰“Sadevake, bhikkhave, loke samārake sabrahmake sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya Tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthu daso vasavattī. Tasmā ‘Tathāgato’ti vuccati”.( 诸比丘！於天、魔、梵天、世间之沙门、婆罗门、天、人之众，如来为胜，无能胜者，是徧见，转於自在，故名‘如来’。) A.1.13./I,22.︰“Ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati adutiyo asahāyo appaṭimo appaṭisamo appaṭibhāgo appaṭipuggalo asamo asamasamo dvipadānaṁ aggo. Katamo ekapuggalo? Tathāgato arahaṁ sammāsambuddho.( 诸比丘！有一人出世，是为无二、无侣、无似、无比、无对、无匹、无等等、两足中之最尊者之出世。什么是一人？如来、应供、正自觉者。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '如来', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Tathāgata-bala: {'def': 'see. dasa-bala .', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '【中】如来力（佛力）。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': "the 'ten powers of the Perfect One'; s. dasa-bala.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '【中】如来力(佛力)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tatiya: {'def': '【形】第三。 ~yā, 【阴】（巴利语法）第三格，即：工具格。 ~yaŋ,【副】第三次。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】第三。tatiyā,【阴】(巴利语法)第三格，即：工具格。tatiyaṁ,【副】第三次。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. tṛtīya, Av. Qritya, Gr. tri/tos, Lat. tertius, Goth. pridja, E. third] Num. ord. the third. -- Sn.97 (parābhavo); 436 (khuppipāsā as the 3rd division in the army of Māra), 1001; J.II,353; Dh.309; PvA.69 (tatiyāya jātiya: in her third birth). Tatiyaṁ (nt. adv.) for the 3rd time D.II,155; Sn.88, 95, 450; tatiyavāraṁ id. DhA.I,183; VvA.47 (=at last); yāva tatiyaṁ id. Vin.II,188; J.I,279; DhA.II,75; PvA.272 (in casting the lot: the third time decides); yāva tatiyakaṁ id. D.I,95. (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tato: {'def': '[Abl. of pron. base ta° (see ta° II.4)] 1. from this, in this S.III,96 (tatoja); J.III,281 (tato paraṁ beyond this, after this); Nd² 664 (id.); DA.I,212 (tatonidāna). ‹-› 2. thence J.I,278; Miln.47. -- 3. thereupon, further, afterwards J.I,58; Dh.42; Miln.48; PvA.21, etc. (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】从那里，从那，从此，从那时起，因此，乃至。tatopaṭṭhāya,【无】从那时，自从，自…以来。tatonidānaṁ,【副】由於。tatoparaṁ,【无】在…之外。tato, m.n.Abl.sg., 作「比较对象(指前面之事)」。tato tato﹐就从那时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】从那里，从那，从此，从那时起，因此。 ~paṭṭhāya, 【无】从那时，自从，自…以来。 ~nidānaŋ, 【副】由于。 ~paraŋ, 【无】在…之外。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tatra: {'def': '(Sk. tatra)=tattha in all meanings & applications, viz. A. 1. there: Dh.375; PvA.54. tatrâpi D.I,81= It.22≈(tatrâpâsiṁ). tatra pi D.I,1 (=DA.I,42). tatra kho Vin.I,10, 34; A.V,5 sq.; 354 sq. (cp. atha kho). ‹-› In explanations: PvA.19 (tatrâyaṁ vitthārakathā “here follows the story in detail”). -- 2. in this: Sn.595 (tatra kevalino smase); Dh.88 (tatr’abhirati: enjoyment in this). -- 3. a special application of tatra (perhaps in the same sense to be explained tattha A 3) is that as first part of a cpd., where it is to be taken as generalizing (=tatra tatra): all kinds of (orig. in this & that), in whatever condition, all-round, complete (cp. yaṁ taṁ under ta° II.2, yena tena upāyena): tatramajjhattatā (complete) equanimity (keeping balance here & there) Vism.466 (cp. tatra-majjhatt’upekkhā 160); DhsA.132, 133 (majjh°+tatra majjh°); Bdhd 157. tatrûpāyaññū (=tatra upāyaññū) having allround knowledge of the means and ways Sn.321 (correct reading at SnA 330); tatrupāyāya vīmaṁsāya samannāgatā endowed with genius in all kinds of means Vin.IV,211 (or may it be taken as “suitable, corresponding, proportionate”? cp. tadūpiya). -- B. tatra tatra, in t.-t.-abhinandinī (of taṇhā) finding its delight in this & that, here & there Vin.I,10; Ps.II,147; Nett 72; Vism.506. (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tatramajjhattatā: {'def': '(‹ tatra那里+majjhattatā中和),【阴】中舍性，直译为「位於中间」，心平衡、平等。这是舍心(upekhā)的同义词，不是舍受。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tatratatra: {'def': '﹐tatra tatra﹐【副】这里那里(here and there彼彼)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tatta: {'def': '2 (tad+tva)【中】真实(truth)。tattato,【无】正确地(according to truth; accurately)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of tapati] heated, hot, glowing; of metals: in a melted state (cp. uttatta) A.II,122≈(tattena talena osiñcante, as punishment); Dh.308 (ayoguḷa); J.II,352 (id.); IV,306 (tattatapo “of red-hot heat,” i. e. in severe self-torture); Miln.26, 45 (adv. red-hot); PvA.221 (tatta-lohasecanaṁ the pouring over of glowing copper, one of the punishments in Niraya). (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [tad+tva] truth; Abl. tattato according to truth; accurately J.II,125 (ñatvā); III,276 (ajānitvā not knowing exactly). (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(tapati 的【过分】), 已加热，已白热化，已发热(heated, hot, glowing; of metals: in a melted state(cp. uttatta)) A.II.122≈(tattena talena osiñcante, as punishment); Dh.308.(ayoguḷa); J.II.352 (id.); IV.306 (tattatapo “of red-hot heat,” i. e. in severe self-torture); Miln 26, 45 (adv. red-hot); PvA 221 (tatta-lohasecanaṁ the pouring over of glowing copper, one of the punishments in Niraya)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(tapati 的【过分】), 已加热，已白热化，已发热。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】本性，真实。 ~to, 【无】正确地。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tattaka: {'def': '¹ [tatta pp. of tappati²+ka] pleasing, agreeable, pleasant Miln.238 (bhojana). (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (=tāvataka),【形】那么多，如此的大小(of such size, so large Vism 184 (corresponding with yattaka))。tattakaṁ kālaṁ, (so long, just that time, i. e. the specified time (may be long or short=only so long) DhA I.103 (v. l. ettakaṁ); II.16 (=ettaka))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (adj.) (=tāvataka) of such size, so large Vism.184 (corresponding with yattaka); tattakaṁ kālaṁ so long, just that time, i. e. the specified time (may be long or short=only so long) DhA.I,103 (v. l. ettakaṁ); II,16 (=ettaka). (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】那么多，如此的大小。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tattha: {'def': 'tatra,【副】那里(there)，在那个地方中(in that place)。tattha tattha【副】，这里那里(here and there)，在不同的地方(in various places)，到处(all over﹐台语：四界si3 kue3(ke3)、逐所在tak8 so2 cai7)。tatth’eva (= tattha eva﹐=tattheva﹐eva强调语)﹐就在那里。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. tatra adv. of place, cp. Goth. papro & also Sk. atra, yatra] A. 1. of place: (a) place where= there, in that place Sn.1071, 1085; Dh.58; J.I,278; Pv.I,10¹⁵; often with eva: tatth’eva right there, on the (very same) spot S.I,116; J.II,154; PvA.27. In this sense as introduction to a comment on a passage: in this, here, in this connection (see also tatra) Dhs.584; DhA.I,21; PvA.7, etc. (b) direction: there, to this place J.II,159 (gantvā); VI,368; PvA.16 (tatthagamanasīla able to go here & there, i. e. wherever you like, of a Yakkha). -- 2. as (Loc.) case of pron. base ta°= in this, for or about that, etc. Sn.1115 (etam abhiññāya tato tattha vipassati: SnA tatra); tattha yo maṅku hoti Dh.249 (=tasmiṁ dāne m. DhA.III,359); tattha kā paridevanā Pv.I,12³ (“why sorrow for this?”). -- 3. of time: then, for the time being, interim (=ettha, cp. tattaka²) in phrase tattha-parinibbāyin, where corresp. phrases have antarā-parinibbāyin (A.II,238 e. g.≈I.134; see under parinibbāyin) D.I,156; A.I,232; II,5; IV,12; S.V,357; M.II,52, etc. The meaning of this phrase may however be taken in the sense of tatra A 3 (see next). -- B. Repeated: tattha tattha here and there, in various places, all over; also corresponding with yattha yattha wherever . . . there It.115; Nett 96 (°gāmini-paṭipadā); VvA.297; PvA.1, 2, 33, 77, etc. -- See tatra. (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'tatra, 【副】那里，在那个地方中。(p142)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tava…natthi: {'def': '不要没有。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Taya: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. trayaṁ triad, cp. trayī; see also tāvatiṁsa] a triad, in ratana-ttaya the triad of gems (the Buddha, the Norm. & the Community) see ratana; e. g. PvA.1, 49, 141. -- piṭaka-ttaya the triad of the Piṭakas SnA 328. (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】三个一组。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '-taya,(f. tisso, nt. tīṇi; Vedic traya, trī & trīṇi)【中】Nom.Acc.m.三，三个一组。tayājja(=tayā ajja)﹐三时(昼夜各三时)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tayo: {'def': '[f. tisso, nt. tīṇi; Vedic traya, trī & trīṇi; Gr. treίs, tria; Lat. trēs, tria; Goth. preis, prija; Ohg. drī; E. three, etc.] num. card. three. Nom.Acc.m. tayo (Sn.311), & tayas (tayas su dhammā Sn.231, see KhA 188) f. tisso (D.I,143; A.V,210; It.99) nt. tīṇi (A.I,138, etc.), also used as absolute form (eka dve tīṇi) Kh III, (cp. KhA 79 & tīṇi lakkhaṇā for lakkhaṇāni Sn.1019); Gen. m. nt. tiṇṇaṁ (J.III,52, 111, etc.), f. tissannaṁ; Instr. tīhi (ṭhānehi Dh.224, vijjāhi It.101); Loc. tīsu (janesu J.I,307; vidhāsu Sn.842). -- In composition & derivation: ti in numerical cpds.: tidasa (30) q. v.; tisata (300) Sn.566 (brāhmaṇā tisatā); 573 (bhikkhavo tisatā); tisahassa (3000) Pv.II,9⁵¹ (janā °ā); in numerical derivations: tiṁsa (30), tika (triad), tikkhattuṁ (thrice); tidhā (threefold). -- In nominal cpds.: see ti° te (a) in numerical cpds.: terasa (SnA 489; DhsA.333; VvA.72: terasī the 13th day) & teḷasa (S.I,192 Sn.pp. 102, 103) (13) [Sk. trayodaśa, Lat. tredecim]; tevīsa (23) VvA.5; tettiṁsa (33) J.I,273; DhA.I,267; tesaṭṭhi (63) PvA.111 (Jambudīpe tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesu). ‹-› (b) in nominal cpds.: see te°. (Page 297)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ti 的【主.复】) (f. tisso, nt. tīṇi; Vedic traya, trī & trīṇi;), 三(人)。num. card. three.\xa0Nom.-Acc.m. tayo & tayas, f. tisso, nt. tīṇi, also used as absolute form (eka dve tīṇi) Gen.m.nt. tiṇṇaṁ, f. tissannaṁ; Instr. tīhi; Loc. tīsu. -- In composition & derivation: ti in numerical cpds.: tidasa (30); tisata (300); tisahassa (3000); in numerical derivations: tiṁsa (30), tika (triad), tikkhattuṁ (thrice); tidhā (threefold). -- In nominal cpds.: see ti° te (a) in numerical cpds.: terasa & teḷasa(13) (Sk. trayodawa, Lat. Tredecim); tevīsa (23) ; tettiṁsa (33); tesaṭṭhi (63)。(b) in nominal cpds.: see te-.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ti 的【主、复】), 三（人）。(p143)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ta°: {'def': '[Vedic tad, etc.; Gr. tόn tήn tό; Lat. is-te, tālis, etc.; Lith. tás tā; Goth. pata; Ohg. etc. daz; E. that] base of demonstr. pron. for nt., in oblique cases of m. & f., & in demonstr. adv. of place & time (see also sa). ‹-› 1. Cases: Nom. sg. nt. tad (older) Vin.I,83; Sn.1052; Dh.326; Miln.25 & taṁ (cp. yaṁ, kiṁ) Sn.1037, 1050; J.III,26; Acc. m. taṁ J.II,158, f. taṁ J.VI,368; Gen. tassa, f. tassā (Sn.22, 110; J.I,151); Instr. tena, f. tāya (J.III, 188); Abl. tasmā (J.I,167); tamhā Sn.291, 1138; (J.III,26) & tato (usually as adv.) (Sn.390); Loc. tasmiṁ (J.I,278), tamhi (Dh.117); tahiṁ (adv.) (Pv.I,5⁷) & tahaṁ (adv.) (J.I,384; VvA.36); pl. Nom. m. te (J.II,129), f. tā (J.II,127), nt. tāni (Sn.669, 845); Gen. tesaṁ, f. tāsaṁ (Sn.916); Instr. tehi, f. tāhi (J.II,128); Loc. tesu, f. tāsu (Sn.670). -- In composition (Sandhi) both tad- & taṁ- are used with consecutive phonetic changes (assimilation), viz. (a) tad°: (a) in subst. function: tadagge henceforth D.I,93 taduṭṭhāya DhA.III,344; tadūpiya (cp. Trenckner, Notes 77, 78=tadopya (see discussion under opeti), but cp. Sk. tadrūpa Divy 543 & tatrupāya. It is simply tad-upa-ka, the adj.‹-› positive of upa, of which the compar.-superlative is upama, meaning like this, i. e. of this or the same kind. Also spelt tadūpikā (f.) (at J.II,160) agreeing with, agreeable, pleasant Miln.9; tadatthaṁ to such purpose SnA 565. -- With assimilation: taccarita; tapparāyaṇa Sn.1114; tappoṇa (=tad-pra-ava-nata) see taccarita; tabbisaya (various) PvA.73; tabbiparīta (different) Vism.290; DhA.III,275; tabbiparītatāya in contrast to that Vism.450. -- (b) as crude form (not nt.) originally only in Acc. (nt.) in adj. function like tad-ahan this day, then felt as euphonic d, esp. in forms where similarly the euphonic t is used (ajja-t-agge). Hence ta- is abstracted as a crude (adverbial) form used like any other root in composition. Thus: tad-ah-uposathe on this day’s fast-day=to-day (or that day) being Sunday D.I,47; Sn.p. 139 (expl^d as tam-ah-uposathe, uposatha-divase ti at SnA 502); tadahe on the same day PvA.46; tadahū (id.) J.V,215 (=tasmiṁ chaṇa-divase). tad-aṅga for certain, surely, categorical (orig. concerning this cp. kimaṅga), in tadaṅga-nibbuta S.III,43; tadaṅga-samatikkama Nd² 203; tadaṅga-vikkhambhana-samuccheda Vism.410; tadaṅga-pahāna DhsA.351; SnA 8; tadaṅgena A.IV,411. -- (b) tan°: (a) as subst.: tammaya (equal to this, up to this) Sn.846 (=tapparāyana Nd² 206); A.I,150. -- (b) Derived from Acc. use (like a b) as adj. is taṅkhaṇikā (fr. taṁ khaṇaṁ) Vin.III,140 (=muhuttikā). -- (g) a reduced form of taṁ is to be found as ta° in the same origin & application as ta-d- (under a b) in combⁿ ta-y-idaṁ (for taṁidaṁ›taṁ-idaṁ›ta-idaṁ›ta-y-idaṁ) where y. takes the place of the euphonic consonant. Cp. in application also Gr. tou_to & tau_ta, used adverbially as therefore (orig. just that) Sn.1077; Pv.I,3³; PvA.2, 16 (=taṁ idaṁ), 76. The same ta° is to be seen in tāhaṁ Vv 83¹⁵ (=taṁ-ahaṁ), & not to be confused with tāhaṁ=te ahaṁ (see tvaṁ). -- A similar combⁿ is taṁyathā Miln.1 (this is how, thus, as follows) which is the Sk. form for the usual P. seyyathā (instead of ta-(y)--yathā, like ta-y-idaṁ); cp. Trenckner, P.M. p. 75. -- A sporadic form for tad is tadaṁ Sn.p. 147 (even that, just that; for tathaṁ?). -- II. Application: 1. ta° refers or points back to somebody or something just mentioned or under discussion (like Gr. ou(=tos, Lat. hic, Fr. ci in voici, cet homme-ci, etc.): this, that, just this (or that), even this (or these). In this sense comb^d with api: te c’âpi (even these) Sn.1058. It is also used to indicate something immediately following the statement of the speaker (cp. Gr. o(/de, E. thus): this now, esp. in adv. use (see below); taṁ kiṁ maññasi D.I,60; yam etaṁ pañhaṁ apucchi Ajita taṁ vadāmi te: Sn.1037; taṁ te pavakkhāmi (this now shall I tell you:) Sn.1050; tesaṁ Buddho vyākāsi (to those just mentioned answered B.) Sn.1127; te tositā (and they, pleased . . .) ib. 1128. -- 2. Correlative use: (a) in rel. sentences with ya° (preceding ta°): yaṁ ahaṁ jānāmi taṁ tvaṁ jānāsi “what I know (that) you know” D.I,88; yo nerayikānaṁ sattānaṁ āhāro tena so yāpeti “he lives on that food which is (characteristic) of the beings in N.; or: whichever is the food of the N. beings, on this he lives” PvA.27. -- (b) elliptical (with omission of the verb to be) yaṁ taṁ=that which (there is), what (is), whatever, used like an adj.; ye te those who, i. e. all (these), whatever: ye pana te manussā saddhā . . . te evam ahaṁsu . . . “all those people who were full of faith said” Vin.II,195; yena tena upāyena gaṇha “catch him by whatever means (you like),” i. e. by all means J.II,159; yaṁ taṁ kayirā “whatever he may do” Dh.42. -- 3. Distributive and iterative use (cp. Lat. quisquis, etc.): . . . taṁ taṁ this & that, i. e. each one; yaṁ yaṁ passati taṁ taṁ pucchati whomsoever he sees (each one) he asks PvA.38; yaṁ yaṁ manaso piyaṁ taṁ taṁ gahetvā whatever . . . (all) that PvA.77; yo yo yaṁ yaṁ icchati tassa tassa taṁ taṁ adāsi “whatever anybody wished he gave to him” PvA.113. So with adv. of ta°: tattha tattha here & there (freq.); tahaṁ tahaṁ id. J.I,384; VvA.36, 187; tato tato Sn.390. -- (b) the same in disjunctivecomparative sense: taṁ . . . taṁ is this so & is this so (too)=the same as, viz. taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ is the soul the same as the body (opp. aññaṁ j. a. s.) A.V,193, etc. (see jīva). -- 4. Adverbial use of some cases (local^a, temporal^b, & modal^c): Acc. taṁ (a) there (to): tad avasari he withdrew there D. II.126, 156; (b) taṁ enaṁ at once, presently (=tāvad-eva) Vin.I,127 (cp. Ved. enā); (c) therefore (cp. kiṁ wherefore, why), that is why, now, then: S.II,17; M.I,487; Sn.1110; Pv.I,2³ (=tasmā PvA.11 & 103); II,7¹⁶; cp. taṁ kissa hetu Nd² on jhāna. -- Gen. tassa (c) therefore A.IV,333. ‹-› Instr. tena (a) there (direction=there to), always in correl. with yena: where-there, or in whatever direction, here & there. Freq. in formula denoting approach to a place (often unnecessary to translate); e. g. yena Jīvakassa ambavanaṁ tena pāyāsi: where the Mangogrove of J. was, there he went=he went to the M. of J. D.I,49; yena Gotamo ten’upasaṅkama go where G. is D.I,88; yena āvasathâgāraṁ ten’upasaṅkami D.II,85 etc.; yena vā tena vā palāyanti they run here & there A.II,33; (c) so then, now then, therefore, thus (often with hi) J.I,151, 279; PvA.60; Miln.23; tena hi D.II,2; J.I,266; III,188; Miln.19. -- Abl. tasmā (c) out of this reason, therefore Sn.1051, 1104; Nd² 279 (=taṁ kāraṇaṁ); PvA.11, 103; tato (a) from there, thence Pv.I,12³; (b) then, hereafter PvA.39. -- Loc. tahiṁ (a) there (over there›beyond) Pv.I,5⁷; (c) =therefore PvA.25; tahaṁ (a) there; usually repeated: see above II. 3 (a). -- See also tattha, tathā, tadā, tādi, etc. (Page 291)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taḷāka: {'def': '【阳、中】湖。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Derivation uncertain. Perhaps from taṭa. The Sk. forms are taṭaka, taṭāka, taḍāga] a pond, pool, reservoir Vin.II,256; J.I,4, 239; PvA.202; DA.I,273; Miln.1, 66=81, 246, 296, 359. (Page 298)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】湖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Taṁ: {'def': 'taṁ(taṁtaṁ)﹐彼彼，这个那个。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Taṇhā: {'def': '渴爱;爱;爱欲', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【阴】爱，渴望，口渴，贪欲，执着。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】爱尽（渴望的破坏）。 ~jāla, 【中】爱网（渴望的陷阱）。 ~dutiya, 【形】以渴望为友的。 ~paccaya, 【形】爱缘的（由渴望引起的）。 ~vicarita, 爱伺（渴望的思潮）。 ~saṅkhaya, 【阳】爱等尽（渴望的完成破坏）。 ~saŋyojana,【中】爱桎梏（渴望的脚镣）。 ~salla, 【中】爱镖（渴望的飞镳）。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. tṛṣṇā, besides tarśa (m.) & ṭṛṣ (f.)=Av. tarśna thirst, Gr. tarsi/a dryness, Goth. paúrsus, Ohg. durst, E. drought & thirst; to *ters to be, or to make dry in Gr. tέrsomai, Lat. torreo to roast, Goth. gapaírsan, Ohg. derren.-another form of t. is tasiṇā] lit. drought, thirst; fig. craving, hunger for, excitement, the fever of unsatisfied longing (c. Loc.: kabaḷiṅkāre āhāre “thirst” for solid food S.II,101 sq.; cīvare piṇḍapāte taṇhā=greed for Sn.339). Opp^d to peace of mind (upekhā, santi). -- A. Literal meaning: khudāya taṇhāya ca khajjamānā tormented by hunger & thirst Pv.II,1⁵ (=pipāsāya PvA.69). -- B. In its secondary meaning: taṇhā is a state of mind that leads to rebirth. Plato puts a similar idea into the mouth of Socrates (Phædo 458, 9). Neither the Greek nor the Indian thinker has thought it necessary to explain how this effect is produced. In the Chain of Causation (D.II,34) we are told how Taṇhā arises-when the sense organs come into contact with the outside world there follow sensation and feeling, & these (if, as elsewhere stated, there is no mastery over them) result in Taṇhā. In the First Proclamation (S.V,420 ff.; Vin.I,10) it is said that Taṇhā, the source of sorrow, must be rooted out by the way there laid down, that is by the Aryan Path. Only then can the ideal life be lived. Just as physical thirst arises of itself, and must be assuaged, got rid of, or the body dies; so the mental “thirst,” arising from without, becomes a craving that must be rooted out, quite got rid of, or there can be no Nibbāna. The figure is a strong one, and the word Taṇhā is found mainly in poetry, or in prose passages charged with religious emotion. It is rarely used in the philosophy or the psychology. Thus in the long Enumeration of Qualities (Dhs), Taṇhā occurs in one only out of the 1,366 sections (Dhs.1059), & then only as one of many subordinate phases of lobha. Taṇhā binds a man to the chain of Saṁsāra, of being reborn & dying again & again (2^b) until Arahantship or Nibbāna is attained, taṇhā destroyed, & the cause alike of sorrow and of future births removed (2^b). In this sense Nibbāna is identical with “sabbupadhi-paṭinissaggo taṇhakkhayo virāgo nirodho” (see Nibbāna). -- 1. Systematizations: The 3 aims of t. kāma°, bhava°, vibhava°, that is craving for sensuous pleasure, for rebirth (anywhere, but especially in heaven), or for no rebirth; cp. Vibhava. These three aims are mentioned already in the First Proclamation (S.V,420; Vin.I,10) and often afterwards D.II,61, 308; III,216, 275; S.III,26, 158; It.50; Ps.I,26, 39; II,147; Vbh.101, 365; Nett 160. Another group of 3 aims of taṇhā is given as kāma°, rūpa° & arūpa° at D.III,216; Vbh.395; & yet another as rūpa°, arūpa° & nirodha° at D.III,216. -- The source of t. is said to be sixfold as founded on & relating to the 6 bāhirāni āyatanāni (see rūpa), objects of sense or sensations, viz. sights, sounds, smells, etc.: D.II,58; Ps.I,6 sq.; Nd² 271^I; in threefold aspects (as kāma-taṇhā, bhava° & vibhava°) with relation to the 6 senses discussed at Vism.567 sq.; also under the term cha-taṇha-kāyā (sixfold group, see cpds.) M.I,51; III,280; Ps.I,26; elsewhere called chadvārika-taṇhā “arising through the 6 doors” DhA.III,286. -- 18 varieties of t. (comprising worldly objects of enjoyment, ease, comfort & wellliving are enum^d at Nd² 271^III (under taṇhā-lepa). 36 kinds: 18 referring to sensations (illusions) of subjective origin (ajjhattikassa upādāya), & 18 to sensations affecting the individual in objective quality (bāhirassa upādāya) at A.II,212; Nett 37; & 108 varieties or specifications of t. are given at Nd² 271^II (under Jappā)=Dhs.1059=Vbh.361. -- Taṇhā as “kusalā pi akusalā pi” (good & bad) occurs at Nett 87; cp. Tālapuṭa’s good t. Th.I,1091 f. -- 2. Import of the term: (a) various characterizations of t.: mahā° Sn.114; kāma° SI.131; gedha° SI.15; bhava° D.III,274 (+avijjā); grouped with diṭṭhi (wrong views) Nd² 271^III, 271^VI, T. fetters the world & causes misery: “yāya ayaṁ loko uddhasto pariyonaddho tantākulajāto” A.II,211 sq.; taṇhāya jāyatī soko taṇhāya jāyatī bhayaṁ taṇhāya vippamuttassa natthi soko kuto bhayaṁ Dh.216; taṇhāya uḍḍito loko S.I,40; yaṁ loke piyarūpaṁ sātarūpaṁ etth’esā taṇhā . . . Vbh.103; it is the 4th constituent of Māra’s army (M-senā) Sn.436; M’s daughter, S.I,134. In comparisons: t.+jālinī visattikā S.I,107; =bharâdānaṁ (t. ponobbhavikā nandirāga-sahagatā) S III 26; V,402: gaṇḍa=kāya, gaṇḍamūlan ti taṇhāy’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ S.IV,83;=sota S.IV,292 (and a khīṇāsavo=chinnasoto); manujassa pamatta-cārino t. vaḍḍhati māluvā viya Dh.334. -- (b) taṇhā as the inciting factor of rebirth & incidental cause of saṁsāra kammaṁ khettaṁ viññāṇaṁ bījaṁ taṇhā sineho . . . evaṁ āyatiṁ punabbhavâbhinibbatti hoti A.I,223; t. ca avasesā ca kilesā: ayaṁ vuccati dukkha-samudayo Vbh.107, similarly Nett 23 sq.; as ponobbhavikā (causing rebirth) S.III,26; Ps.II,147, etc.; as a link in the chain of interdependent causation (see paṭiccasamuppāda): vedanā-paccayā taṇhā, taṇhā-paccayā upādānaṁ Vin.I,1, 5; D.II,31, 33, 56, etc.; t. & upadhi: taṇhāya sati upadhi hoti t. asati up. na hoti S.II,108; ye taṇhaṁ vaḍḍhenti te upadhiṁ vaḍḍhenti, etc. S.II,109; taṇhāya nīyati loko taṇhāya parikissati S.I,39; taṇhā saṁyojanena saṁyuttā sattā dīgharattaṁ sandhāvanti saṁsaranti It.8. See also t.-dutiya. -- (c) To have got rid of t. is Arahantship: vigata-taṇha vigata-pipāsa vigata-pariḷāha D.III,238; S.III,8, 107 sq., 190; samūlaṁ taṇhaṁ abbuyha S.I,16=63, 121 (Godhiko parinibbuto); III,26 (nicchāto parinibbuto); vīta° Sn.83, 849, 1041 (+nibbuta); taṇhāya vippahānena S.I,39 (“Nibbānan” iti vuccati), 40 (sabbaṁ chindati bandhanaṁ); taṇhaṁ mā kāsi mā lokaṁ punar āgami Sn.339; taṇhaṁ pariññāya . . . te narā oghatiṇṇā ti Sn.1082; ucchinna-bhava-taṇhā Sn.746; taṇhāya vūpasama S.III,231; t.-nirodha S.IV,390. -- See also M.I,51; Dh.154; It.9 (vita°+anādāna), 50 (°ṁ pahantvāna); Sn.495, 496, 916; & cp. °khaya. -- 3. Kindred terms which in Commentaries are expl^d by one of the taṇhā-formulæ (cp. Nd² 271^V & 271^VII): (a) t. in groups of 5: (a) with kilesa saṁyoga vipāka duccarita; (b) diṭṭhi kilesa duccarita avijjā; (g) diṭṭhi kil° kamma duccarita. -- (b) quasi-synonyms: ādāna, ejā, gedha, jappā, nandī, nivesana, pariḷāha, pipāsā, lepa, loluppa, vāna, visattikā, sibbanī. -- In cpds. the form taṇhā is represented by taṇha before double consonants, as taṇhakkhaya, etc.

--âdhipateyya mastery over t. S.III,103; --âdhipanna seized by t. S. I.29; Sn.1123; --ādāsa the mirror of t. A.II,54; âbhinivesa full of t. PvA.267; --āluka greedy J.II,78; --uppādā (pl.) (four) grounds of the rise of craving (viz. cīvara, piṇḍapāta, senâsana, itibhavâbhava) A.II,10=It.109; D.III,228; Vbh.375; --kāyā (pl.) (six) groups of t. (see above B I) S.II,3; D.III,244. 280; Ps.I,26; Vbh.380; --kkhaya the destruction of the excitement of cravings, almost synonymous with Nibbāna (see above B2c): °rata Dh.187 (expl^d at DhA.III,241: arahatte c’eva nibbāne ca abhirato hoti); ‹-› Vv 73⁵ (expl^d by Nibbāna VvA.296); therefore in the expositionary formula of Nibbāna as equivalent with N. Vin.I,5; S.III,133; It.88, etc. (see N.). In the same sense: sabbañjaho taṇhakkhaye vimutto Vin.I,8= M.I,171=Dh.353; taṇhākkhaya virāga nirodha nibbāna A.II,34, expl^d at Vism.293; bhikkhu arahaṁ cha ṭhānāni adhimutto hoti: nekkhammâdhimutto, paviveka°, avyāpajjha°, upādānakkhaya°, taṇhakkhaya°, asammoha° Vin.I,183; cp. also Sn.70, 211, 1070, 1137; -gata obsessed with excitement, i. e. a victim of t. Sn.776; -gaddula the leash of t. Nd² 271^II≈; -cchida breaking the cravings Sn.1021, 1101; -jāla the snare of t. M.I,271; Th.1, 306; Nd² 271^II; -dutiya who has the fever or excitement of t. as his companion A.II,10= It.9=109=Sn.740, 741=Nd² 305; cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 278; -nadī the river of t. Nd² 271^II; cp. nadiyā soto ti: taṇhāy’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ It.114; -nighātana the destruction of t. Sn.1085; -pakkha the party of t., all that belongs to t. Nett 53, 69, 88, 160; -paccaya caused by t. Sn.p. 144; Vism.568; -mūlaka rooted in t. (dhammā: 9 items) Ps.I,26, 130; Vbh.390; -lepa cleaving to t. Nd² 271^III; (+diṭṭhi-lepa); -vasika being in the power of t. J.IV,3; -vicarita a thought of t. A.II,212; -saṅkhaya (complete) destruction of t.; °sutta M.I,251 (cūḷa°), 256 (mahā°): °vimutti salvation through cessation of t. M.I,256, 270, & °vimutta (adj.) S.IV,391; -samudda the ocean of t. Nd 271^II; -sambhūta produced by t. (t. ayaṁ kāyo) A.II,145 (cp. Sn.p. 144; yaṁ kiñci dukkhaṁ sambhoti sabbaṁ taṇhāpaccayā); -saṁyojana the fetter of t. (adj.) fettered, bound by t., in phrase t.-saṁyojanena saṁyuttā sattā dīgharattaṁ sandhāvanti saṁsaranti It.8, & t.-saṁyojanānaṁ sattānaṁ sandhāvataṁ saṁsarataṁ S.II,178=III,149= PvA.166; A.I,223; -salla the sting or poisoned arrow of t. S.I,192 (°assa hantāraṁ vande ādiccabandhunaṁ), the extirpation of which is one of the 12 achievements of a mahesi Nd² 503 (°assa abbuḷhana; cp. above). (Page 294)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵语ṭrsṇā，俗语tiṇhā或taṇhā，佛教梵语tasiṇā，犍陀罗语taṅsa或tasiṇā),【阴】爱，渴望，口渴，贪欲，执著。(S.12.2./II,3.说：“Katamā ca, bhikkhave, taṇhā? Chayime, bhikkhave, taṇhākāyā--rūpataṇhā, saddataṇhā, gandhataṇhā, rasataṇhā, phoṭṭhabbataṇhā, dhammataṇhā. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, taṇhā.诸比丘！何为爱？诸比丘！此等有六爱身：色爱、声爱、香爱、味爱、触爱、法爱，诸比丘！以此谓之爱。) taṇhākkhaya,【阳】爱尽(渴的破坏)。taṇhājāla,【中】爱网(渴望的陷阱)。taṇhādutiya,【形】以渴为友的。taṇhāpaccaya,【形】爱缘的(由渴望引起的)。taṇhāvicarita, 爱伺(渴望的思潮)。taṇhāsaṅkhaya,【阳】爱全尽(渴望的完成破坏)。taṇhāsaṁyojana,【中】爱桎梏(渴望的脚镣和手铐)。taṇhāsalla,【中】爱镖(渴望的飞镳)。DA.15./II,500.：kāmataṇhāti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgavasena uppannā rūpāditaṇhā. Bhavataṇhāti sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo. Vibhavataṇhāti ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo.((三渴爱︰)欲爱︰於色等法，生起染著五欲的贪爱。有爱︰染著伴随恒常的见解(常见)。无有爱︰染著伴随断灭的(粉碎的)见解。)《分别论》(Vibhaṅga.CS:p.372)：Yo bhavesu bhavacchando bhavarāgo bhavanandī bhavataṇhā bhavasineho bhavapariḷāho bhavamucchā bhavajjhosānaṁ--ayaṁ vuccati “bhavataṇhā”.(凡是在‘有’上有有欲、有染、有喜、有爱、有贪、有热、有迷、有黏，这称为有爱。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Taṇhīyati: {'def': '[=taṇhāyati, denom. fr. taṇhā, cp. Sk. tṛṣyati to have thirst] to have thirst for S.II,13 (for v. l. SS. tuṇhīyati; BB. tasati); Vism.544 (+upādiyati ghaṭ ‹-› yati); cp. tasati & pp. tasita. (Page 295)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(taṇhā 的【派】)，有渴望。【过】taṇhīyi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(taṇhā 的【派】)，有渴望。【过】 ~hīyi。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Taṇḍula: {'def': '(*Sk. taṇḍula: dialectical] rice-grain, rice husked & ready for boiling; freq. comb^d with tila (q. v.) in mentioning of offerings, presentations, etc.: loṇaṁ telaṁ taṇḍulaṁ khādaniyaṁ sakaṭesu āropetvā Vin.I,220, 238, 243, 249; talitaṇḍulâdayo J.III,53; PvA.105. -- Vin.I,244; A.I,130; J.I,255; III,55, 425 (taṇḍulāni metri causa); VI,365 (mūla° coarse r., majjhima° medium r., kaṇikā the finest grain); Sn.295; Pug.32; DhA.I,395 (sāli-taṇḍula husked rice); DA.I,93. Cp. ut°.

--ammaṇa a measure (handful?) of rice J.II,436. --dona a rice-vat or rice-bowl DhA.IV,15; --pāladvārā “doors (i. e. house) of the rice-guard” Npl. M.II,185; --muṭṭhi a handful of rice PvA.131; --homa an oblation of rice D.I,9. (Page 294)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵taṇḍula),【中】米粒(rice-grain)，去壳米(rice husked & ready for boiling)。taṇḍulamuṭṭhi,【阳】一把米。sāli-taṇḍula,【中】去壳米。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】米。 ~muṭṭhi，【阳】一把米。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Taṇḍuleyyaka: {'def': '[cp. Sk. taṇḍulīya] the plant Amaranthus polygonoides VvA.99 (enum^d amongst various kinds of ḍāka). (Page 294)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taṭa: {'def': '【中】河边，河岸。【阳】断崖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[*tḷ, see tala & cp. tālu, also Lat. tellus] declivity or side of a hill, precipice; side of a river or well, a bank J.I,232, 303; II,315 (udapāna°); IV,141; SnA 519, DhA.I,73 (papāta°). See also talāka. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】河边，河岸。【阳】断崖。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Taṭa-taṭāyati: {'def': '(taṭa 的【拟】), 发出嗒嗒 (ṭat ṭat) 的声音【过】 ~āyi, 【现分】taṭataṭāyamāna。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(taṭa 的【拟】), 发出嗒嗒 (ṭat ṭat)的声音【过】taṭa-taṭāyi,【现分】taṭataṭāyamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Taṭataṭāyati: {'def': '[Onomatopoetic, to make a sound like taṭtaṭ. Root *kḷ (on ṭ for ḷ cp. taṭa for tala) to grind one’s teeth, to be in a frenzy. Cp. ciṭiciṭāyāti. See note on gala and kiṇakiṇāyati] to rattle, shake, clatter; to grind or gnash one’s teeth; to fizz. Usually said of people in frenzy or fury (in ppr. °yanto or °yamāna): J.I,347 (rosena) 439 (kodhena); II,277 (of a bhikkhu kodhana “boiling with rage” like a “uddhane pakkhitta-loṇaṁ viya”); the latter trope also at DhA.IV,176; DhA.I,370 (aggimhi pakkhitta-loṇasakkharā viya rosena t.); III,328 (vātâhata-tālapaṇṇaṁ viya); VvA.47, 121 (of a kodhâbhibhūto; v. l. kaṭakaṭāyamāna), 206 (+akkosati paribhāsati), 256. Cp. also kaṭakaṭāyati & karakarā. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taṭṭaka: {'def': '【中】盘子，粥碗。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】盘子，粥碗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Etym. unknown] a bowl for holding food, a flat bowl, porringer, salver J.III,10 (suvaṇṇa°), 97, 121, 538; IV,281. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. taken into Tamil as taṭṭaṁ, cp. also Av. taśta. Morris (J.P.T.S. 1884, 80) compares Marathi tasta (ewer). (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Taṭṭikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. kaṭaka] a (straw) mat Vin.IV,40 (Bdhgh on this: teṭṭikaṁ (sic) nāma tālapaṇṇehi vā vākehi vā katataṭṭikā, p. 357); J.I,141 (v. l. taddhika); Vism.97. (Page 293)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】小垫，皮坐垫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】小垫，皮坐垫。(p141)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Te: {'def': '﹐【阳】他们(复.主格)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Te-asīti: {'def': '【阴】八十三。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】八十三。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Te-cattāḷīsati: {'def': '【阴】四十三。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】四十三。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Te-cīvarika: {'def': '【形】三袈裟者(只使用三件袈裟)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】三袈裟者（只使用三件袈裟）。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Teja: {'def': '【阳、中】 (mano-组), 热，光辉，光荣，力量。 (在【合】变成 tejo)~dhātu, 【阴】热的元素。 ~kasiṇa, 【中】（修禅取相的）火器材。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Tejo [Vedic tejas (nt.) from tij to be sharp or to pierce=a (piercing) flame. See tejate; semantically (sharp›light) cp. Ger. strahl (ray of light)=Ags. strael (arrow). -- The nt. tejo is the usual form; Instr. tejasā (Dh.387; Sn.1097) & tejena (J.III,53), cp. tapa & tapo] “sharpness,” heat, flame, fire, light; radiance, effulgence, splendour, glory, energy, strength, power D.II,259 (personified as deva, among the 4 Elements paṭhavī, āpo, t., vāyo; cp. tejo-dhātu); S.IV,215; M.I,327; Sn.1097 (glory of the sun comp^d with that of the Buddha); Dh.387 (sabbaṁ ahorattiṁ Buddho tapati tejasā); J.III,53 (sīla°); I,93 (puñña° the power of merit); Vbh.426 (id.); Ps.I,103; Vism.350 (def.); VvA.116.

--kasiṇa fire-contemplation for the purpose of kammaṭṭhāna practice (see kasiṇa) D.III,268; Dhs.203; Vism.171; DhA.II,49; III,214; Bdhd 106; --dhātu the element of flame (or fire), the 3rd of the 6 Elements, viz. paṭhavī āpo t. vāyo ākāsa viññāṇa (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 242) D.III,27, 228, 247; M.I,188, 422; A.I,176; II,165; Dhs.588, 648, 964; Nett 74; Vism.363. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】。Tajo(Vedic tejas (nt.) from tij to be sharp or to pierce。cp. tapa & tapo),【中】(mano-group), 热，光辉，光荣，力量(“sharpness,” heat, flame, fire, light; radiance, effulgence, splendour, glory, energy, strength, power)。(在【合】变成 tejo) tejadhātu,【阴】热的元素。tejakasiṇa,【中】(修禅取相的)火遍。Instr. tejasā & tejena。身体有四个部分是火界最显著的：一、间隔性发烧之火(santappana tejo，如患疟疾时隔天性的发烧)。二、导致成熟和老化之火(jīrana tejo)。三、普通发烧之火(ḍaha tejo)，四、消化之火(pācaka tejo)，这是命根九法聚的作用之一。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tejana: {'def': '【中】1.箭。2.削尖的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [see tejate] the point or shaft of an arrow, an arrow Th.1, 29; Dh.80, 145; DhA.II,147. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 箭。 2. 削尖的。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tejate: {'def': '[Vedic tejate from tij (*stij)=Lat. in-stīgo (to spur), Gr. sti/zw, stiktόs, Ohg. stehhan, Nhg. stecken, E. stick] to be sharp or to make sharp, to prick, to incite, etc. -- See tikkha, tikhiṇa, tiṇha, titikkhati, tittaka, teja, etc. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tejavant: {'def': '(adj.) [tejas+vant] 1. splendid, powerful, majestic DhA.I,426. -- 2. in flames, heated, burning with (-°) Miln.148. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tejavantu: {'def': '【形】宏伟的，光荣的，发热的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】宏伟的，光荣的，发热的。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tejeti: {'def': '(tij +e), 加热，削尖。【过】tejesi。【过分】tejita。【现分】tejenta。【独】tejetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(tij + e), 加热，削尖。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 tejita。【现分】 tejenta。【独】 tejetvā。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tejin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [see teja] having light or splendour, shining forth, glorious Sn.1097 (=Nd² 286 tejena samannāgata). (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tekiccha: {'def': '【形】可医治的，可被宽恕的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】可医治的，可被宽恕的人。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [der. fr. tikiccha] curable; fig. one who can be helped or pardoned. Only in cpds. a° incurable, unpardonable VvA.322 (of a sick person); DhA.I,25 (id.); Miln.322; of Devadatta w. ref. to his rebirth in Niraya Vin.II,202=It.85; M.I,393; & sa° pardonable Miln.192, 221, 344. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tela: {'def': '【中】油。telaghaṭa,【阳】油瓶。telacāṭi,【阴】一壶油。teladhūpita,【形】加油味的。telapadīpa,【阳】油灯。telamakkhana,【中】涂油。Pāci.IV,348.︰Telaṁ nāma tilatelaṁ sāsapatelaṁ madhukatelaṁ eraṇḍatelaṁ vasātelaṁ.(油︰胡麻油、芥子油、蜜树油、蓖麻子油、兽油。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [from tila] sesamum-oil (prepared from tila seeds), oil in general (tela=tilatelādika DA.I,93): used for drinking, anointing & burning purposes Vin.I,205, 220, 245, etc.; A.I,209, 278 (sappi vā t. vā); II,122≈(tattena pi telena osiñcante; punishment of pouring over with boiling oil); J.I,293; II,104; Pv IV.1⁴⁸ (tiṇena telaṁ pi na tvaṁ adāsi: frequent as gift to mendicants); Pug.55; Dhs.646, 740, 815; PvA.80 (kaḷebarānaṁ vasā telañ ca: fat or oil in general). -- tila °ṁ pātukāma desire to drink tila-wine VvA.54; pāka-tela oil concoction VvA.68=DhA.III,311; J.II,397 (sata°); III,372 (sahassa° worth a thousand); V,376 (sata° worth a hundred); pādabbhañjana° oil for rubbing the feet VvA.44; sāsapa° (mustard seed & oil) PvA.198; sappi° (butter & oil) Sn.295; PvA.278 (also+madhu) as var. objects of grocery trade (dhañña).

--koṭṭhāgāra oil store DhA.I,220; --ghaṭa oil jar DA.I,144; --cāṭī an oil tank DhA.I,220; --dhūpita spiced or flavoured with oil (of a cake) Vv 43⁵; --nāḷi a reed used for keeping oil in, an oil tube Vism.99; DhA.II,193 (+udakatumba); --pajjota an oil lamp Vin.I,16= D.I,85=A.I,56=Sn.p. 15; --padīpa an oil lamp Vin.I,15; S.III,126; V,319; VvA.198; --pāka an oil decoction, mixed with spirits, oil-wine Vin.I,205; --pilotikā (pl.) rags soaked in oil DhA.I,221; --makkhana anointing (the body) with oil Miln.11; --miñjaka an oil-cake PvA.51; --vaṇijjā oil trade PvA.47; --homa an oblation of oil D.I,9. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】油。 ~ghaṭa, 【阳】油瓶。 ~cāṭi, 【阴】一壶油。 ~dhūpita, 【形】加油味的。 ~padīpa, 【阳】油灯。 ~makkhana, 【中】涂油。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Telaka: {'def': '(nt.)=tela Vin.I,204 (“a small quantity of oil”); II,107 (sittha-t. oil of beeswax). (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Telika: {'def': '【阳】油商家。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】油商人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Teliya: {'def': '(adj.) oily J.III,522. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Temana: {'def': '【中】潮湿，润湿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】潮湿，润湿。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [from temeti] wetting, moistening Vism.338; VvA.20 (aggimhi tāpanaṁ udake vā temanaṁ); DhA.III,420. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Temeti: {'def': '[cp. Divy 285 tīmayati; Caus. of tim to moisten. There is an ancient confusion between the roots tim, tamas, etc. (to be dark), tim, temeti (to be wet), and stim to be motionless. Cp. tintiṇāyati, tinta, tibba (=tamas), timira] to make wet, to moisten Vin.I,47 (temetabba); II,209 (temetvā); DhA.I,220, 394 (id.); J.I,88≈KhA 164; J.II,325 (temento); PvA.46 (sutemitvā for temetvā). (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tim + e), 弄湿，使湿润。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 temita。【现分】tementa, temayamāna, 【独】 temetvā。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tim+e), 弄湿，使湿润。【过】temesi。【过分】temita。【现分】tementa, temayamāna,【独】temetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Temīyati: {'def': '(temeti 的【被】), 变湿，被淋浴。【现分】 temiyamāna。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(temeti 的【被】), 变湿，被淋浴。【现分】temiyamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tena: {'def': '【无】由于，因为。 ~hi, 【无】假如这样的话。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】由於，因为。tenahi,【无】假如这样的话。tenevāha(tena+eva+āha)﹐故说。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tenavuti: {'def': '【阴】九十三。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】九十三。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tepaññasati: {'def': '【阴】五十三。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】五十三。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Terasa: {'def': 'see under tayo. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'teḷasa, 【形】十三。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'teḷasa,【形】十三。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Terovassika: {'def': '(tiro超过+vassa+ika),【形】超过一年。Corovassikaṁ at Nd2 40 (p. 85) read terovassikaṁ (as S IV.185).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】三或四岁。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [tiro+vassa+ika] lasting over or beyond a year (or season), a year old, dried up or decayed S.IV,161 (thero vassiko in text)=185 (of wood) M.I,58 (of bones). (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tesattati: {'def': '【阴】七十三。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】七十三。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tesaṭṭhi: {'def': '【阴】六十三。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】六十三。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tettiŋsā: {'def': 'tettiŋsati, 【阴】三十三。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tettiṁsa: {'def': '(num.) [tayo+tiṁsa] thirty-three J.I,273; DhA.I,267 sq. See also under tayo & tāvatiṁsa. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tettiṁsā: {'def': 'tettiṁsati,【阴】三十三。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tevijja: {'def': 'see Vijjā. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tevijjā: {'def': '【阴】三明。tevijjā brāhmaṇā(=brāhmaṇaṁ tevijjaṁ),婆罗门三明。《长阿含26经》〈三明经〉(T1.104.3)︰「七世以来父母真正，不为他人之所轻毁，异典三部讽诵通利，种种经书善能分别，又能善於大人相法，观察吉凶，祭祀仪礼。」A.3.58./I,163.︰“Idha, bho Gotama, brāhmaṇo ubhato sujāto hoti mātito ca pitito ca, saṁsuddhagahaṇiko yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā, akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena, ajjhāyako, mantadharo, tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ, padako, veyyākaraṇo, lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayoti. (尊瞿昙！谓世间有婆罗门，母与父两人皆优生(sujāto)，七世以来父辈祖谱纯净，对身份背景无可责难；求学(ajjhāyako)，受持真言(mantadharo)，通达三吠陀(tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ)，(唇法)通达者(pāragū)，同义词与诗体学(sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ)，解析字母(sākkharappabhedānaṁ)，第五古传说(itihāsapañcamānaṁ)，句子(padako)，文法(veyyākaraṇo)，於顺世论(lokāyata)及大人相(mahāpurisalakkhaṇesu) 完整的受持。) AA.3.58./II,261.︰Tiṇṇaṁ vedānanti irubbedayajubbedasāmabbedānaṁ.(三吠陀︰梨俱吠陀（Irubbeda；梵rgveda赞诵明论）、夜柔吠陀（Yajubbeda；梵Yajurveda祭祀明论）、娑摩吠陀（Samabbeda；梵Sāmaveda歌咏明论）。Oṭṭhapahatakaraṇavasena pāraṁ gatoti pāragū.(完全做到振动嘴唇，为(唇法)通达者。) Saha nighaṇḍunā ca keṭubhena ca sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṁ.(同义词与诗体学，合称同义词与诗体学) Nighaṇḍūti nāmanighaṇḍurukkhādīnaṁ vevacanapakāsakasatthaṁ.(同义词︰命名树木等的名称，解释同义词之论。) Keṭubhanti kiriyākappavikappo kavīnaṁ upakārāya satthaṁ.(诗体学︰适当的(文句)表现与安排，有助於作诗之论)。Saha akkharappabhedena sākkharappabhedānaṁ.(字串的分解，为解析字母)。Akkharappabhedoti sikkhā ca nirutti ca. (字串的分解，为语言规则)。 Itihāsapañcamānanti āthabbaṇavedaṁ catutthaṁ katvā itiha āsa, itiha āsāti īdisavacanapaṭisaṁyutto purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto khattavijjāsaṅkhāto vā itihāso pañcamo etesanti itihāsapañcamā. Tesaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ vedānaṁ.(第五古传说︰涵盖阿闼婆吠陀(禳灾明论)在第四，古书(Itihāsa= Iti + ha +āsa)在第五，古书是像如此相关的古论，即刹帝利(战士)书於第五古书，这就是第五古传说之论)。Padaṁ tadavasesañca byākaraṇaṁ adhīyati vedeti cāti padako veyyākaraṇo.(通晓零散的句子，通晓文法，称为通文句、通文法) Lokāyataṁ vuccati vitaṇḍavādasatthaṁ.(顺世论︰诡辩之论)。AA.3.58./II,262.︰ Mahāpurisalakkhaṇanti mahāpurisānaṁ Buddhādīnaṁ lakkhaṇadīpakaṁ dvādasasahassaganthapamāṇaṁ satthaṁ, yattha soḷasasahassagāthāpadaparimāṇā Buddhamantā nāma ahesuṁ, yesaṁ vasena “iminā lakkhaṇena samannāgatā Buddhā nāma honti iminā paccekabuddhā, dve aggasāvakā,asīti mahāsāvakā, Buddhamātā, Buddhapitā, aggupaṭṭhākā, aggupaṭṭhāyikā, rājā cakkavattī”ti ayaṁ viseso ñāyati.(大人相︰佛陀等大人相之论，一万二千束之量之论，一万六千偈诵份量，佛咒，「具足这些相貌称为佛陀，独觉佛，两大弟子，八十大声闻众，佛父，佛母，首席侍者，转轮王」，这殊胜的系谱。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Te°: {'def': '[Sk. trai°] secondary base of numeral three (fr. ti) in compⁿ: having a relation to a triad of, three-; in numerical cpds. also=three (see under tayo).

--kaṭula containing 3 spices (of yāgu), viz. tila, taṇḍula, mugga Vin.I,210; III,66; --cīvarika wearing three robes (cp. ticīvara) Vin.I,253; Ud.42; Pug.69; Vism.60. --daṇḍika carrying the tripod (see tidaṇḍa), Ep. of a brahmin ascetic A.III,276; J.II,316 (=kuṇḍikaṁ ṭhapanatthāya tidaṇḍaṁ gahetvā caranto); --dhātuka (nt.) the (worlds of the) threefold composition of elements=tiloka Nett 14, 63 (tedhātuke vimutti= sabbadhi vippamutta), 82; cp. Kvu 605; --piṭaka versed in the three piṭakas (see piṭaka), Ep. of theras & bhikkhus J.IV,219; Miln.18 sq.; DhA.I,7, 384; III,385; Dāvs.V,22. Cp. Sk. tripiṭo bhikṣuḥ (AvŚ I.334 & Index to Divy); --bhātika having 3 brothers DhA.I,88, 97. --bhūmaka belonging to the 3 stages of being (viz. the kāma, rūpa, arūpa existences; cp. °dhātuka & tiloka) DhA.I,305; IV,72; DhsA.50, 214 (°kusala), 291; --māsa (nt.) 3 months, i. e. a season M.I,438; Miln.15; DhA.II,192; PvA.20; --vācika pronouncing the threefold formula (of the saraṇa-gata) Vin.I,18; --vijja (adj.) possessed of the 3 fold knowledge (i. e. either the higher knowledge of the Brahmins, i. e. the 3 Vedas [cp. Sk. trayī vidyā=the knowledge of the Vedas] or of the Buddha & Arahants, as defined at A.I,164 sq., viz. (1) remembrance of former births, (2) insight into the (future) destiny of all beings, (3) recognition of the origin of misery & of the way to its removal, i. e. of the Path): 1. brahmanic: D.I,238; A.I,163; also as tevijjaka (n.) D.I,88, 107, 119. -- 2. buddhistic: Vin.II,161; M.I,482; S.I,194; A.I,167 =It.100; Sn.594=VvA.10; Pug.14; DhA.I,138; Sdhp.420. --tevijjatā (abstr.) Vism.5. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Th: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第十七个辅音字母。发音是送气清音的 t, 汉语没有这个辅音, 请参考英语或马来语的发音, 试试送气发汉语的 t。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第十七个辅音字母。发音是送气清音的 t, 汉语没有这个辅音, 请参考英语或马来语的发音, 试试送气发汉语的 t。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thabaka: {'def': '【阳】串。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】串。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thabbha: {'def': 'is to be read for °tthambha in para° J.IV,313. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thaddha: {'def': '[pp. of thambeti, Sk. stabhnāti to make firm, prop, hold up; cp. Av. stawra firm, Gr. a]stemfήs, stafulή; Goth. stafs, Ags. staef=E. staff; Ohg. stab. See also khambha & chambheti] 1. lit. hard, rigid, firm J.I,293 (opp. muduka); Vism.351 (°lakkhaṇa); PvA.139 (=ujjhaṅgala). -- 2. fig. (a) hardened, obdurate, callous, selfish D.I,118 (māna°); III,45 (+atimānin); A.II,26=It.113 (kuha th. lapa); Sn.104 (see gotta°); J.I,88 (māna°) II.136; Sdhp.90. -- (b) slow Miln.103 (opp. lahuka; cp. BSk. dhandha, on which Kern, Toev. II.90). -- See thambha & thūṇa.

--maccharin obdurate & selfish, or very selfish DhA.III,313; VvA.69; PvA.45; --hadaya hard-hearted J.III,68. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】硬的，僵硬，硬结的。 ~maccharī, 【阳】大守财奴。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pp. of thambeti, Sk. stabhnāti to make firm, prop, hold up),【形】硬的，僵硬，硬结的(hard, rigid, firm)。thaddhamaccharī,【阳】大守财奴。athaddha﹐【形】不硬的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thakana: {'def': '(nt.) [see next] covering, lid; closing up DhA.IV,85 (saṁvara+). (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】盖着，盖子。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】盖著，盖子(covering, lid; closing up)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thaketi: {'def': '[Sk. sthagayati, Caus. to sthagati, from *steg to cover; cp. Gr. stέgw cover, tέgh roof; Lat. tego, tegula (E.=tile), toga; Oir. tech house; Ohg. decchu cover, dah roof. On P. form cp. Trenckner, Notes, p. 62] to cover, cover up, close (usually of doors & windows) Vin.II,134 (kaṇṇagūthakehi kaṇṇā thakitā honti: the ears were closed up), 148 (kavaṭā na thakīyanti, Pass.), 209 (vātapāna); IV,54; J.IV,4 (sabbe apihitā dvārā; api-dhā=Gr. e)pi-qh°, cp. Hom. Od. 9, 243: h)li/baton pέtrhn e(pέqhke quρhsin the Cyclops covered the door with a polished rock) V.214; DhA.IV,180 (ṭhakesi, v. l. ṭhapesi); VvA.222; PvA.216 (dvārā) Dāvs.IV,33; V,25 (chiddaṁ mālāguḷena th.). (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(thak + e), 关，关上，覆盖。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 thakita。【现分】 thakenta。【独】 thaketvā。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(thak关+e), 关，关上，覆盖(to cover, cover up, close)。【过】thaketesi。【过分】thakita。【现分】thakenta。【独】thaketvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thala: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Vedic sthala, to sthā, orig. standing place; cp. Gr. stέllw, stoλos; Ags. steall (place); also P. thaṇḍila] dry ground, viz. high, raised (opp. low) or solid, firm (opp. water) S.IV,179. As plateau opp. to ninna (low lying place) at Sn.30 (SnA 42=ukkūla); Dh.98; It.66=S.I,100 (megho thalaṁ ninnañ ca pūreti); PvA.29 (=unnatapadesa). As dry land, terra firma opp. to jala at Dh.34; J.I,107, 222; Pv IV.1²¹; PvA.260. As firm, even ground or safe place at D.I,234; Sn.946. ‹-› Cp. J.III,53; IV,142; Vism.185.

--gocara living on land J.II,159; --ja sprung from land (opp. vārija Dh.34 or udakarūha Vv 35⁶=water-plant); referring to plants A.I,35; J.I,51; Vv 35⁶ (=yodhikādikā VvA.162); Miln.281; --ṭṭha standing on firm ground A.II,241; --patha a road by land (opp. jala° by water) J.I,121; III,188. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】陆地；旱地。 ~gocara, 【形】倚赖土地生活。 ~jā, 【形】从土地长出。 ~ṭṭha, 【形】被置在地上的。 ~patha, 【阳】陆路。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2,【中】剑柄、剑鞘(the haft of a sword, the scabbard)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [prob. dialect. variant of tharu] the haft of a sword, the scabbard J.III,221 (reading uncertain). (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(Vedic sthala, to sthā, orig. standing place),【中】陆地；旱地(dry ground, viz. high, raised or solid, firm (opp. water) As plateau opp. to ninna (low lying place))。thalagocara,【形】生活在陆地(living on land)。thalajā,【形】地上生(sprung from land (opp. vārija or udakarūha =water-plant))。thalaṭṭha,【形】被置在地上的。thalapatha,【阳】陆路(a road by land (opp. jalapatha by water))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thambha: {'def': '[see etym. under thaddha; occasionally spelt thamba, viz. A.I,100; M.I,324; PvA.186, 187] 1. a pillar, a post Vin.I,276; D.I,50 (majjhimaṁ °ṁ nissāya); II,85 (id.); Sn.214; Vv 78² (veḷuriya°, of the pillars of a Vimāna); Pv III,3¹ (id.); DhA.IV,203; VvA.188 (+tulā-gopānasī); PvA.186. -- 2. (fig.) in all meanings of thaddha, applied to selfishness, obduracy, hypocrisy & deceit; viz. immobility, hardness, stupor, obstinacy (cp. Ger. “verstockt”): thambho ti thaddha-bhāvo SnA 288, 333; th. thambhanā thambhittaṁ kakkhaliyaṁ phāruliyaṁ ujucittatā (an°?) amudutā Vbh.350. -- Often comb^d w. māna (=arrogance), freq. in set sāṭheyyaṁ th. sārambho māno, etc. A.I,100, 299=Nd² under rāga=Miln.289; cp. M.I,15. -- A.III,430 (+māna); IV,350, 465 (+sāṭheyya); Sn.245 (+mada), 326, 437 (as one of Māra’s combatants: makkho th. te aṭṭhamo); J.I,202. -- 3. a clump of grass M.I,324; cp. thambhaka. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】栋梁，柱子，草丛，顽固。 ~ka, 【阳】草丛。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】栋梁，柱子，草丛，顽固。thambhaka,【阳】草丛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thambhanā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to thambha] firmness, rigidity, immobility Dhs.636=718; Vbh.350. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thambhati: {'def': '& thambheti, see upa°, paṭi°. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thambhin: {'def': '(adj.) obstinate Th.1, 952. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thambhitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. to thambha]=thambha 2, viz. hardness, rigidity, obduracy, obstinacy Vbh.350. Note. Quite a late development of the term, caused by a misinterpretation of chambhitatta, is “fluctuation, unsteadiness, inflation” at Dhs.965 (in def. of vāyodhātu: chambhittattaṁ [?] thambhitattaṁ. See on this Dhs. trsl. p. 242), & at Vbh.168 (in def. of vicikicchā; v.l. chambhitatta), and at Asl. 338 (of vayo). None of these meanings originally belong to the term thambha. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(abstr. to thambha)﹐刚硬(thambha 2, viz. hardness, rigidity, obduracy, obstinacy)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thamhhaka: {'def': '(=thambha 3) a clump of grass VvA.276 (=gumba). (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thammayut: {'def': '【泰语】法宗派(意为坚持法的僧团)，指的是在1830 年由暹逻王子Mongkut 所建的宗派。Mongkut重视巴利经典的学习，坚持覆盖两肩的僧袍、在家众为出家众服务等。对其它的派系称为Mahanikai(大宗派)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Than: {'def': '(泰语)法师', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Thana: {'def': '【中】女人的胸部，(牛、羊等的)乳房。thanagga,【中】乳头。thanapa,【阳】【中】哺乳，婴儿(infant)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic stana; cp. Gr. sthnion=sth_qos (Hesychius)] 1. the breast of a woman D.II,266; J.V,205; VI,483; Sdhp.360. -- 2. the udder of a cow M.I,343=Pug.56; DhA.II,67.

--mukha the nipple J.IV,37. --sita-dāraka [see sita] a child at the breast, a suckling Miln.364=408. Thanaka, a little breast, the breast of a girl Th.2, 265 (=ThA.212). (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】女人的胸部，（牛、羊等的）乳房。 ~gga, 【中】乳头。 ~pa,【阳】【中】哺乳，婴儿。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thanayati: {'def': '(than吼+aya), 吼，打雷。【过】thanayi。【现分】thanayanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(than + aya), 吼，打雷。【过】 thanayi。【现分】 thanayanta。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thaneti: {'def': '[Vedic stanayati & stanati to thunder; cp. Gr. stέnw, stenάzw to moan, groan, stonos; Lat. tono; Ags. stunian; Ger. stöhnen] to roar, to thunder D.II,262; S.I,100, 154 (megho thanayaṁ), 154 (thaneti devo); It.66 (megho thanayitvā). -- pp. thanita. See also gajjati & thunati. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(than吼+e), 吼，打雷。【过】thanesi。【过分】thanita。【现分】thanenta。【独】thanetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(than + e), 吼，打雷。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 thanita。【现分】 thanenta。【独】 thanetvā。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thanin: {'def': '(adj.) having breasts, --breasted; in timbaru° Sn.110; J.VI,457. -- pucimanda° J.VI,269. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】有乳房(having breasts)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thanita: {'def': '【中】雷电。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】雷电。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of thaneti cp. Vedic (s)tanayitnu thunder=Lat. tonitrus, Ohg. donar, etc.] thundering, thunder J.I,470; Th.1, 1108; Miln.377. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thapati: {'def': '【阳】木匠。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic sthapati, to sthā +pati] 1. a builder, master carpenter M.I,396=S.IV,223; M.III,144, ‹-› 2. officer, overseer S.V,348. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.木匠(a builder, master carpenter)。2.官员(officer, overseer S.V,348.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tharati: {'def': '[Sk. stṛṇoti] only in cpds. ā°, ava°, etc. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tharaṇa: {'def': '(Sk. staraṇa to str),【中】铺设(strewing, spreading. In cpds. like assatharaṇa, bhummatharaṇa, rathatharaṇa, hatthatharaṇa, etc.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. staraṇa to stṛ] strewing, spreading. In cpds. like assa°, bhumma°, ratha°, hattha°, etc. the reading ass-attharaṇa, etc. should be preferred (=ā‹-› stṛ). See attharaṇa and cpds. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tharu: {'def': '【阳】武器的柄或把。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】武器的柄或把。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. tsaru] the hilt or handle of a sword or other weapons, a sword A.III,152; J.III,221 (=sword); Miln.178; DhA.II,249 (°mūla); IV,66 (asi°). -- tharusmiṁ sikkhati to learn the use of a sword Vin.II,10; Miln.66.

--ggaha one who carries a sword-(handle) Miln.331 (dhanuggaha+; not in corresponding list of occupations at D.I,51); --sippā training in swordsmanship Ud.31. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thava: {'def': '【阳】称赞，赞词。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】称赞，赞词。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[see thavati] praise, praising, eulogy Nett 161, 188, 192. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thavati: {'def': '[Sk. stauti, Av. staviti, cp. Gr. steu_tai] to praise, extol; inf. thutuṁ Sn.217 (=thometuṁ SnA 272). ‹-› Caus. thaveti [Sk. stavayati] pp. thavita Miln.361. See thuta, thuti, thoma, thometi. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(thu + a), 称赞，颂杨。【过】 thavi。【过分】 thuta, thavita。【现分】 thavamāna。【独】 thavitvā。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(thu称赞+a), 称赞，颂扬。【过】thavi。【过分】thuta, thavita。【现分】thavamāna。【独】thavitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thavikā: {'def': '【阴】钱包，背包。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [derivation uncertain] a knapsack, bag, purse; esp. used for the carrying of the bhikkhu’s strainer Vin.I,209 (parissāvanāni pi thavikāyo pl pūretvā), 224 (patte+pariss°+th.); J.I,55 (pattaṁ thavikāya pakkhipitvā); VI,67 (pattaṁ thavikāya osāretvā); VvA.40 (patta-thavikato parissāvanaṁ nīharitvā). Also for carrying money: sahassathavikā a purse of 1,000 pieces J.I,54, 195, 506; VvA.33; Anvs 35. See also Vin.II,152, 217; Vism. 91. Thāma (& thāmo nt. in Instr. thāmasā M.I,498; S.II,278= Th.1, 1165; III,110, see below) [Vedic sthāman & sthāmas nt., sthā cp. Gr. stήmwn, Lat. stamen (standing structure); Goth. stoma foundation] “standing power,” power of resistance, steadfastness, strength, firmness, vigour, Instr. thāmena (Miln.4; PvA.193); thāmasā (see above); thāmunā (J.VI,22). Often comb^d with bala J.I,63; Sn.68; with bala+java PvA.4; with bala+ viriya Nd² 289, 651; with java J.I,62; VvA.104; with viriya J.I,67. -- D.III,113; S.I,78; II,28; V,227; A.I,50; II,187 sq.; IV,192. J.I,8, 265 (°sampanna); II,158 (id.); Dhs.13, 22; Vism.233 (°mahatta); DhA.IV,18; PvA.259. -- Instr. used as adv.: thāmena hard, very much PvA.193; thāmasā obstinately, perseveringly M.I,257.

--gatadiṭṭhika (adj.) one in whom heresy has become strong J.I,83=VI,220. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】钱包，背包。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thañña: {'def': '【中】母奶(mother’s milk)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】母奶。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [see thana] mother’s milk Vin.II,255=289 (°ṁ pāyeti); A.IV,276; J.III,165; VI,3 (madhura°) Th.2, 496. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thaṇḍila: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic sthaṇḍila a levelled piece of ground prepared for a sacrifice. Cognate with sthala, level ground] bare, esp. hard, stony ground Pv IV.7⁵ (=kharakaṭhāna bhūmippadesa PvA.265).

--sāyikā (f.) the act of lying on the bare ground (as a penance) [BSk. sthaṇḍila-śāyikā] S.IV,118; Dh.141 (=DhA.III,77: bhūmisayana); --seyyā (f.) a bed on bare ground D.I,167≈(v. l. BB. taṇḍila°) Miln.351; cp. Sk. sthaṇḍilaśayyā. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】多石的硬地，土墩(bare, esp. hard, stony ground)。thaṇḍilasāyikā, thaṇḍilaseyyā,【阴】躺在地上。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】多石的硬地，土墩。 ~sāyikā, ~seyyā, 【阴】躺在地上。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thena: {'def': 'thenaka,【阳】小偷，贼。thenī,【阴】女小偷，女贼。athenī,【形】不偷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'thenaka, 【阳】小偷，贼。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic stena & stāyu, besides which tāyu, the latter prob. original, cp. Gr. tu_tάw to deprive; Oir. tāid thief, to a root meaning “conceal”] a thief adj. stealing: athenena not stealing, not stealthily, openly D.I,4; DA.I,72. f. athenī A.III,38. Cp. kumbhatthena Vin.II,256 (see k.). (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thenaka: {'def': '[=prec.] a thief J.VI,115. (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thenana: {'def': '【中】窃盗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】窃盗。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Theneti: {'def': '[denom. fr. thena] to steal, to conceal J.IV,114; DhA.I,80. (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(then + e), 偷。【过】 thenesi。【过分】 thenita。【现分】 thenenta。【独】 thenentvā。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(then偷+e), 偷。【过】thenesi。【过分】thenita。【现分】thenenta。【独】thenentvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thera: {'def': '【阳】上座，长老，长者，有十个戒腊以上的比丘。【形】老，年长者。Theragāthā,【阴】《长老偈》。Theravāda(梵sthāvira他鞞罗),【阳】长老的教义，南传佛教，上座部，长老说佛教。therā bhikkhū,长老比丘，上弟子。 majjhimā bhikkhū, navā bhikkhū,中腊比丘、年少比丘(中、下弟子)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic sthavira. Derivation uncertain. It may come from sthā in sense of standing over, lasting (one year or more), cp. thāvara old age, then “old=venerable”; (in meaning to be compared w. Lat. senior, etc. from num. sem “one”=one year old, i. e. lasting over one and many more years). Cp. also vetus=Gr. e]/tos, year, E. wether, one year old ram, as cpd. w. veteran, old man. Or it may come from sthā in der. *stheǔā in sthūra (sthūla: see etym. under thūla) thus, “strong= venerable”] t.t. only used with ref. to the bhikkhus of Gotama Buddha’s community. -- (a) (adj.) senior, Vin.I,47, 290 (th. bhikkhū opp. navā bh.), 159 (th. bhikkhu a senior bh. opp. to navaka bh. a novice), 187; II,16, 212. Therânutherā bhikkhū seniors & those next to them in age dating not from birth, but from admission to the Order). Three grades are distinguished, thera bh., majjhima bh., nava bh., at D.I,78. -- See also A.II,23, 147, 168; V,201, 348; D.III,123 sq., 218; Dh.260, 261. In Saṅgha-thera, used of Bhikkhus not senior in the Order, the word thera means distinguished. Vin.II,212, 303. In Mahāthera the meaning, as applied to the 80 bhikkhus so called, must also have some similar meaning Dīpv IV.5 Psalms of the Brethren xxxvi.; J.V,456. At A.II,22 it is said that a bhikkhu, however junior, may be called thera on account of his wisdom. It is added that four characteristics make a man a thera --high character, knowing the essential doctrines by heart, practising the four Jhānas, and being conscious of having attained freedom through the destruction of the mental intoxications. It is already clear that at a very early date, before the Aṅguttara reached its extant shape, a secondary meaning of thera was tending to supplant that of senior-that is, not the senior of the whole Order, but the senior of such a part of the Saṅgha as live in the same locality, or are carrying out the same function. -- Note. thera in thero vassiko at S.IV,161 is to be read tero-vassiko.

--gāthā hymns of senior bhikkhus, N. of a canonical book, incorporated in the Khuddaka-Nikāya. Theratara, very senior, opp^d to navatara, novice D.II,154. --vāda the doctrine of the Theras, the original Buddhist doctrine M.I,164; Dpvs.IV,6, 13. (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '长老', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '〔长老，〕戒腊十年以上的比丘。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Thera-gāthā: {'def': 'f. 長老偈 [小部經之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'f. 長老偈 [小部経の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Theraka: {'def': '(adj.) strong (?), of clothes: therakāni vatthāni D.II,354 (vv. ll. thevakāni, dhorakāni, corakāni). (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Theravāda: {'def': 'm. 上座部, 上座說. Theravādin m. 上座師.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': "This term was already used by the Buddha himself in speaking of the doctrine of Ālāra-kālāma (s. M. 26). As a name for the Buddha's doctrine it belongs to the commentarial literature.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': "is the only one of the old schools of Buddhism that has survived among those which Mahāyānists have called 'Hinayāna'. It is sometimes called Southern Buddhism or Pāḷi Buddhism. It is found today in Sri Lanka, Burma, Thailand, Cambodia, Laos and Chittagong (East Bengal. ) - Cf. Guide, p. 60. - (App.). thīna-middha: 'sloth and torpor', constitute the 3rd of the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇa, q.v.). They may or may not, be associated with greedy consciousness (s. Tab. 23. 25, 27, 29 and II).", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '上座部佛教。thera，意为长老、上座；vāda，意为说、论、学说。
上座部佛教因其由印度本土向南传播到斯里兰卡、缅甸等地，故称为“南传佛教”。又因所传诵的三藏经典使用巴利语（pāḷi-bhāsā），故又称为“巴利语系佛教”。
南传上座部佛教坚持维护佛陀的原本教法，只相信和崇敬佛、法、僧三宝，传诵与尊奉巴利语律、经、论三藏，依照八圣道、戒定慧、四念处等方法禅修，大多数人致力于断除烦恼、解脱生死、证悟涅槃。
传统上，南传上座部佛教流传于斯里兰卡、缅甸、泰国、柬埔寨、老挝等南亚、东南亚国家和地区。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '上座部', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': 'm. 上座部, 上座説. Theravādin m. 上座師.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': "'Doctrine of the Elders', is a name of the oldest form of the Buddha's teachings, handed down to us in the Pāḷi language. According to tradition, its name is derived from the fact of having been fixed by 500 holy Elders of the Order, soon after the death of the Master.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Theravādin: {'def': 'm. 上座師', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Therī: {'def': '【阴】上座尼，长老尼，老女人。Therigāthā,【阴】《长老尼偈》。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】上座尼，长老尼，老女人。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Therikā (f.) [see thera] 1. an old woman (cp. sthavirikā M Vastu III,283) Pv.II,11⁶ (=thāvarijiṇṇā PvA.149). -- 2. a female thera (see cpds.), as therikā at Th.2, 1; Dpvs xviii. 11.

--gāthā hymns of the therīs, following on the Theragāthā (q. v.). (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Therī -gāthā: {'def': 'f. 長老尼偈 [小部経の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Therī-gāthā: {'def': 'f. 長老尼偈 [小部經之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Theta: {'def': '【形】可靠的，可信赖的。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】可靠的，可信赖的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. from tiṭṭhita, Müller P. Gr. 7=sthātṛ] firm, reliable, trustworthy, true D.I,4 (DA.I,73: theto ti thiro; ṭhita-katho ti attho); M.I,179; S.IV,384; A.II,209=Pug.57; Nd² 623. -- Abl. thetato in truth S.III,112. -- attheta J.IV,57 (=athira). (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Theva: {'def': '【阳】滴，点滴。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】滴，点滴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m.?) [see etym. under thīna, with which cp. in meaning from same root Gr. stoibή & Lat. stīria, both= drop. Cp. also thika. Not with Trenckner (Notes p. 70) fr. stip] a drop; stagnant water. In Vin. only in phrase: cīvaraṁ . . . na acchinne theve pakkamitabbaṁ Vin.I,50, 53=II.227, 230; J.VI,530 (madhu-ttheva a drop of honey). (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thevati: {'def': '[fr. theva; orig. “to be congealed or thick”] to shine, glitter, shimmer (like a drop) J.VI,529 (=virocati p. 530). (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Theyya: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic steya] theft Vin.I,96; A.I,129; Sn.119 (theyyā adinnaṁ ādiyati); 242, 967 (°ṁ na kareyya); Vv 15⁸ (: theyyaṁ vuccati thenabhāvo VvA.72); Miln.264, 265; Vism.43 (°paribhoga); DA.I,71; Sdhp.55, 61.

--citta intending to steal Vin.III,58; --saṁvāsaka one who lives clandestinely with the bhikkhus (always foll. by titthiyapakkantaka) Vin.I,86, 135, 168, 320; V,222; Miln.310; --saṅkhātaṁ (adv.) by means of theft, stealthily D.III,65 sq., 133; A.III,209; IV,370 sq.; V,264. (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】窃盗。 ~citta, 【中】盗心，贼意。【形】有心要偷的。~saŋvāsaka, 【形】秘密地居住（在比丘之中的）人。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】窃盗。theyyacitta,【中】盗心，贼意。【形】有心要偷的。theyyasaṁvāsaka,【形】贼住者(假冒比丘)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thika: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. styāyate to congeal, form a (solid) mass; see cognates under thīna & cp. theva] dropping, forming drops: madhutthika J.III,493; VI,529 (=madhuṁ paggharantiyo madhutthevasadisā p. 530) “dropping honey.” (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thira: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic sthira, hard, solid; from sthā or Idg. ster (der. of stā) to stand out=to be stiff; cp. Gr. stereόs; Lat. sterilis (sterile=hardened, cp. Sk. starī); Ohg. storrēn, Nhg. starr & starren, E. stare; also Lat. strenuus] solid, hard, firm; strenuous, powerful J.I,220; IV,106 (=daḷha); Miln.194 (thir-âthira-bhāva strength or weakness); VvA.212 (id.), 35 (=thāmavant); Sdhp.321. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】牢固的，固体的，耐久的。 ~tara, 【形】更牢固的，更固体的，更耐久的。 ~tā, 【阴】坚固，不动性。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】牢固的，固体的，耐久的。thiratara,【形】更牢固的，更固体的，更耐久的。thiratā,【阴】坚固，不动性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thiratā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. thira] steadfastness, stability DhA.IV,176 (thiratāya thavarā; so read for ṭhira°). (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thiṇṇa: {'def': 'pp. of tharati, only in cpds. parivi°, vi°. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thoka: {'def': '(adj.) [for etymology see under thīna] little, small, short, insignificant; nt. a trifle. A.IV,10; J.VI,366; PvA.12 (kāla): nt. thokaṁ as adv.=a little J.I,220; II,103, 159; V,198; PvA.13, 38, 43. -- thokaṁ thokaṁ a little each time, gradually, little by little Dh.121, 239; Miln.9; SnA 18; PvA.168. (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'thoka,【形】小的，一点点的，一些的。thokathokaṁ,【副】渐渐地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'thoka, 【形】小的，一点点的，一些的。 ~thokaŋ, 【副】渐渐地。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thokaka: {'def': '(adj.)=thoka; fem. thokikā Dh.310. (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thoma: {'def': '[Vedic stoma a hymn of praise] praise. (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thomana: {'def': '(nt.) & thomanā (f.) [see thavati] praising, praise, laudation J.I,220 (=pasaṁsa); Pug.53; PvA.27. (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】thomanā,【阴】称赞。参考 thuti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 thomanā, 【阴】参考 thuti。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thometi: {'def': '[denom. fr. thoma; cp. thavati] to praise, extol, celebrate (often with vaṇṇeti) D.I,240; Sn.679, 1046; Nd² 291; J.VI,337; SnA 272 (=thutuṁ); VvA.102; PvA.196. -- pp. thomita J.I,9. (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(thom称赞+e), 称赞，颂扬。【过】thomesi。【过分】thomita。【现分】thomenta, thomayamāna。【独】thometvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(thom + e), 称赞，颂杨。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 thomita。【现分】thomenta, thomayamāna。【独】 thometvā。(p151)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thulla: {'def': '【形】庞大的，肥的，严重的，总的。 ~ccaya, 【阳】严重的罪过。~kumārī, 【阴】胖女孩，（长大）未婚的女人。 ~phusitaka, 【形】有大下降的（雨）。 ~sarīra, 【形】肥胖的。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】庞大的，肥的，严重的，总的。thullaccaya,【阳】严重的罪过。thullakumārī,【阴】胖女孩，老处女。thullaphusitaka,【形】有大下降的(雨)。thullavajja，偷兰遮，偷罗遮，偷罗柘。thullasarīra,【形】肥胖的身体。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see thūla. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thullanandā: {'def': '（比库尼名）土喇难达，（古音译：）偷兰难陀', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Thunati: {'def': '[see thaneti] 1. to moan, groan, roar S.V,148 (thunaṁ ppr.; v. l. thanaṁ); Vv 52¹ (of beings in Niraya, otherwise ghosenti), v.l.SS thananti (better?). ‹-› 2. to proclaim; shout, praise (confused with thavati) Sn.884. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thunāti: {'def': '(thu称赞+nā), 呻吟，称赞。【过】thuni。【现分】thunanta, thunamāna。【独】tyunttvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(thu + nā), 呻吟。【过】 thuni。【现分】 thunanta, thunamāna。【独】tyunttvā。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thusa: {'def': '【阳】糠，谷壳。 ~ggi, 【阳】谷壳火。 ~pacchi, 【阴】收谷壳的篮子。 ~sodaka, 【中】一种醋。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】糠，谷壳。thusaggi,【阳】谷壳火。thusapacchi,【阴】收谷壳的篮子。thusasodaka,【中】一种醋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic tuṣa (m.)] husk of grain, chaff A.I,242 (together w. other qualities of corn); J.IV,8; Vism.346.‹-› athusa D.III,199.

--aggi a fire of husks Nett 23; --odaka gruel (=sabbasambhārehi kataṁ sovīrakaṁ Pug.A 232) D.I,166= A.I,295=Pug.55; --pacchi a bird stuffed with chaff, a straw-bird J.I,242; --piṇḍa a lump of husks Vin.II,151; --rāsi a heap of h. DhA.I,309; --homa an oblation of h. D.I,9 (=DA.I,93; v. l. BB kana, for kaṇa; cp. kaṇahoma D.I,9). (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thuta: {'def': '[cp. pp. of thavati] praised DhsA.198; J.IV,101 (sada°=sadā thuto niccapasattho); Miln.278 (vaṇṇita th. pasattha). (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thuti: {'def': '(f.) [cp. thavati] praise J.IV,443 (thutiṁ karoti); VvA.158. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】称赞。thutipāṭhaka,【阳】致颂词者，吟游诗人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】称赞。 ~pāṭhaka, 【阳】致颂词者，吟游诗人。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thāla: {'def': '(nt.) [from thala orig. a flat dish] a plate, dish, vessel D.I,74; J.I,69; Miln.282. Kaṁsa° a gong Miln.62; Vism.283 (in simile). See also thālī. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】 thāli, 【阴】碟子，盘子。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】thāli,【阴】碟子，盘子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thālaka: {'def': '【中】 thālikā, 【阴】小碗，大口杯。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】thālikā,【阴】小碗，大口杯。pānīyathālaka,【中】水碗，茶杯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [thāla+ka] a small bowl, beaker Pv.II,1⁸ (thālakassa pānīyaṁ), 1¹⁹ (id.); Nett 79 (for holding oil: dīpakapallika Com.). (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thālikā: {'def': '(f.)=thālakaVin.I,203, 240. See āḷhaka°. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thālipāka: {'def': '【阳】一锅饭。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】一锅饭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thālī: {'def': '(f.) (thāli° in cpds.) [Sk. sthālī, cp. thāla] an earthen pot, kettle, large dish; in --dhovana washing of the dish A.I,161 (+sarāva-dhovana); --pāka an offering of barley or rice cooked in milk Vin.III,15; D.I,97 (=DA.I,267); S.II,242; V,384; A.I,166; J.I,186; Miln.249. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thāma: {'def': '【阳】力量，活力，能力。thāmavantu,【形】强壮的，有力的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】力量，能力，活力。 ~vantu, 【形】强壮的，有力的。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thāmaka: {'def': '(adj.) having strength Sn.1144 (dubbala° with failing strength); Nd¹ 12 (appa°+dubbala). (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thāmavant: {'def': '(adj.) [thāma+vant] strong, steadfast, powerful, persevering S.V,197, 225; A.II,250; IV,110, 234, 291; V,24; Nd² 131; Vv 5¹ (=thira balavā VvA.35). (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thāra: {'def': 'see vi°, san°. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thāsotu°: {'def': 'in thāsotujana savana at ThA.61 according t Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 81 it is to be read ṭhānaso tu jana°. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thāvara: {'def': '² (nt.) [from thavira=thera, old] old age PvA.149 (thāvari-jiṇṇa in expl. of therī, otherwise jarā-jiṇṇa. Should we read thāvira-jiṇṇa?). (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】固定的，持久的。thāvariya,【中】不动性，坚固，固体性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】固定的，持久的。 ~riya, 【中】不动性，坚固，固体性。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [Vedic sthāvara, from sthā, cp. sthavira, Gr. staurόs post, Lat. re-stauro, Goth. stana judgment & stojan to judge] “standing still,” immovable (opp. to tasa) firm, strong (Ep. of an Arahant: KhA 245) DhA.IV,176. Always in connection with tasa, contrasting or comprising the movable creation (animal world) & the immovable (vegetable world), e. g. Sn.394 (“sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṁ ye thāvarā ye ca tasanti loke”); It.32 (tasaṁ vā thāvaraṁ vā). See tasa for ref. (Page 308)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thāvareyya: {'def': '(nt.) [from thāvara²] the rank of a Thera. A.I,38; II,23. This has nothing to do with seniority. It is quite clear from the context that Thera is to be taken here in the secondary sense explained under Thera. He was a bhikkhu so eminently useful to the community that his fellow bhikkhus called him Thera. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thāvariya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. thāvara] immobility, firmness, security, solidity, an undisturbed state; always in janapada° an appeased country, as one of the blessings of the reign of a Cakkavattin. Expl^d at DA.I,250 as “janapadesu dhuvabhāvaṁ thāvarabhāvaṁ vā patto na sakkā kenaci cāletuṁ.” D.I,88; II,16, 146, 169; S.I,100; Sn.p. 106; It.15. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thī: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic strī, on which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under sero. This form thī is the normal correspondent to Vedic strī; the other, more usual (& dial.) form is itthi] a woman J.I,295, 300; V,296 (thī-pura), 397; VI,238. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】女人。thīraja,【阳】【中】月经来潮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】女人。 ~raja, 【阳、中】月经来潮。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thīna: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. styāna; orig. pp. of styāyate to become hard, to congeal; steịā (cp. also thira)=Gr. stέas grease, tale; Lat. stīpo to compress; also Sk. stimita (motionless)=P. timi; stīma (slow), Mhg. stīm; Goth. etc. stains=E. stone; Gr. stίfos (heap); Lat. stīpes (pale); Ohg. stīf=E. stiff] stiffness, obduracy, stolidity, indifference (cp. thaddha & tandī, closely related in meaning). Together with middha it is one of the 5 hindrances (nīvaraṇāni) to Arahantship (see below). Def. as cittassa akammaññatā, unwieldiness or impliability of mind (=immobility) at Nd² 290=Dhs.1156, 1236=Nett 86; as citta-gelaññaṁ morbid state of mind (“psychosis”) at DA.I,211. -- Sn.942 (niddaṁ tandiṁ sahe thīnaṁ pamādena na saṁvase), 1106; Vbh.352 (=Nd² 290 as explⁿ of līnatta); Vism.262 (°sineha, where p. 361 reads patthinna°).

--middha sloth & drowsiness, stolidity & torpor; two of the 5 nīvaraṇāni (Dhs. trsl. pp. 120, 310) Vin.II,200 (vigata°); D.I,71, 246; III,49, 234, 269, 278; S.I,99; III,106; V,277 sq.; A.III,69 sq.; 421; Sn.437 (pañcamī senā Mārassa); It.27, 120; Ps. I.31, 45, 162; II,12, 169, 179, 228; Pug.68; Dhs.1154, 1486; Vism.469; Sdhp.459. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Thina, Thena, Thāna,(‹the缩；梵styāna),【中】惛沉(昏沉)，沉滞。《法集论》Dhammasaṅgaṇī #1162(PTS:1159)(CS:p.233)：Tattha katamaṁ thinaṁ? Yā cittassa 1akallatā 2akammaññatā 3olīyanā 4sallīyanā 5līnaṁ 6īyanā 7līyitattaṁ 8thinaṁ 9thiyanā thiyitattaṁ cittassa--idaṁ vuccati thinaṁ.(什么是‘昏沉’？那个心是1不聪明的、2不适合工作、3偷懒、4迟钝、5萎缩、6萎靡、7昏沉、8昏昧、9昏迷，称为昏沉。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】显得不灵巧的性质或状态，心不易弯曲的状态。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thīyanā: {'def': '(f.) & thīyitatta (nt.) [abstr. formations from thīna]=thīna, in exegesis at Nd² 290≈(see thīna); Vbh.352. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thīyati: {'def': 'see patiṭṭhīyati. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thūla: {'def': '(a) & Thulla (b) (the latter usual in cpds.) (adj.) [Vedic sthūla (or sthūra); cp. Lith. storas (thick); Lat. taurus, Goth. stiur, Ags. steor (bull=strong, bulky); Ohg. stūri (strong). From sthā: see thīna, cp. thūṇā. To ūl: ull cp. cūḷa: culla] compact, massive; coarse, gross; big, strong, clumsy; common, low, unrefined, rough D.I,223; Sn.146 (aṇuka°), 633 (id.); Dh.31, 265, 409; J.I,196 (b); Dhs.617; KhA 246; PvA.73, 74 (of a cloak); VvA.103; Sdhp.101, 346. -- thullāni gajjati to speak rough words J.I,226 (=pharusavacanāni vadati).

--aṅga (adj.) heavy-limbed J.I,420; --accaya a grave offence Vin.I,133, 167, 216; II,110, 170 etc.; Vism.22. --kacchā thick scurf Vin.I,202; --kumārī (Vin. V.129) & kumārikā a stout, fat girl J.III,147; IV,220 (Com. pañcakāmaguṇika-rāgena thūlatāya thullak° ti vuccati); Vism.17. --phusitaka (deva) (the rain-god, probably with reference to the big drops of the rain cp. DA.I,45) S.III,141; V,396; A.I,243; II,140 (a); V,114 sq.; DhA.III,243; --vajja a grave sin Vin.II,87 (a); M.II,250; --vattha a coarse garment J.V,383; --sarīra (adj.) fat, corpulent J.I,420; IV,220 (opp. kisa thin); --sāṭaka coarse cloth DhA.I,393 (a). (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】总的，粗糙的，胖的，庞大的。thūlatā,【阴】粗糙。thūlasāṭaka,【阳】粗布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】总的，粗糙的，胖的，庞大的。 ~tā, 【阴】粗糙。 ~sāṭaka, 【阳】粗布。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Thūlatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. to thūla] coarseness, roughness, vileness J.IV,220. (Page 310)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thūpa: {'def': '【阳】佛塔，宝塔，石堆纪念碑，竖立在埋葬圣者骨灰处的纪念碑。~pāraha, 【形】应该为怹建宝塔来尊敬者。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '塔婆;塔;佛塔(PS: jhāpeti荼毗;闍毗;闍维;耶维;耶旬--火葬也)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '[Vedic stūpa, crown of the head, top, gable; cp. Gr. stu/pos (handle, stalk). Oicel. stūfr (stump), to *steud as in tudati] a stupa or tope, a bell-shaped pile of earth, a mound, tumulus, cairn; dome, esp. a monument erected over the ashes of an Arahant (otherwise called dhātugabbha=dāgaba), or on spots consecrated as scenes of his acts. In general as tomb: Vin.IV,308; J.III,156 (mattika°)=Pv.I,8⁴; in special as tope: D.II,142, 161, 164 sq.; A.I,77; M.II,244; J.V,39 (rajata°); VvA.156 (Kassapassa bhagavato dvādasayojanikaṁ kanaka°); Ud.8; Pv III,10⁵. Four people are thūpârahā, worthy of a tope, viz. a Tathāgata, a Tathāgatasāvaka, a Paccekabuddha, a Cakkavattin D.II,143= A.II,245. -- At Dpvs VI,65 th. is to be corrected into dhūpaṁ. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】佛塔，宝塔，石堆纪念碑，竖立在埋葬圣者骨灰处的纪念碑，顶端。thūpāraha,【形】应该为怹建宝塔来尊敬者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thūpa-vaṃsa: {'def': 'm. 舍利塔史.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. 舎利塔史.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Thūpika: {'def': '(adj.) [from thūpa. The ika applies to the whole compound] having domed roofs (“house-tops”) J.VI,116 (of a Vimāna=dvādasayojanika maṇimayakañcanathūpika; cp. p. 117: pañcaṭhūpaṁ vimānaṁ, expl^d as pañcahi kūṭāgārehi samannāgataṁ). (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thūpikata: {'def': '【形】为了要有尖的顶端而堆积的。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】为了要有尖的顶端而堆积的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [thūpa+kata] “made a heap,” heaped of an alms-bowl: so full that its contents bulge out over the top Vin.IV,191. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thūpikā: {'def': '【阴】高峰，尖塔。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】高峰，尖塔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thūṇa: {'def': '【阳】 ~ṇā, 【阴】献祭的柱。(p150)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】thūṇā,【阴】献祭的柱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Thūṇira: {'def': '[der. fr. thūṇā] house-top, gable Th.1, 184 (=kanṇikā Com.). (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Thūṇā: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic sthūṇā from sthā, standing fast, as in thambha, thīna, etc. Nearest relation is thāvara (=thūrā, on r: ṇ=l (thūla): n see tūṇī). Cp. Gr. staurόs (post); Lat. restauro (to prop up again); Gr. stu_los pillar, “style”; Goth. stojan etc. (see thāvara); Ags. styran=E. steer, Ger. steuer] a pillar, prop, support A.II,198; Vv 54¹ (=thambha VvA.245); DA.I,124. Esp. the sacrificial post in phrase thūṇûpanīta “lead to sacrifice” (yūpa-saṅkhātuṁ thūṇaṁ upa° DA.I,294): D.I,127≈S.I,76≈DhA.II,7; J.III,45. kumbhathūṇā a sort of drum D.I,6 etc. (see kumbha, where also kumbha --thūṇika Vin.IV,285). -- eka-thūṇaka with one support J.IV,79. (Page 309)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ti: {'def': '【形】三（所有词性的复数词尾变化构型）。 ~kaṭuka, 【中】三种调味品。 ~kkhattuŋ, 【副】三次。 ~gāvuta, 【形】三伽浮他 (gāvuta) 的长度。 ~cīvara, 三袈裟（即：外袈裟 saṅghāṭi、上袈裟 uttarāsaṅga、下袈裟 antaravāsaka）。 ~piṭaka, 【中】三藏（佛教经典）。 ~peṭaka, ~peṭakī,【形】三藏师。 ~yāma, 【阴】夜晚。 ~yojana, 【中】三由旬（距离）。【形】三由旬的长度。 ~liṅgika, 【形】属于 3 种性别的（尤指语法词性：阳、阴、中性）。 ~loka, 【阳】三界（欲界、色界、无色界）。 ~vagga,【形】三品。 ~vaṅgika,【形】有三个成份。 ~vassika, 【形】三岁。 ~vidha,【形】三倍的。(p145)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】三(所有词性的复数词尾变化构型)。tikaṭuka,【中】三种调味品。tikkhattuṁ,【副】三次。tigāvuta,【形】三伽浮他 (gāvuta) 的长度。ticīvara, 三袈裟(即：僧伽梨 saṅghāṭi、上衣 uttarāsaṅga、下衣antaravāsaka)。tipiṭaka,【中】三藏(佛教经典)。tipeṭaka, tipeṭakī,【形】三藏师。tiyāma,【阴】夜晚。tiyojana,【中】三由旬(距离)。【形】三由旬的长度。tiliṅgika,【形】属於三种性别的(尤指语法词性：阳)【阴】【中性】。tiloka,【阳】三界(欲界、色界、无色界)。tivagga,【形】三品。tivaṅgika,【形】有三个成份。tivassika,【形】三岁。tividha,【形】三倍的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [cp. Sk. iti] the apostrophe form of iti, thus. See iti. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ti-lakkhaṇa: {'def': '三法印', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Tibba: {'def': '(adj.) probably a contamination of two roots of different meaning; viz. tij & tim (of tamas) or=stim to be motionless, cp. styā under thīna] 1. sharp, keen, eager: tibbagārava very devout A.II,21; Nett 112 (cp. tīvraprasāda AvŚ I.130); t.-cchanda D.III,252, 283. ‹-› 2. dense, thick; confused, dark, dim: t.-rāga Dh.349 (=bahalarāga DhA.IV,68); A.II,149; tibbo vanasaṇḍo avijjāya adhivacanaṁ S.III,109; tibbasārāga (kāmesu) S.III,93=It.90; A.II,30; tibbo manussaloko (dark, dense) Miln.7; °andhakāra dense darkness Vism.500 sq.; °kilesu deep blemish (of character) Vism.87. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tibbarāga: {'def': '【阳】爱欲重者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ticīvara: {'def': '【中】三衣，三袈裟，即：僧伽梨(saṅghāṭi，五条衣至二十五条或更多的布片缝制而成)、上衣(uttarāsaṅga)、下衣(antaravāsaka)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tidasa: {'def': '(num.) [Vedic tridaśa] thirty (cp. tiṁsa), esp. the thirty deities (pl.) or belonging to them (adj.). It is the round figure for 33, and is used as equivalent to tāvatiṁsa. Nandanaṁ rammaṁ tidasānaṁ mahāvanaṁ Pv III,1¹⁹=Vv 18¹³; devā tidasā sahindakā Vv 30¹; Sdhp.420.

--âdhipati the Lord of the 30 (viz. Sakka) Vv 47⁸; --inda ruler of the 30 Sdhp.411, 478; --gaṇa the company of the 30 Sn.679 (Com. tettiṁsa); Vv 41⁶; --gatin going to the 30 (as one of the gatis) Vv 35¹² (=tidasabhavanaṁ gata Tāvatiṁsadevanikāyaṁ uppanna VvA.164); --pura the city of the 30, i. e. Heaven Miln.291; --bhavana the state of the 30, i. e. heavenly existence VvA.164 (=Tāvatiṁsabhavana). (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic tridawa),【阳】三十(在【合】中的词形：tiṁsa, 尤指：三十天神，全数是三十三天神)。tidasapura,【中】三十天神的城市。tidasasinda,【阳】三十天神王(即：帝释天王)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】三十（在【合】中的词形： tiŋsa, 尤指：三十天神，全数是三十三天神）。 ~pura, 【中】三十天神的城市。 ~sinda, 【阳】三十天神王（即：帝释天王）。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tidaṇḍa: {'def': '【中】（放置东西的）三脚架。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】(放置东西的)三脚架。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tidhā: {'def': '【副】三方式。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [ti+dhā] in three ways or parts, threefold Miln.282 (-pabhinna nāgarājā). (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】三方式。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tidiva: {'def': '【阳】天堂，天神的居所。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】天堂，天神的居所。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tika: {'def': '【中】三个一组。【形】三数的。(p145)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】三个一组。【形】三数的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [Vedic trika] consisting of 3, a triad S.II, 218 (t.-bhojana); DhA.IV,89 (-nipāta, the book of the triads, a division of the Jātaka), 108 (t.-catukka-jhāna the 3 & the 4 jhānas); Miln.12 (tika-duka-paṭimaṇḍitā dhammasaṅganī); Vism.13 sq.; DhsA.39 (-duka triad & pair). (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tikhiṇa: {'def': '【形】锐利的，尖的，苦痛的，苦味的。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】锐利的，尖的，苦痛的，苦味的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic tīkṣṇa of which t. is the diæretic form, whereas the contracted forms are tiṇha (q. v.) & tikkha. Cp. also Sk. tikta pp. of tij, tejate. From *steg in Gr. sti/zw “stitch” & stiktόs, Lat. instīgo, Ohg. stehhan, Ger. stecken, E. stick] pointed, sharp, pungent, acrid; fig. “sharp,” clever, cunning, acute (in this meaning only in contr. form tikkha) J.V,264; DhA.II,9; IV,13; PvA.152, 221 (=tippa). (ati-) tikhinatā Miln.278. See also tippa & tibba & cp. tejo. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tikicchaka: {'def': '【阳】医师。(p145)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】医师。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. tikicchati] a physician, a doctor A.V,219; J.I,4 (adj. & vejja); IV,361; PvA.233. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tikicchati: {'def': '(kit + cha, ki 重叠，而前 k 被改成 t), 治疗，医治。【过】 ~chi。【过分】 ~chita。【现分】 ~chanta。【独】 tikicchitvā。(p145)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[also cikicchati=Sk. cikitsati. Desid. of cit, to aim at, think upon, in pregnant sense of endeavouring to heal] to treat medically, to cure Vin.I,276; S.I,222; Miln.172, 272, 302. Caus. tikicchāpeti J.I,4. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kit+cha, ki 重叠，而前 k 被改成 t), 治疗，医治。【过】tikicchi。【过分】tikicchita。【现分】tikicchanta。【独】tikicchitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tikicchā: {'def': '【阴】医术，医学。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [from last] the art of healing, practice of medicine D.I,10 (dāraka° infant healing); Sn.927 (°ṁ māmako na seveyya). -- See also tekiccha. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】医术，医学。(p145)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tikkaṁ: {'def': 'at J.V,291 in “yāva majjhantikā tikkam āgami yeva” is to be read as “yāva majjhantik’âtikkamm’‹-› âgami yeva.” (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tikkha: {'def': '【形】锐利的，敏锐的，下决定得快的。tikkhapañña,【形】锐慧(有锐利的智力)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [=tikhiṇa] sharp, clever, acute, quick (only fig. of the mind), in tikkh-indriya (opp. mud-indriya) Nd² 235^3P=Ps.I,121=II.195; & tikkha-paññatā A.I,45. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】锐利的，敏锐的，下决定得快的。 ~pañña, 【形】锐慧（有锐利的智力）。(p145)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tikkhattuṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [Sk. trikṛtvaḥ] three times (cp. tayo II. C 2), esp. in phrase vanditvā t. padakkhiṇaṁ katvā “having performed the reverent parting salutation 3 times” VvA.173, 219; t. sāvesi he announced it 3 times J.II,352; DhA.II,4; t. paggaṇhāpesi offered 3 times PvA.74. See also J.IV,267; V,382; VI,71; DhA.II,5, 42, 65, 338; IV,122 & passim. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tila: {'def': '(m. nt.) [Vedic tila m.] the sesame plant & its seed (usually the latter, out of which oil is prepared: see tela), Sesamum Indicum. Often comb^d with taṇḍula, e. g. A.I,130=Pug.32; J.I,67; III,53. -- Vin.I,212 (navātilā); A.IV,108; Sn.p. 126; J.I,392; II,352; Vism.489 (ucchu°); DhA.I,79; PvA.47 (tilāni pīḷetvā telavaṇijjaṁ karoti).

--odana rice with sesame J.III,425; --kakka sesame paste Vin.I,205; --tela ses. oil VvA.54 (°ṁ pātukāma); DhA.III,29; Bdhd 105; --piññāka tila seed-cake, oilcake VvA.142; --piṭṭha sesamum-grinding, crushed s. seed Vin.IV,341. --muṭṭhi a handful of ses. J.II,278; --rāsi a heap of t. seeds VvA.54; --vāha a cartload of t. seeds A.V,173=Sn.p. 126; --saṅgulikā a ses. cake DhA.II,75. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】芝麻种子。 ~kakka 【中】芝麻浆。 ~piṭṭha, ~piññāka, 【中】碾芝麻。 ~muṭṭhi, 【阳】一把芝麻。 ~vāha, 【阳】一满车芝麻。~saṅgulikā, 【阴】芝麻糕。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】芝麻子。tilakakka,【中】芝麻浆。tilapiṭṭha, tilapiññāka,【中】芝麻滓，芝麻酱。tilamuṭṭhi,【阳】一把芝麻。tilavāha,【阳】一满车芝麻。tilasaṅgulikā,【阴】芝麻糕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tilaka: {'def': '[tila+ka, from its resemblance to a sesame seed] 1. a spot, stain, mole, freckle M.I,88; S.I,170; VvA.253; DhA.IV,172 (°ṁ vā kālakaṁ vā adisvā). -- 2. a kind of tree Vv 6⁷ (=bandhu-jīvaka-puppha-sadisa-pupphā ekā rukkha-jāti). (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tilakkhaṇāni: {'def': '三法印', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Tilañchaka: {'def': 'at J. IV.364 Acc. to Kern (Toev. II.91) to be read as nilañchaka. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Timbaru: {'def': 'timbarūsaka,【阳】黑乌木(柿树属的一种乔木)，町婆罗果。参考Tinduka。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'timbarūsaka, 参考 Tinduka。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'a certain tree (Strychnos nux vomica or Diospyros) J.VI,336; °tthanī (f.) “with breasts like the t. fruit” Sn.110; J.VI,457 (SnA 172: taruṇadārikā); VvA.137 (t.-nādasadisa). (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Timbarukkha: {'def': '=timbarūsaka J.VI,529. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Timbarūsaka: {'def': '=timbaru (Diospyros or Strychnos) Vin.III,59; Vv 33²⁷ (=tindukaphala VvA.147; tipusasadisā ekā vallijāti timbarūsakan ti ca vadanti); DhA.III,315. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Timi: {'def': '[Derivation unknown. Sk. timi] a large fish, a leviathan; a fabulous fish of enormous size. It occurs always in combⁿ w. timiṅgala, in formula timi timingala timitimingala, which should probably be reduced to one simple timitimingala (see next). (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】帝麑鱼(一种巨鱼的名字)。timiṅgala,【阳】帝麑伽罗(世间最大的鱼，能吞舟)。Timiramiṅgala, 提帝麑伽罗(能吞舟大鱼)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】提麋鱼（一种巨鱼的名字）。 ~ṅgala, 【阳】一种鱼（世间最大的鱼）。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Timira: {'def': 'timisa,【中】黑暗。【形】暗的。vitimira【梵】无暗的。八十种好之一︰光明照耀周匝破诸冥闇(vitimira-viwuddhaloka；radiance extending all around))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. timira fr. tim=tam (as in tamas), to which also belong tibba 2 & tintiṇāti. This is to be distinguished from tim in temeti to (be or) make wet. See tama] dark; nt. darkness Vv 32³ (t.-tamba); J.III,189 (t.-rukkha); vanatimira a flower J.IV,285; V,182. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'timisa, 【中】黑暗。【形】暗的。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Timiratipiṅgala: {'def': '(nt.) a great ocean fish, DhsA.13, v. timingala. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Timirāyitatta: {'def': '【中】阴暗，漆黑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】阴暗，漆黑。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Timirāyittata: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. to timirāyita, pp. of timirayati to obscure, denom. to timira] gloom, darkness S.III,124 (=Māra). (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Timisa: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic tamisrā=tamas] darkness J.III,433 (andhakāra-timissāya); Pug.30 (andh°-timisāya); Miln.283 (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Timiṅgala: {'def': '[timi+gila, gl, see note on gala] in combⁿ w. timi, timitimiṅgala. Sk. has timingila & timingilagila: redupl. in 2nd syllable where P. has redupl. in 1st; fisheater, redupl. as intens.=greedy or monstrous fisheater, a fabulous fish of enormous size, the largest fish in existence Vin.II,238=A.IV,200=Nd² 235^3q; Ps.II,196; Miln.377. At Ud.54 sq. & Miln.262 we find the reading timi timingala timirapingala, which is evidently faulty. A Sanskritized form of t. is timitimingala at Divy 502. See timiratipingala, & cp. also the similar Sk. cilicima a sort of fish. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Timīsikā: {'def': '【阴】非常黑暗的夜晚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】非常黑暗的夜晚。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [timisa+ka] darkness, a very dark night Vv 9⁶; J.IV,98. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tinduka: {'def': '【阳】黑乌木（柿树属的一种乔木 (Diospyros melanoxylon)）。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. tinduka] the tree Diospyros embryopteris D.I,178 (v. l. tiṇḍ°; J.V,99; tiṇḍukāni food in a hermitage J.IV,434; VI,532. --tindukakandarā Npl. the T. cave Vin.II,76. -- See also timbaru & timbarūsaka. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】黑乌木(柿树属的一种乔木 (Diospyros melanoxylon))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tinta: {'def': '(adj.) [=timita from temeti] wet, moist Miln.286; DhA.II,40 (°mukha). (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】湿的，潮湿的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】湿的，潮湿的。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tintaka: {'def': 'at PvA.47 (°alābu) is to be read as tittaka°. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tintinī: {'def': '【阴】罗望子树(tamarind﹐见 Ciñcā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】罗望子树（见 Ciñcā）。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tintiṇa: {'def': '(nt.) greed, desire; (adj.) greedy. Ep. of a pāpabhikkhu A.V,149 (Com. tintiṇaṁ vuccati taṇhā, tāya samannāgato āsaṅkābahulo vā); Vbh.351 (tintiṇaṁ tintiṇāyanā, etc.=loluppaṁ). (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tintiṇāti: {'def': '& Tintiṇāyati [either=Sk. timirayati to be obscured, from tim in timira, or from stim (Sk. *tistimāyati›*stistim° after tiṣṭhati›*stiṣṭhati;=P. titiṇāyati) to become stiff, cp. timi, thīna and in meaning mucchati. The root tam occurs in same meaning in cpd. nitammati (q. v.=Sk. nitāmyati) at J.IV,284, expl^d by atikilamati] to become sick, to swoon, to (stiffen out in a) faint J.I,243 (tintiṇanto corresp. with mucchita); VI,347 (tintiṇāyamāna, v. l. tiṇāy°). (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tipada: {'def': '﹐三音步。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tipaññāsā: {'def': '【阴】五十三。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】五十三。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tipiṭaka: {'def': '﹐tepiṭaka﹐【中】三藏经典。日译《南传大藏经》从昭和十年到十六年(西元1935-1941)译成。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(Skt. Tripiṭaka)三藏', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Tippa: {'def': '(adj.) [a variant of tibba=Sk. tīvra, presumably from tij (cp. tikhiṇa), but by Bdhgh connected w. tap (tapati, burn): tippā ti bahalā tāpana-vasena vā tippā Com. to Aṅguttara (see M.I,526)] piercing, sharp, acute, fierce; always & only with ref. to pains, esp. pains suffered in Niraya. In full comb^ns sarīrikā vedanā dukkhā tippā kharā M.I,10; A.II,116, 143, 153; ekantadukkhā t. kaṭukā ved. M.I,74; bhayānaka ekantatippa Niraya Pv IV.1⁹ (=tikhiṇadukkha° PvA.221); nerayikā sattā dukkhā t. kaṭukā ved° vediyamānā Miln.148. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'tibba, 【形】锋利的，刺骨的，敏锐的。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'tibba,【形】锋利的，刺骨的，敏锐的。tibbatibbā﹐重重的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tipu: {'def': '【中】领导。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. trapu, non-Aryan?] lead, tin Vin.I,190 (°maya); S.V,92; J.II,296; Miln.331 (°kāra a worker in lead, tinsmith); Vism.174 (°maṇḍala); DhA.IV,104 (°parikhā). (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】领导。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tipusa: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. trapusa] a species of cucumber J.V,37; VvA.147. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】南瓜（各种通常有坚硬外果皮的南瓜属 (Cucurbita) 植物结的果实之任一种，作为蔬菜，做馅饼和畜饲而广泛栽培）。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】南瓜(pumpkim﹐各种通常有坚硬外果皮的南瓜属 (Cucurbita)，作为蔬菜，做馅饼和畜饲而广泛栽培)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tiraccha: {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic tiryañc, obliquely, from *ter (tarati). Goth. pairh, Ohg. durh, E. through; cp. tiriyaṁ] across, obliquely; in °bhūta deviating, going wrong, swerving from the right direction DA.I,89 (see under tiracchāna-kathā). (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tiracchāna: {'def': '【阳】动物，畜牲。 ~kathā, 【阴】无用的谈论，谈论动物，天真的谈话。 ~gata, 【阳】动物。 ~yoni, 【阴】畜生道（五道：天、人、畜生、饿鬼、地狱）。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[for °gata=Sk. tiraścīna (°gata)=tiraśca; “going horizontally,” i. e. not erect. Cp. tiraccha, tiriyaṁ, tiro] an animal It.92 (tiracchānaṁ ca yoniyo for tiracchāna-yoniyo); Vbh.339 (°gāminī paṭipadā leading to rebirth among beasts); VvA.23 (manussatiracchāna an animal-man, wild man, “werwolf”).

--kathā “animal talk”; wrong or childish talk in general Vin.I,188; D.I,7, 178; III,54; Vism.127; expl^d at DA.I,89 by anīyānikattā sagga-mokkha-maggānaṁ tiraccha-bhūtā kathā; --gata an animal, a beast Vin.IV,7; S.III,152=DA.I,23; (t. pāṇā) M.III,167 (t. pāṇā tiṇabhakkhā); Nd² on Sn.72 (t.-pāṇā); J.I,459 (=vanagocara); Vbh.412 sq.; --yoni the realm of the brute creation, the animals. Among the 5 gatis (niraya t. manussā devā pettivisaya) it counts as an apāyagati, a state of misery D.I,228; III,234; S.I,34; III,225 sq.; IV, 168, 307; A.I,60; II,127, 129; Pv IV.11¹; Vism.103, 427; PvA.27, 166; --yonika (& yoniya A.I,37) belonging to the realm of the animals S.V,356; --vijjā a low art, a pseudo-science Vin.II,139; D.I,9 sq. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】动物，畜牲。tiracchānakathā,【阴】谈论动物，无用的谈论(32种，包括：王论rājakathā、盗贼论corakathā、大臣论mahāmattakathā、军队论senākathā、恐怖论bhayakathā、战争论yuddhakathā、食物论annakathā、饮料论pānakathā、衣服论vatthakathā、床椅论sayanakathā、花饰论mālākathā、香论gandhakathā、亲戚论ñātikathā、车辆论yānakathā、村gāmakathā、镇论nigamakathā、城论nagarakathā、国论janapadakathā、女人itthikathā、英雄论surākathā、街道论visikhākathā、市井言论kumbhaṭṭhānakathā、祖灵论pubbapetakathā、小小事论nānattakathā、世界论lokakkhāyikā、海论samuddakkhāyikā、猜测论itibhavābhavakathā。这些无用的话，是卑劣、无利益，不能导向厌、离、灭。)。tiracchānagata,【阳】动物。tiracchānagatā,【阴】雌性动物。tiracchānayoni,【阴】畜生胎(畜生道﹐五趣之一)。tiracchānavijjā﹐【阴】低劣技艺(畜生学问)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tiratana: {'def': '三宝', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Tirivaccha: {'def': 'a certain tree J.V,46. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tiriya: {'def': '【中】宽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tiriyaŋ: {'def': '【副】横过，横着。 ~taraṇa, 【中】乘船渡过（对岸）。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tiriyaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic tiryañc (tiryak) to tiras, see tiro & cp. perhaps Ger. quer=E. thwart, all to *ter in tarati] transversely, obliquely, horizontally (as opp. to uddhaṁ vertically, above, & adho beneath), slanting, across. In combⁿ uddhaṁ adho tiriyaṁ sabbadhi “in all directions whatever” D.I,251=A.II,129; similarly uddhaṁ adho t. vâpi majjhe Sn.1055; with uddhaṁ & adho D.I,23, 153; Vism.176 (where expl^d). -- A.II,48; Sn.150, 537; J.I,96; It.120; DhA.I,40 (dvāra-majjhe t. across the doorway), 47 (sideways); DA.I,312; KhA 248.

--taraṇa ferrying across, adj. °ā nāvā, a vessel crossing over, a traject Vin.IV,65. (Page 303)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】横过，横著(transversely, obliquely, horizontally)。tiriyaṁtaraṇa,【中】乘船渡过(对岸)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tiriyā: {'def': '【阴】一种草(a kind of grass or creeper A.III,240, 242 (tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti; Com. dabbatiṇa))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) a kind of grass or creeper A.III,240, 242 (tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti; Com. dabbatiṇa). (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tiro: {'def': '【无】横过，超过，外面。 ~karaṇī, 【阴】窗帘, 门帘，面纱。 ~kuḍḍa,【中】在墙壁之外。 ~dhāna, 【中】盖子，屏。 ~bhāva, 【阳】隐藏，不见，消失。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(prep. & adv.) (always °-) [Vedic tiras across, crossways, from *ter of tarati=to go through; cp. Av. tarō, Lat. trans, Cymr. tra] across, beyond, over, outside, afar. See also tiraccha & tiriyaṁ.

--karaṇī (f.) a curtain, a veil (lit. “drawing across”) Vin.I,276; II,152; --kucchigata having left the womb D.II,13; --kuḍḍa outside the fence or wall, over the wall Vin.IV,265 (°kuḍḍe uccāraṁ chaḍḍeti); D.I,78= A.III,280 (in phrase tirobhāvaṁ t. kuḍḍaṁ t. pākāraṁ t.-pabbataṁ asajjamāno gacchati to denote power of transplacement); Pv.I,5¹ (°kuḍḍesu tiṭṭhanti: the Tirokuḍḍa-Sutta, Khp VII.); Vism.176, 394; DhA.I,104; PvA.23, 31; --gāma a distant village Vin.III,135; --chada “outside the veil,” conspicuous J.VI,60; --janapada a distant or foreign country D.I,116; --pākāra beyond or over a fence (°pākāraṁ or °pākāre) Vin.IV,266; see also °kuḍḍa; --bhāva (ṁ) beyond existence, out of existence, magic power of going to a far away place or concealment Vism.393 sq. (=a-pākaṭa-pāṭihāriya), see also under °kuḍḍa. --raṭṭha a foreign kingdom D.I,161 (=pararaṭṭha DA.I,286). (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】横过，超过，外面。tirokaraṇī,【阴】窗帘，门帘，面纱。tilokuḍḍa,【中】在墙壁之外。tilodhāna,【中】盖子，屏。tilobhāva,【阳】隐藏，不见，消失。tirokuṭṭa, 墙外。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tiro-: {'def': '﹐横过，超越，贯通。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tirokkha: {'def': '1. (adj.) one who is outside, or absent Vin.III,185. -- 2. (adv.) [=tiras+ka, cp. tiraskāra disdain, abuse] in tirokkha-vāca one who speaks abusively or with disregard J.V,78. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tirokkāra: {'def': '【阳】侮辱，凌辱。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】侮辱，淩辱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tirīṭa: {'def': '【中】珠仔树(东印度的一种乔木〔总状山矾〕(Symplocos racemosa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) the tree Symplocos racemosa, also a garment made of its bark Vin.I,306 (°ka); D.I,166=A.I,295; M.I,343; Pug.51. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】珠仔树（东印度的一种乔木〔总状山矾〕 (Symplocos racemosa)）。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tirīṭaka: {'def': '【中】树皮衣。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】树皮衣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tisarana: {'def': '三皈(依)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Tisata: {'def': '(num.) [ti+sata] three hundred J.VI,427 (°mattā nāvā). See also under tayo. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tissa: {'def': 'm.［Sk.Tisya］星.人の名，鬼宿', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Tithi: {'def': '(Sk. tithi),【阴】阴历的日子(a lunar day)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】阴历的日子。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. tithi] a lunar day DhA.I,174; PvA.198. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Titikkhati: {'def': '(tij + kha, ti 重叠，而 j 被改成 k), 忍耐，负担。【过】 ~khi。【现分】 ~khanta, ~khamāna。【独】 ~khitvā。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tij锋利+khā掘, ti 重叠，而 j 被改成 k), 忍耐，负担，担当。【过】titikkhi。【现分】titikkhanta, titikkhamāna。【独】titikkhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. titikṣate, Desid. of tij, cp. tijo & tikhiṇa to bear, endure, stand S.I,221; Sn.623; Dh.321=Nd² 475 B⁷; Dh.399 (titikkhissaṁ=sahissāmi DhA.IV,3); J.V,81, 368. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Titikkhā: {'def': '【阴】忍耐，宽恕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [see last] endurance, forgiveness, longsuffering S.I,7; V,4; Dh.184; Nd² 203. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】忍耐，宽恕。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Titta: {'def': '(tappati 的【过分】), 已满足。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of tappati²] satisfied (with=Instr.) enjoying (c. Gen.), happy, contented A.I,87=Pug.26 (+tappetar); Miln.249; VvA.86 (=pīṇita); PvA.46 (dibbâhārassa), 59 (=suhita), 109 (=pīṇita). --atitta dissatisfied, insatiate J.I,440; III,275; Dh.48 (kāmesu). (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tappati 的【过分】), 已满足。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'tittaka,【形】苦的，【中】苦味道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'tittaka, 【形】苦的，【中】苦味道。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tittaka: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. tiktaka from tij] sharp, bitter (of taste) M.I,80 (°alābu), 315 (id.); PvA.47 (id.; so read for tintaka lābu) Dhs.629=Nd² 540 (tittika; enum^d between lavaṇa & kaṭuka); DhsA.320. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tittakatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. to tittaka] bitterness, enum^d with lavaṇattaṁ & kaṭukattaṁ at Miln.56=63 (cp. Nd² 540). (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tittha: {'def': '(梵 tīrtha, ‹trī／tarati),【中】浅滩，登陆处，港口，信念，津梁。titthakara (梵 tīrthaṅkara),【阳】作津梁者，一派教主(一个宗教的创办人)，佛经中通常译作「外道」，在耆那教里，Tīrthaṅkara与Jina同义字。titthāyatana,【中】宗教教派的领域或信徒，(任何宗教的)基本原理教义。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】浅滩，登陆处，港口，信念。 ~kara, 【阳】一派教主（一个宗教的创办人）。 ~āyatana, 【中】宗教教派的领域或信徒，（任何宗教的）基本原理教义。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic tīrtha, from *ter, tarate, to pass through, orig. passage (through a river), ford] 1. a fording place, landing place, which made a convenient bathing place D.II,89=Vin.I,230 (Gotama° the G. ford); J.I,339, 340 (titthāraṇa); II,111; III,228 (°nāvika ferryman); 230 (nāvā° a ferry); IV,379; Pv.II,1²⁰; III,6⁴; IV,12² (su°); Dāvs. V.59 (harbour). Titthaṁ jānāti to know a “fording place,” i. e. a means or a person to help over a difficulty or doubt M.I,223=A.V,349 (neg.) 2. a sect (always with bad connotation. Promising to lead its votaries over into salvation, it only leads them into error).

--âyatana the sphere or fold of a sect (cp. titthiya) Vin.I,60, 69; II,279; M.I,483; A.I,173; Pug.22; Dhs.381, 1003 (cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 101ⁿ); DA.I,118; Ledi Sadaw in J.P.T.S. 1913, 117--118; --kara a “ford-maker,” founder of a sect D.I,47, 116; M.I,198; Sn.pp. 90, 92; Miln.4, 6, etc.; --ññutā knowledge of a ford, in fig. sense of titthaṁ jānāti (see above) Nett 29, 80. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Titthika: {'def': '(adj.) [Possible reading in Burmese MSS. for tittika. But the two compound letters (tt and tth) are so difficult to distinguish that it is uncertain which of the two the scribe really meant]. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Titthiya: {'def': '[from tittha 2, cp. Divy 81⁷; AvŚ I.48; II,20. An adherent of another sect (often as añña°), an heretic Vin.I,54, 84, 136, 159 (°samādāna), 306 (°dhaja), 320; S.I,65; IV,37, 394; D.III,44, 46; Sn.381, 891; Nd² 38; Ps.I,160; Pug.49; Vbh.247. añña° e. g. Vin.I,101; D.I,175 sq.; III,130 sq.; J.II,415, 417. --sāvaka a follower of an heretic teacher Vin.I,172; J.I,95; Vism.17. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】异教师，外教徒。 ~sāvaka,【阳】异教信徒，异教弟子。 ~ārāma,【阳】异教庙宇。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】异教师，外教徒，外道。titthiyasāvaka,【阳】异教信徒，异教弟子。titthārāma,【阳】异教庙宇。titthiyapakkantaka﹐破内外道(未舍戒，以比丘身份归外道)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Titti: {'def': '【阴】满足，边缘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】满足，边缘。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [from tappati²] satisfaction (in=Loc.) Dh.186 =ThA.287 (na kahāpaṇavassena t. kāmesu vijjati); n’atthi t. kāmānaṁ Th.2, 487; J.V,486 (dhammesu); VvA.11; PvA.32 (°ṁ gacchati find s.) 55 (paṭilabhati), 127. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tittika: {'def': 'in samatittika at D.I,244, Vin.I,230, brimful, of a river. Derivation & meaning doubtful. See the note at Buddhist Suttas, 178, 9. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tittimant: {'def': '(adj.) [titti+mant] satisfied, contented, so read at J.III,70 & VI,508 for kittimant. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tittira: {'def': '[Onomat. cp. Vedic tittira & tittiri, Gr. tatuρas pheasant, Lit. teterva heath-cock; Lat. tetrinnio to cackle] partridge J.I,218; III,538. --pattikā a kind of boot Vin.I,186. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鹧鸪(partridge)。古音译：提帝逻惒吒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】鹧鸪。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tittiriya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. tittira] belonging to a partridge, like a partridge J.I,219 (brahmacariya). (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ti°: {'def': '[Vedic tris, Av. priś, Gr. triζ, Lat. ter (fr. ters›*tris, cp. testis›*tristo, trecenti›*tricenti), Icl. prisvar, Ohg. driror] base of numeral three in compⁿ; consisting of three, threefold; in numerical cpds. also= three (3 times).

--kaṭuka threefold spices (kaṭuka-bhaṇḍa) VvA.186; --gāvuta a distance of 3/4 of a league (i. e. about 2 miles), DhA.I,108 (less than yojana, more than usabha), 131, 396; II,43, 61, 64, 69; III,202, 269; VvA.227; B. on S.I,52 (sarīra); --catu three or four DhA.I,173; --cīvara (nt.) the 3 robes of a bhikkhu, consisting of: diguṇā saṅghāṭi, ekacciya uttarāsaṅga, ekacciya antaravāsaka Vin.I,289, 296; II,302. ticīvarena avippavāsa Vin.I,109 sq. -- Vism.60, 66; DhA.IV,23. --tālamattaṁ 3 palm-trees high DhA.II,62. --daṇḍa 1. a tripod as one of the requisites of a hermit to place the water-pot on (kuṇḍikā) J.I,8 (tidaṇḍakuṇḍikādike tāpasa-parikkhārā), 9 (hanging from the kāja); II,317 (see tedaṇḍika). -- 2. part of a chariot A.IV,191 (v. l. daṇḍa only). --diva the 3 heavens (that is the Tāvatiṁsa heaven) D.II,167, 272 (tidivûpapanna); S.I,96 (°ṁ ṭhānaṁ upeti), 181 (ākaṅkha-māno °ṁ anuttaraṁ). --pada [cp. Vedic tripad or tripād, Gr. tri/pous, Lat. tripes: tripod] consisting of 3 feet or (in prosody) of 3 padas Sn.457 (w. ref. to metre Sāvittī); --(p)pala threefold Vism.339; --pallattha “turning in 3 ways,” i. e. skilled in all occupations (Kern, Toev.: zeer listig) J.I,163 (of miga; Com. expl. as lying on 3 sides of its lair); --piṭaka the 3 Piṭakas Vism.62, 241; DhA.I,382; --peṭaka=tepiṭaka Miln.90; tipeṭakin at Vin.V,3; --maṇḍala (nt.) the 3 circles (viz. the navel & the 2 knees) Vin.II,213 (°ṁ paṭicchādento parimaṇḍalaṁ nivāsento); cp. Vin. Texts I.155; --yojana a distance of 3 leagues, i. e. 20 miles, or fig. a long dist.; Vism.392 (tiyojanika setacchatta); DhA.II,41 (°magga); VvA.75 (°mattake vihāraṁ agamāsi); PvA.216 (sā ca pokkharaṇī Vesaliyā °mattake hoti); °satika 300 cubits long J.II,3; --loka the 3 worlds (i. e. kāma, rūpa, arūpa-loka) Sdhp.29, 276, 491 (cp. tebhūmaka); --vagga consisting of 3 divisions or books DA.I,2 (Dīghāgamo vaggato t. hoti); --(v)aṅgika having 3 aṅgas (of jhāna) Dhs.161; --vassika for the 3 seasons (-gandha-sālibhattaṁ bhuñjantā) DhA.II,9; J.I,66 (id.); --vidha 3 fold, of sacrifice (yañña) D.I,128, 134, 143; of aggi (fire) J.I,4 & Miln.97; Vism.147 (°kalyāṇatā). --visākha a three-forked frown on the forehead S.I,118; M.I,109; --sandhi consisting of 3 spaces J.VI,397 (tāya senāya Mithilā t.-parivāritā), expl^d as an army made up of elephants, chariots, cavalry, and infantry, with a space between each two. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tiŋsati: {'def': 'tiŋsā, 【阴】三十。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tiṁsati: {'def': 'tiṁsā,【阴】三十。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tiṁsaṁ: {'def': '(tiṁsa°) [Vedic triṁśat, cp. Lat. trīginta, Oir. tricha] the number 30 D.I,81≈(tiṁsaṁ pi jātiyo); S.II,217 (t.-mattā bhikkhū); Dat. Instr. tiṁsāya A.V,305 (dhammehi samannāgato); Sn.p. 87 (pi dadāmi) PvA.281 (vassasahassehi): t.-yojana-maggaṁ (āgato) DhA.II,76, 79; III,172; PvA.154; °yojanika kantāra DhA.II,193 (cp. 192); J.V,46 (magga); DhA.I,26 (vimāna); t.-vassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṁ (of Konāgamana Buddha) D.II,3; t.-mattāni vassāni Miln.15; t.-vassasahassāni PvA.281=DhA.II,10. So of an immense crowd: tiṁsa bhikkhu-sahassāni D.II,6; tiṁsa-mattā sūkarā J.II,417; °sahassa-bhikkhū DhA.I,24. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tiṇa: {'def': '【中】草。tiṇagahaṇa,【中】草丛。tiṇajāti,【阴】多种草。tiṇabhakkha,【形】以草为食的。tiṇabhisi,【阴】草席。tiṇasanthāra,【阳】草垫子(座垫)。tiṇasūla,【中】茉莉(jasmine﹐印度的一种藤本 (Jasminum sambac)，栽培，利用它的丰富、芳香的白色花)。tiṇaṇḍūpaka,【中】草卷。tiṇagāra,【中】草屋(草顶小屋)。tiṇukkā,【阴】草火把。tiṇahāraka,【阳】携带草的人(为售卖)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic tṛṇa, from *ter (cp. tarati) to pierce, orig. “point” (=blade); Goth. paúrnus, Ags. porn=E. thorn, Ger. dorn] grass, herb; weed; straw; thatch; hay, litter S.III,137 (tiṇa, kasā, kusa, babbaja, bīraṇa); satiṇakaṭṭhodaka full of grass, wood & water (of an estate) D.I,87, 111, etc.; sītaṁ vā uṇhaṁ vā rajo vā tiṇaṁ vā ussāvo vā (dust & weeds) D.II,19; A.I,145; t.+paṇṇa (grass & leaves¹) A.I,183; VvA.5. -- J.I,108 (dabba°), 295; III,53; Pv.I,8¹ (harita t.); IV,1⁴⁸; Vism.353 (kuṇṭha°); DA.I,77 (alla° fresh grass); PvA.7 (weed), 62 (grass), 112; DhA.IV,121; Miln.47 (thatch), 224 (id.).

--aṇḍupaka a roll of grass Vin.I,208=III,249; --āgāra a thatched cottage A.I,101 (+naḷāgāra); --ukkā a firebrand of dry grass or hay S.II,152; III,185; J.I,212, 296; Vism.428; DhA.I,126; ThA.287; Bdhd 107; --karala a wisp of grass DhA.III,38; --kājaka a load of g. DhA.IV,121; --gahana a thicket of g., a jungle A.I,153; --cuṇṇa crushed & powdered (dry) grass or herbs Vin.I,203; VvA.100 (-rajânukiṇṇa); --jāti grass-creeper VvA.162; --dāya a grass-jungle S.II,152; --dosa damaged by weeds (khetta) Dh.356; PvA.7; --pupphaka (-roga) sickness caused by the flowering of grass, hay-fever Miln.216; --purisaka a straw-man, a scarecrow Miln.352; Vism.462; DhsA.111; --bhakkha eating grass; of animals M.III,167; of ascetics D.I,166; Pug.55; A.I,241, 295; --bhusa chaff, litter, dry grass VvA.47; --rukkha a shrub; --vatthāraka one of the seven Adhikaraṇasamathas (ways in which litigation may be settled). In case mutual complaints of breach of the rules have been brought before a chapter, then the chapter may decline to go into the details and, with the consent of the litigants, declare all the charges settled. See Vin. Texts, III,30--34. This is the “covering over as if with grass” Vin.II,87 (in detail, cp. also tassapāpiyyasikā); D.III,254; A.I,99; M.II,250; --santhāraka a mat of grass Vin.I,286; II,113, 116; J.I,360. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】草。 ~gahaṇa, 【中】草丛。 ~jāti, 【阴】多种草。 ~bhakkha,【形】以草为食的。 ~bhisi, 【阴】草席。 ~santhāra, 【阳】草垫子（座垫）。 ~sūla,【中】茉莉（印度的一种藤本 (Jasminum sambac)，栽培，利用它的丰富、芳香的白色花）。 ~aṇḍūpaka, 【中】草卷。 ~agāra, 【中】草屋（草顶小屋）。 ~ukkā, 【阴】草火把。 ~hāraka, 【阳】携带草的人（为售卖）。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tiṇava: {'def': 'a sort of drum A.II,117. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tiṇha: {'def': '【形】锋利的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】锋利的。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[see tikhiṇa] sharp (of swords, axes, knives, etc.) D.I,56 (sattha); S.IV,160, 167 (kuṭhārī); A.IV,171; Sn.667 (°dhāra), 673 (asipattavana); J.I,253; Sdhp.381. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tiṇḍuka: {'def': 'see tinduka. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tiṇṇa: {'def': '(tarati 的【过分】), 已越过，已经历，已达到最后终点（的人）。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of tarati] one who has reached the other shore (always fig.) gone through, overcome, one who has attained Nibbāna. Ogha° gone through the great flood S.I,3, 142; Sn.178, 823, 1082, 1101, 1145; D.III,54; Sn.21 (+pāragata), 359 (+parinibbuta), 515, 545 (tiṇṇo tāres’imaṁ pajaṁ); It.123 (tiṇṇo tārayataṁ varo); Dh.195 (-sokapariddava); Nd² 282.

--kathaṅkatha (adj.) having overcome doubt, free from doubt Sn.17, 86, 367; --vicikiccha=prec. Vin.I,16; D.I,110; II,224, 229; Pug.68; DA.I,211. (Page 302)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tarati 的【过分】), 已越过，已经历，已达到最终点(的人)。tiṇṇavicikicchā﹐【阴】度疑。Tiṇṇā vicikicchāti sappaṭibhayakantārasadisā soḷasavatthukā aṭṭhavatthukā ca tiṇṇā vicikicchā tiṇṇavicikicchā.(越过怀疑：类似危险的荒野--十六事(soḷasavatthukā) (怀疑)、八事(aṭṭhavatthukā) (怀疑)的越过怀疑为‘度疑’)(Mṭ.56.)CS:p.2.40)。十六事怀疑︰怀疑「过去世我存在吗？过去世我不存在吗？等等」。八事怀疑：1.真实佛。2.真实法。3.真实僧伽。4.戒定慧三学。5.过去世，即过去五蕴。6.未来世，即未来五蕴。7.过去世与未来世，即过去与未来五蕴。8.缘起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tiṭṭha: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of tasati¹] dry, hard, rough J.VI,212 (°sela hard rock). (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tiṭṭhati: {'def': '[Frequentative of Vedic sthā, stand (cp. sthāna, Lat. sto: see ṭhāna)=Av. hiśtaiti, Gr. i(ζthmi, Lat. sisto) to stand, etc. -- I. Forms: pres. ind. tiṭṭhati (Sn.333, 434; Pv.I,5¹); imper. 2nd tiṭṭha, 3rd tiṭṭhatu; ppr. tiṭṭhaṁ, tiṭṭhanto, tiṭṭhamāna; pot. tiṭṭhe (Sn.918, 968) & tiṭṭheyya (Sn. 942); fut. ṭhassati (J.I,172, 217); aor. aṭṭhāsi (J.I,279, pl. aṭṭhaṁsu J.II,129) & aṭṭhā (cp. agā, orig. impf.) (Sn.429; J.I,188); inf. ṭhātuṁ (PvA.174); ger. ṭhatvā (Sn.887); grd. ṭhānīya (PvA.72). -- pp. ṭhita, Caus. ṭhapeti. An apparent Med.-Pass. ṭhīyati, as found in cpd. pati-ṭṭhīyati is to be expl^d as Med. of paṭi+sthyā (see thīna), and should be written paṭi-tthīyati. See under patiṭṭhīyati. See also ṭhāna & ṭhiti. -- II. Meanings. -- 1. to stand, stand up, to be standing (see ṭhāna I. 1^a): ṭhānakappana-vacanaṁ nisajjādi-paṭikkhepato PvA.24; opp. to walking or lying down: tiṭṭhaṁ caraṁ nisinno vā Sn.151, 193; tiṭṭhamānāya eva c’assā gabbhavuṭṭhānaṁ ahosi “she was delivered standing” J.I,52; ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi PvA.68, etc.; caṅkamana-koṭiyaṁ ṭhatvā PvA.79. -- 2. to stop, stay, abide; to last, endure, be at rest; fig. to remain in, abide by, acquiesce in (see ṭhāna I. 1^b). In imper. tiṭṭhatu it approaches the meanings of ṭhapeti viz. leave it alone, let it be so, all right. yāva kāyo ṭhassati tāva naṁ dakkhinti deva-manussā (as long as the body shall last) D.I,46. tiṭṭhe shall he live on (cp. ṭhāna II.^d Sn.1053, 1072 =Nd² 283, tiṭṭheyya saṭṭhikappasahassāni to stay on indefinitely); tiṭṭheyya kappaṁ D.II,103. tiṭṭhantī anto vimānasmiṁ “remaining inside the castle” Pv.I,10¹; tiṭṭha tāva “stop please” J.II,352; tiṭṭhabhadantika one who bids the guest stay (comb^d w. ehi-bh°) D.I,166; M.I,342; A.I,295; II,206: ovāde ṭhatvā (abiding by) J.I,153; VI,367; similarly J.VI,336. -- Imper. tiṭṭhatu J.IV,40; Miln.14; PvA.74. -- 3. to live (on=Instr.), behave, exist, be (see ṭhāna I. 2); to be in a certain condition [gati, cp. ṭhāna II. (c)]. Often periphrastically for finite verb (with ger.: cp. gata & ṭhita) tiṭṭhantam enaṁ jānāti (he knows their “gati”) Sn.1114 (see Nd² 283); āhārena tiṭṭhati PvA.27 (is supported by, cp. ṭhiti); yāvatāyukaṁ ṭhatvā (outliving their lives) PvA.66; karuṇa-ṭhānīya (=*kāruṇayitabba) deserving pity PvA.72; yā tvaṁ tiṭṭhasi (how you are or look!) Vv 44¹, etc. -- with ger.: pharitvā aṭṭhāsi (pervaded) J.VI,367; aṭṭhiṁ āhacca aṭṭhāsi (cut through to the bone) J.IV,415; gehaṁ samparivāretvā aṭṭhaṁsu (encircled the house) PvA.22. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ṭhā + a, ṭhā 被改为 tiṭṭha), 站着，停留，遵守，持续，保持。（比较级 tiṭṭhatu 的意义是：别管它，让它是如此。）【过】 aṭṭhāsi。【过分】ṭhita。【现分】 tiṭṭhanta, tiṭṭhamāna。【独】 ṭhatvā。(p146)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ṭhā(sthā)停﹑站+a, ṭhā 被改为 tiṭṭha)(Frequentative of Vedic sthā, stand), 站著(to stand, stand up, to be standing)，停留(to stop, stay)，持续(to last)，保持(to remain in)。(比较级 tiṭṭhatu 的意义是：别管它，让它是如此。) 【过】aṭṭhāsi﹐aṭṭhā。【过分】ṭhita。【现分】tiṭṭhaṁ, tiṭṭhanta, tiṭṭhamāna。【独】ṭhatvā。imper.2nd tiṭṭha, 3rd tiṭṭhatu。pot. tiṭṭhe & tiṭṭheyya。fut.ṭhassati。inf. ṭhātuṁ。grd.ṭhānīya。caus. ṭhapeti。med.pass. ṭhīyati。aor. pl. aṭṭhaṁsu & aṭṭhā; grd. ṭhānīya.。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tomara: {'def': '【阳、中】矛，（御象的）枪矛。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) [Sk. tomara from tud, see tudati] a pike, spear, lance, esp. the lance of an elephant-driver D.II,266 (tutta-t. a driving lance); M.III,133 (t. hattha); Vism.235; DA.I,147. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. tomara from tud),【阳】【中】矛，(御象的)枪矛(a pike, spear, lance, esp. the lance of an elephant-driver)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Toraṇa: {'def': '(Sk. toraṇa),【中】拱门，(印度公共集会等用的)临时棚舍，牌楼(an arched gateway, portal)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】拱门，（印度公共集会等用的）临时棚舍，牌楼。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. toraṇa, perhaps related to Gr. tuρsis, tuρris=Lat. turris (tower), cp. Hor. Od. I.4⁷ “regumque turris”=palaces] an arched gateway, portal; Vin.II,154; D.II,83; Vv 35¹ (=dvārakoṭṭhaka-pāsādassa nāmaṁ VvA.160); J.III,428; Dāvs.V,48. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tosa: {'def': '【阳】快乐，满足。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】快乐，满足。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tosana: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [see toseti] satisfying, pleasing; satisfaction Sn.971. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tosanā: {'def': '【阴】 tosāpana, 【中】令人满足的动作，令人高兴的动作。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】Tosāpana,【中】令人满足的动作，令人高兴的动作。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Toseti: {'def': '[Caus. of tussati] to please, satisfy, make happy Sn.1127 (=Nd² 288); J.IV,274; Sdhp.304. -- pp. tosita contented, satisfied Sn.1128. Cp. pari°. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Caus. of tussati), (参考Tosāpeti)使快乐，使喜欢。【过】tosesi。【过分】tosita,【现分】tosenta, tosayamāna,【独】tosetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（参考以上）【过】 tosesi。【过分】 tosita, 【现分】 tosenta, tosayamāna,【独】 tosetvā。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tosāpana: {'def': '(adj.) [=tosana, in formation of a 2nd causative tosāpeti] pleasing, giving satisfaction J.II,249. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tosāpeti: {'def': '(tussati 的【使】), 使快乐，使喜欢。【过】tosāpesi。【过分】tosāpita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(tussati 的【使】), 使快乐，使喜欢。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 tosāpita。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Toya: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic toya from *tāǔ to melt away; Lat. tabeo, tabes (consumption); Ags. pāwan=E. dew, Oir. tām= tabes; also Gr. tήkw, etc.] water (poetical for udaka); only in simile: puṇḍarīkaṁ (or padumaṁ) toyena na upalippati A.II,39=Sn.547; Sn.71=213; Th.1, 700; Nd² 287 (t. vuccati udakaṁ); -- Bdhd 67, 93. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】水。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Vedic toya),【中】水(water (poetical for udaka))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tu: {'def': '(indecl.) [Vedic tu, belonging to pron. base of 2nd sg. tvaṁ=Lat. tu; Gr. tu/, toi/=indeed, however (orig. ethical dat, of su/), toi/nun, toi/gar; Goth. pu, etc., cp. tuvaṁ] however, but, yet, now, then (similar in appl. to tāva); kin tu but (=quid nunc). Frequent in late verse: ante tu, J.P.T.S. 1884, 5, 31, 37 etc. J.P.T.S. 1913, 5³; Bd’s Man. 11⁵² &c. Usually comb^d with eva: tv eva however Sn.p. 141; na tv eva not however, but not A.V,173. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic tu),【无】然而，就这样，但是，仍然，现在，然后(however, but, yet, now, then) kin tu﹐but (=quid nunc)。frequent in late verse: ante tu。tv eva﹐however ; na tv eva﹐not however, but not。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】然而，但是，仍然，现在，然后。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tuccha: {'def': '【形】空的，徒然的，虚伪的，遗弃的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】空的，徒然的，遗弃的。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. tuccha, prob. rel. to Lat. tesqua deserted place, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] empty, vain, deserted; very often comb^d with ritta D.I,55; III,53 (°kumbhi); M.I,207; J.I,209 (°hattha, empty-handed); VI,365; Sn.883; Pug.45, 46; Miln.5 (+palāpa), 10 (id.), 13; DhA.II,43; PvA.202; Sdhp.431. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tucchaka: {'def': '=tuccha; always comb^d w. rittaka D.I,240; S.III,141; M.I,329. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tudampatī: {'def': '(dual) husband & wife [tu°=dial. for du°, Sk. dve; dampati from dama=domus, Sk. daṁpati=Gr. despόths; cp. also Kern, Toev. II.93, who compares tuvantuva for duvanduva]. See under dampati. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tudana: {'def': '【中】紮，戳〔刺、贯〕穿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】扎，戳〔刺、贯〕穿。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tudati: {'def': '(tud刺穿+a), 刺，啄，刺穿，教唆。【过】tudi。【过分】tudita, tunna。【现分】tudanta, tudamāna。【独】tuditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(tud + a), 刺，啄，刺穿，教唆。【过】 tudi。【过分】 tudita,tunna。【现分】 tudanta, tudamāna。【独】 tuditvā。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic tudati; *steud, enlarged fr. *steu, cp. Lat. tundo, tudes (hammer); Goth. stautan, Ohg. stozan (to push), E. stutter, Nhg. stutzen; Ags. styntan=E. stunt] to strike with an instrument; to prick, peck, pierce; to incite, instigate J.III,189 (=vijjhati). Pass. tujjati to be struck Th.1, 780; Vism.503 (cp. vitujjati); Sdhp.279. -- pp. tunna. See also tuṇḍa (beak=pecker), tutta (goad), tomara (lance=striker) & thūpa (point). (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuhina: {'def': '【中】露(dew)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】露。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tujjati: {'def': 'Pass. of tudati. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tudati 的【被】), 被刺穿，被打。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tudati‘刺穿’的【被】), 被刺穿，被打。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tula: {'def': '(adj.) [see tuleti] only in negative atula incomparable, not to be measured, beyond compare or description Vv 30⁴ (=anupama VvA.126); Pv.II,8⁹ (=appamāṇa PvA.110); III,3² (=asadisarūpa PvA.188); Miln.343. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tulana: {'def': '【中】 Tulanā, 【阴】秤重，等级，熟虑。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】tulanā,【阴】秤重，等级，熟虑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tulanā: {'def': '(f.) [see tuleti] weighing, rating; consideration, deliberation M.I,480; II,174; Nett 8, 41. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tulasi: {'def': '[Derivation unknown] basil (common or sweet) J.V,46 (°gahana a thicket of b.; v. l. tūlasi); VI,536 (tuḷasi=tuḷasigaccha). (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tulasī: {'def': '【阴】罗勒（罗勒属植物 (Ocimum basilicum) 一种东半球的唇形科一年生草本植物，栽培其叶，可四季生长）。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】罗勒(basil﹐罗勒属植物 (Ocimum basilicum) 一种东半球的唇形科一年生草本植物，栽培其叶，可四季生长)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tuleti: {'def': '[from tulā; Lat. tollo, etc.] to weigh, examine, compare; match, equal M.I,480; Th.1, 107; J.VI,283; -- ger. tulayitvā M.I,480. -- grd. tuliya & tulya (see sep.). -- pp. tulita. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tul + e), 秤重，调查，比较。【过】 tulesi。【过分】 tulita。【现分】tulenta。【独】 tuletvā。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tul称重+e), 秤重，调查，比较(台语︰比并)。【过】tulesi。【过分】tulita。【现分】tulenta。【独】tuletvā, tulayitvā。grd. tuliya & tulya.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tulita: {'def': '[pp. of tuleti] weighed, estimated, compared, gauged, considered Th.2, 153 (yattakaṁ esā t. what she is worth=lakkhaṇaññūhi parichinna ThA.139); Nd² under ñāta (as syn. of tirita); PvA.52 (in explⁿ of mita, measured). (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuliya: {'def': 'tūliya,【阳】狐蝠，果蝠(a flying fox)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(tūliya?), 【阳】狐蝠，果蝠。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk.?] a flying fox J.VI,537. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tulya: {'def': '& Tuliya (also tulla J IV.102),【形】相等的，可测量的。tulyatā,【阴】平等。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】相等的，可测量的。 ~tā, 【阴】平等。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Tuliya (also tulla J.IV,102) (adj.) [orig. grd. of tuleti] to be weighed, estimated, measured; matched, equal, comparable Sn.377; J.III,324; PvA.87 (=samaka). Mostly in the negative atulya incomparable, not having its equal Sn.83, 683; J.IV,102 (atulla); Miln.249 (atuliyā guṇā), 343 (id.) -- See also tula. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tulā: {'def': '【阴】1.秤，天平，平衡(a weighing pole or stick, scales, balance)。2.杆，椽(a beam or pole for lifting, carrying or supporting, a rafter)。tulākūṭa,【中】错误的秤重(欺诈的称量)。tulādaṇḍa,【阳】秤杆(杆秤上标有刻度单位的木杆部分，起支援物重和秤砣的作用，并在计量后标示出重量)。tulābhūta﹐平衡。tulākūṭa, 虚诈斗秤(false weighing, false weight (often combd with kaṁsakūṭa & mānakūṭa, false coining & false measuring)。tulāputtaka,金匠(a goldsmith)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】秤，天平，椽。 ~kūṭa,【中】错误的秤重（欺诈的称量）。 ~daṇḍa,【阳】秤杆（杆秤上标有刻度单位的木杆部分，起支持物重和秤砣的作用，并在计量后标示出重量）。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [see tuleti. Vedic tulā; Gr. taλas, taλanton (balance, weighing & weight=talentum), toλma; Lat. tollo (lift); Goth. pulan (to carry patiently, suffer); Ger. geduld, etc.] 1. a beam or pole for lifting, carrying or supporting, a rafter Vin.II,122; VvA.188 (+gopānasī); DhsA.107. -- 2. a weighing pole or stick, scales, balance A.I,88; J.I,112; Dh.268; Miln.356 (t. nikkhepanāya). -- 3. fig. measure (“weighing,” cp. tulanā), standard, rate S.II,236 (+pamāṇa).

--kūṭa false weighing, false weight (often comb^d with kaṁsakūṭa & mānakūṭa, false coining & false measuring) D.I,5=A.II,209≈; DA.I,79; DhA.I,239; --daṇḍa the beam or lever of a balance J.I,113; --puttaka a goldsmith (using scales) J.V,424 (or should it be tulādhuttaka? ). (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuma: {'def': '(pron.-adj.) [most likely apostrophe form of ātuma =attā, Sk. ātman self; cp. also Sk. tman oneself. See Oldenberg, KZ. XXV.319. Less likely=Sk. tva one or the other (Kern, Toev. s. v.). Expl^d by Com. to A.III,124 as esa.] oneself, himself, etc.; every or anybody (=quisque) yaṁ tumo karissati tumo va tena paññāyissati (quid quisque faciat) Vin.II,186=A.III,124; Sn.890 (cp. ātumānaṁ V.888), 908; Pv III,2⁴ (=attānaṁ PvA.181). (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tumba: {'def': '【阳、中】容水器（勺或水瓶），斗（量谷粒的器具）。~kaṭāha, 【阳】用葫芦制成的容器。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】容水器(勺或水瓶)，斗(量谷粒的器具)。tumbakaṭāha,【阳】用葫芦制成的容器。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) [possibly=Sk. tumra swollen (of shape), same root as tumula] 1. a kind of water vessel (udaka° DA.I,202), made of copper, wood or a fruit (like a calabash, cocoanut, etc., cp. kaṭāha, E. skull) Vin.I,205 (loha°, kaṭṭha°, phala°); II,114 (°kaṭāha of gourd); J.III,430 (udaka°); IV,114; DhA.II,193 (udaka°). -- 2. a measure of capacity, esp. used for grain J.I,233 (mahā°), 467 (=4 nāḷi p. 468); Miln.102. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tumbī: {'def': '【阴】瓠(long gourd﹐一年生草本植物，茎蔓生，花白色，果实细长，圆筒形，表皮淡绿色，果肉白色，可做蔬菜 (Lagenaria Vulgaris))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】瓠（一年生草本植物，茎蔓生，花白色，果实细长，圆筒形，表皮淡绿色，果肉白色，可做蔬菜 (Lagenaria Vulgaris)）。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tumha: {'def': '(第二人称【代】), 你。 ~hādisa, 【形】你的类型的。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(第二人称【代】), 你。tumhādisa,【形】你的类型的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tumhe: {'def': '[pl. of pron. 2nd pers., see tuvaṁ]. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tumhādisa: {'def': '(pron.-adj.) [tumhe+ādisa] like you, of your kind Sn.459; J.VI,528; DA.I,146. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tumula: {'def': '【形】巨的，大的，盛大的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】巨的，大的，盛大的。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. tumala; to *teu, Lat. tumeo, tumulus, tumultus, etc. E. thumb (swelling), cp. tuṅga & tūla] tumult, uproar, commotion J.VI,247 (by Com. expl^d as “andhakāra,” darkness); Dpvs XVII.100. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tunna: {'def': '¹ [pp. of tudati] struck Th.2, 162 (vyādhimaraṇa° str. with sickness and death). (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [from tudati] any pointed instrument as a stick, a goad, a bolt, or (usually) a needle Vin.I,290 (+aggaḷa, means of fastening); J.I,8 (id.).

--kamma “needle-work,” tailoring, patching, sewing J.IV,40; VI,366; Vism.112. --kāra (& °ka) a (mending) tailor J.IV,38 (v. l. °ka); VvA.251 (°ka); PvA.120); --vāya [Sk. tunnavāya] a “needle-weaver,” a tailor Vin.II,159; J.VI,364, 368 (°vesaṁ gahetvā in the disguise of a tailor); PvA.161 (id.); Pv.II,9¹⁴ (=tunnakāra PvA.120); Miln.331, 365. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tura: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic tura, cp. tvaraṇa] swift, quick; only in composition with °ga, etc., “going swiftly,” denoting the horse; viz. turaga VvA.279; turaṅga VvA.281; Miln.192 (gaja°, etc.), 352 (id.) 364; turaṅgama Dāvs.V,56; turagamana PvA.57. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Turaga: {'def': 'turaṅga, turaṅgama, 【阳】马。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'turaṅga, turaṅgama,【阳】马。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Turati: {'def': '[=tarati²] to be in a hurry, to be quick, hasten J.VI,229 (mā turittho, Prohib.). -- pp. turita. Cp. also tura, etc. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Turita: {'def': '【形】快的，迅速的。 ~taŋ, 【副】很快地，匆忙地。~turitaŋ, 【副】非常快地，很匆忙地。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】快的，迅速的。turitaṁ,【副】很快地，匆忙地。turitaturitaṁ,【副】非常快地，很匆忙地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of turati] hastening, speedy, quick; hastily, in a hurry Sn.1014; J.I,69 (turita-turita); Vv 80⁸ (=sambhamanto VvA.311); DA.I,319; PvA.181. -- aturita leisurely, with leisure, slow J.I,87. -- See also tuvaṭaṁ. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Turiya: {'def': 'tūriya,【中】乐器。五种乐器包括：单面鼓(ātata)，双面鼓(vitata)，弦乐器(atata-vitata)，铙钹类(ghana)，管乐器(susira)。tūriyatāḷitavāditanigghosasaddaṁ, 奏(tāḷita)乐器，演奏(vādita)小声、有声。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Derivation uncertain, probably connected with tuleti, Sk. tūrya] sometimes tūriya (e. g. Vv 5⁴); musical instruments in general, usually referred to as comprising 5 kinds of special instruments (pañcaṅgika t. e. g. Vv 5⁴; 39¹; VvA.181, 183, 210, 257), viz. ātata, vitata, ātata-vitata, ghana, susira (VvA.37). Freq. in phrase nippurisehi turiyehi parivāriyamāna (or paricāriyamāna) “surrounded by (or entertained by) heavenly music” Vin.I,15; D.II,21; A.I,145; J.I,58. -- Vv 38⁴; 41²; 50²⁴, 64⁵; Pv III,8¹; DhA.III,460; VvA.92; PvA.74.

--sadda the sound of music, music Mhvs VII.30. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'tūriya, 【中】乐器。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Turukkha: {'def': '【形】土耳其的。【阳】一种香。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】属于土耳其的。【阳】一种香。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Turī: {'def': 'a hen Th.2, 381 (=migī ThA.254) (v. l. korī, cp. Tamil kōḷi hen). (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tusita: {'def': 'm. =Santusita 兜率, 都率天[六欲天の一]. -kāya兜率天. -bhavana 兜率天宮.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '都西答天。古音译兜率天、睹史多天。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '(‹梵tus满意﹑满足﹑感激)﹐兜率天，欲界天第四天，是菩萨成佛之前最后一世的住处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（天部衆名）都西答，（古音译：）兜率，兜率陀，都率，睹史多', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 'm. = Santusita 兜率, 都率天[六欲天之一]. -kāya 兜率天. -bhavana 兜率天宮.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Tussana: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. toṣaṇa] satisfying, pleasing, in °kāraṇa cause for satisfaction or delight J.III,448. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tussanā: {'def': '(Sk. tosaṇa),【阴】Tussana,【中】满足，欢喜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】 ~na, 【中】满足，欢喜。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tussati: {'def': '(tus满意+ya), 高兴，满意。【过】tussi。【过分】tuṭṭha。【现分】tussanta, tussamāna。【独】tussitvā。KhA.(CS:p.205)︰Atha vā tussatīti tussako, sakena tussako, santena tussako, samena tussakoti santussako.(或者说，「满足」(tussati)是：满意(tussako)、对自己所拥有的东西满意(sakena tussako)、对自己现有的东西满足(santena tussako)、对一切东西一视同仁的满足(samena tussakoti)等为「知足」(santussako)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. tuṣyati to *teus to be quiet, contented, happy] to be satisfied, pleased or happy J.III,280; IV,138; Miln.210. Cp. tuṭṭha (pp.), tuṭṭhi, tuṇhī, tosa, tosana, toseti. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tus + ya), 高兴，满意。【过】 tussi。【过分】 tuṭṭha。【现分】 tussanta,tussamāna。【独】 tussitvā。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tutta: {'def': '【中】导象的矛。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】导象的矛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk tottra, from tudati to prick, push] a pike for guiding elephants, a goad for driving cattle (cp. tomara & patoda) D.II,266 (°tomara); J.IV,310; V,268; Cp. III,5, 2 (t.-vegahata). (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuvantuva: {'def': '(Sk. dvandva),争吵(quarrel, strife)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dvandva, with dialect. t. (cp. tudampati), not (with Müller, P. Gr. 38) through confusion with pron. tvaṁ] quarrel, strife M.I,110, 410. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuvaŋ: {'def': 'tvan (tumha 的【主、单】) 你。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tuvaṁ: {'def': 'tvan (tumha 的【主.单】；Sk. tvaṁ & (Ved.) tuaṁ)你。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Tvaṁ [Sk. tvaṁ & (Ved.) tuaṁ, cp. also part. tu; Gr. tu/, su/; Lat. tu; Goth. pu; E. thou, etc.; Oir. tū] pron. of 2nd pers. in foll. forms & applications:‹-› 1. Full forms: 1. sg.: (a) tv°, tu°, tuyh°: Nom. tvaṁ (in prose & verse) Sn.179, 241, 1029, 1058; J.I,279; II,159; Pv.I,8⁴. Also for Nom. pl. at J.I,391, 395; VI,576; tuvaṁ (in verse) Sn.1064, 1102, 1121; J.III,278, 394; Pv.I,3³; II,3²; also for Acc. Sn.377; Pv.II,8¹; tuyhaṁ (Gen. & Dat.) [Sk. tubhyaṁ] Sn.983, 1030; J.I,279; PvA.3, 60, 73, etc. -- (b) ta°, tay°, taṁ (Acc.) M.I,487; Sn.31, 241, 1043, 1049; J.I,222; II,159; Pv.I,10¹; II,1⁶; tayā (Instr.) Sn.335, 344; J.I,222; Pv.II,3⁶ (=bhotiyā PvA.86): PvA.71; tayi (Loc.) Sn.382; J.I,207; tava (Gen.) Sn.1102, 1110; J.II,153; PvA.106. -- 2. pl.: tumh° [Sk. yuṣm°]: tumhe (Nom. & Acc.) It.31; J.I,221 (Acc.); Pv.I,11². Also as pl. majesticus in addressing one person J.II,102; IV,138; tumhaṁ (Gen.) PvA.58 (for sg.), 78; tumhākaṁ (Gen. Dat.) S.II,65; It.32; J.I,150; II,102; tumhesu (Loc.) J.I,292 (for sg.); tumhehi (Instr.) J.II,154; Pv.I,5¹². -- II. Enclitic forms (in function of an ethical dative “in your interest,” therefore also as possessive Gen. or as instrumental, or any other case of the interested person according to construction). 1. sg. te D.II,127 (Dat.); Sn.76, 120, 1099 (Dat.), 1102 (Dat.); J.I,151; II,159 (Instr.); Pv.I,2³ (Dat.); II,3² (Gen.), 4⁶ (Gen.). -- 2. pl. vo S.III,33 (Instr.) Sn.135, 172 (Dat.), 331 (Dat.); J.I, 222 (Acc.); II,133; III,395 (Gen.). (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuvaṭaŋ: {'def': '【副】很快地。(p148)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tuvaṭaṁ: {'def': 'tvātaṁ, (Sk. tvaritaṁ, cp. Tūrta),【副】快速地(quickly)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Sk. tvaritaṁ, cp. tūrta] quickly A.V,342; J.I,91; II,61; VI,519 (as tvātaṁ); Miln.198; Vism.305, 313. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuvaṭṭeti: {'def': '(for *Sk. dvandvayati, denom. fr. dvandva] to share (with=Loc. or Abl.) Vin.II,10, 124; IV,288. (Page 306)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(for *Sk. dvandvayati, denom. fr. dvandva),分享(to share )。3s.opt. tuvaṭṭeyyuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tuṅga: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. tunga, tum to stand out, cp. Gr. tu/mbos hillock, Lat. tumeo & tumulus, Mir. tomm hill] high, prominent, long J.I,89; III,433 (pabbata, expl^d however by tikhiṇa, sharp, rough); Dāvs. IV.30.

--nāsika one with a prominent or long nose S.II,284; cp. saṇha-tunga-sadisī nāsikā Th.2,258; --vaṇṭaka having a long stalk; N. of a plant J.VI,537. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】高的，显著的。tuṅganāsika,【形】有一个突出的鼻子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】高的，显着的。 ~nāsika, 【形】有一个突出的鼻子。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tuṇhikkhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. tūṣṇīṁ, see next] silent J.IV,25 (=kiñci avadanto). (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuṇhī: {'def': '【无】沈默的，默默地。 ~bhāva, 【阳】静。 ~bhūta, 【形】沈默的。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】沉默的，默默地。tuṇhībhāva,【阳】静。tuṇhībhūta,【形】沉默的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [Sk. tūṣṇīṁ Acc. sg. of fem. abstr. tūṣṇī, used adverbially, from tussati] silently, esp. in phrase tuṇhī ahosi he remained silent, as a sign of consent or affirmative answer (i. e. he had nothing to say against it) D.II,155; A.V,194; Dh.227; Sn.720 (tuṇhī yāti mahodadhi); PvA.117. --bhāva silence, attitude of consent, usually in form. adhivāsesi tuṇhī-bhāvena he agreed Vin.I,17; Sn.p. 104, etc. -- S.II,236, 273 (ariyo t.-bhāvo); M.I,161 (id.); A.IV,153 (id.).-Miln.15; PvA.17, 20, etc.; --bhūta silent Sn.p. 140; Vv 20; DhA 172, etc. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuṇhīra: {'def': 'inorganic form for tūṇīra quiver J.V,128, also as v. l. at J.V,48. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuṇhīyati: {'def': '=taṇhāyati, misspelling at S.II,13. (Page 305)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuṇḍa: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. tuṇḍa, prob. dial. for tunda which belongs to tudati] the beak of birds, the mouth, snout S.V,148 (of a monkey); J.I,222; IV,210; DhA.I,394. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'tuṇḍaka, 【中】鸟嘴，喙，猪嘴。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'tuṇḍaka,【中】鸟嘴(喙)，喙，猪嘴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tuṇḍaka: {'def': '(nt.)=tuṇḍa J.I,222; III,126. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuṇḍika: {'def': 'see ahi°. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuṇḍiya: {'def': '(adj.) [from tuṇḍi] having a beak; n. a pecker, fig. a tax-collector J.V,102 (=adhamma-bali-sādhaka 103). (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tuṇṇakamma: {'def': '【中】针工，缝制。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】针工，缝制，针黹(ㄓˇ)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tuṇṇavāya: {'def': '【阳】裁缝师。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】裁缝师。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tuṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of tussati to be satisfied] pleased, satisfied; often comb^d w. haṭṭha (q. v.) i. e. tuṭṭha -- haṭṭha J.I,19 or haṭṭha-tuṭṭha J.II,240; cp. tuṭṭha-pahaṭṭha J.II,240. -- Sn.683; It.103; J.I,62 (°mānasa), 87, 266 (°citta), 308 (id.); IV,138. -- tuṭṭhabba (grd.) to be pleased with Vin.IV,259. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tussati 的【过分】), 已高兴，已满足。 ~citta, ~mānasa, 【形】有着喜悦的心意。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tussati‘满意’的【过分】), 已高兴，已满足。tuṭṭhacitta, tuṭṭhamānasa,【形】有著喜悦的心意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tuṭṭhi: {'def': '【阴】愉快，欢喜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】愉快，欢喜。(p147)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [from tussati] pleasure, joy, enjoyment S.I,48; Dh.331 (Nom. tuṭṭhī); J.I,60, 207. (Page 304)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tvaŋ: {'def': '参考 tuvaŋ。(p149)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tvaṁ: {'def': '【代】你(you)。参考 tuvaṁ。tvaṁ tvaṁ,你！你！(=你真是的！)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see tuvaṁ. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tvātaṁ: {'def': 'see tuvaṭaṁ. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tya: {'def': '[Sk. tya°, nt. tyad; perhaps to Gr. sήmeron to-day, sh_tes in this year] base of demonstr. pron.=ta°, this, that; Loc. sg. tyamhi J.VI,292; Loc. pl. fem. tyāsu J.V,368 (Com. tāsu). (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tyajja: {'def': '(=te ajja), 他们今天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tyassu: {'def': '=te assu D.II,287, see su³. (Page 307)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tyāhaṁ: {'def': '(=te ahaṁ), 他们。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tyāssa: {'def': 'Tyāssāti te assa.(他们是)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tyāssu: {'def': '(Tyassu =te assu) , 实在他们。(assu是强调词)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tādin: {'def': '(adj. n.) (Nom. tādī & tādi, in cpds. tādi°) [Vedic tādṛś from tad-dṛś of such appearance] such, such like, of such (good) qualities, “ecce homo”; in pregnant sense appl. to the Bhagavant & Arahants, characterized as “such” in 5 ways: see Nd¹ 114 sq.; SnA 202 & cp. Miln.382. tādī: Sn.712, 803 (& 154 tādī no for tādino, see SnA 201 sq.); tādi Sn.488, 509, 519 sq.; Dh.95; Gen. tādino Dh.95, 96; with ref. to the Buddha D.II,157≈ (ṭhitacittasa tādino, in BSk. sthiracittasya tāyinaḥ AvŚ II.199); Vv 18⁶ (explⁿ VvA.95: iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇasampattiyā tādino Satthu: see Nd¹ 114 sq.), of Arahant A.II,34; Sn.154 (or tādī no); Instr. tādinā Sn.697; Miln.382; Acc. tādiṁ Sn.86, 219, 957; :Loc. pl. tādisu Pv.II,9⁷¹ (=iṭṭhādisu tādilakkhaṇappattesu PvA.140, cp. VvA.95). -- See tādisa¹.

--bhāva “such-ness,” high(est) qualification Vism.5, 214. --lakkhaṇa the characteristic of such (a being) J.III,98 (°yoga, cp. nakkhatta-yoga); SnA 200 (°patta); VvA.95 (°sampatti). (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tādina: {'def': '(adj.) [enlarged form of tādin)=tādin, only in Loc. tādine Vv 21² (=tādimhi VvA.106). (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tādisa: {'def': 'tādisaka, tādī, 【形】如此的，如此的品质。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [Vedic tādṛśa from tad-dṛsa=tad-rūpa; a reduction of this form in P. tādin] such like, of such quality or character, in such a condition J.I,151; III,280; Sn.112, 317, 459; Nd² 277 (in expl. of tathāvidha); It.68; Pv.II,9⁴; PvA.69, 72; Miln.382. Also correlative tādisa-tādisa the one-the other VvA.288. -- f. tādisī [Sk. tādṛsī] Pv.I,5⁶ (vaṇijjā). (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'tādisaka, tādī,【形】如此的，如此的品质。Tādin (adj.n.) (Nom.tādī & tādi, in cpds.tādi°) [Vedic tādrw from tad-drw of such appearance] such, such like, of such (good) qualities, 【属】tādino。【工】tādinā。Acc. tādi。Loc.pl. tādisu。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [tvaṁ+disa. Cp. Sk. tvādṛśa] like you J.I,167; V,107. (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tādisaka: {'def': '(adj.)=tādisa¹, of such character Sn.278; It.68. (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tādī: {'def': '如此(高贵者);如是(解脱者)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Tāhaṁ: {'def': 'contraction of 1. taṁ ahaṁ: see ta°; 2. te ahaṁ: see tvaṁ. (Page 301)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tāla: {'def': '[Sk. tāla, cp. Gr. ta_lis & thleqάw (be green, sprout up) Lat. talea shoot, sprout] 1. the palmyra tree (fan palm), Borassus flabelliformis; freq. in comparisons & similes M.I,187; J.I,202 (°vana), 273 (°matta as tall as a palm): VvA.162; PvA.100 (chinnamūlo viya tālo). -- 2. a strip, stripe, streak J.V,372 (=raji).

--aṭṭhika a kernel of the palm fruit DhA.II,53, cp. 60 (°aṭṭhi-khaṇḍa); --kanda a bulbous plant J.IV,46 (=kalamba); --kkhandha the trunk of a palm J.IV,351; VvA.227 (°parimāṇā mukhatuṇḍā: beaks of vultures in Niraya); PvA.56; --cchidda see tāḷa°; --taruṇa a young shoot of the p. Vin.I,189; --pakka palm fruit It.84; --paṇṇa a palm-leaf DhA.I,391; II,249; III,328; Bdhd 62; also used as a fan (tālapattehi kata-maṇḍalavījanī VvA.147) Vv 33⁴³ (Hardy for °vaṇṭha of Goon. ed. p. 30); VvA.147 (v. l. °vaṇṭa q. v.); Nd² 562 (+vidhūpana); --patta a palm-leaf Vin.I,189; VvA.147; --miñja the pith of a p. J.IV,402; --vaṇṭa [Sk. tālavṛṇta] a fan Vin.II,130 (+vidhūpana), 137; J.I,265; VvA.44, cp. °paṇṇa; --vatthu (more correct tālâvatthu=tāla-avatthu) in tālâvatthukata a palm rendered groundless, i. e. uprooted; freq. as simile to denote complete destruction or removal (of passions, faults, etc.). Nearly always in formula pahīna ucchinna-mūla t° anabhāvaṁ-kata “given up, with roots cut out, like a palm with its base destroyed, rendered unable to sprout again” (Kern, Toev. II.88: as een wijnpalm die niet meer geschiķt is om weêr uit te schieten). This phrase was misunderstood in BSk.: M Vastu III,360 has kālavastuṁ. -- The readings vary: tālāvatthu e. g. at M.I,370; S.I,69; IV,84; A.I,135; II,38; J.V,267; tālav° S.III,10; V,327; Th.2, 478 (ThA.286: tālassa chindita‹-› --ṭṭhāna-sadisa); Nd² freq. (see under pahīna); tālāvatthukatā at Vin.III,3. -- In other combⁿ tālāvatthu bhavati (to be pulled out by the roots & thrown away) J.V,267 (=chinnamūla-tālo viya niraye nibbattanti p. 273), cp. M.I,250; --vāra “palm-time” (?) or is it tāḷa° (gong-turn?) DhA.II,49 (note: from tala-pratiṣṭhāyāṁ?). (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】多罗树，扇叶树头榈（扇椰子一种高大的雌雄异株的棕榈树〔树头棕属 Borassus flabellifer〕，产于非洲的热带地区和亚洲，有大型扇形叶片）。 ~ṭṭhika, 【中】扇椰子的核果的核。 ~kanda, 【阳】扇椰子的芽（晒干或煮熟为食物）。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】扇叶树头榈的树干。 ~pakka,【中】扇椰子的核果。 ~paṇṇa, 【中】扇椰子的树叶（用为写作）。 ~patta,【中】整片扇椰子的树叶（用为盖屋的材料等）。 ~vaṇṭa, 【中】扇子（直译：扇椰子的叶柄，这是〔语法〕误用 tālavaṭṭa =以扇椰子叶制成的圆形物）。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】多罗树、哆罗树，属於棕榈科，学名(Palmae)，单子叶植物，约217属，2500种，大部份分布於热带和亚热带地区，高达三十多公尺的巨大「草」，生长於印度、锡兰，顶部长出直径三公尺的掌状大树叶，可作伞、扇、屋顶材料。作为刻字书写的棕榈树是(talipot；Corypha umbraculifera)。tālaṭṭhika,【中】多罗果。tālakanda,【阳】多罗果的芽(晒乾或煮熟为食物)。tālakkhandha,【阳】多罗树树干。tālapakka,【中】多罗树的核果。tālapaṇṇa,【中】椰子树叶(palm-leaf通常做扇)。tālapatta,【中】多罗树叶(palm-leaf用为盖屋的材料等)。tālavaṇṭa,【中】扇子(直译：多罗树的叶柄，这是〔语法〕误用 tālavaṭṭa =以多罗树叶制成的圆形物)。S.22.3./III,10.：te Tathāgatassa pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṁkatā āyatiṁ anuppādadhammā.(那些(诸法)已被如来所断，切断其根，截多罗树头，作成乌有，成为未来不再生的诸法。) SA.12.35.：Tālāvatthukatānīti tālavatthu viya katāni, puna aviruhaṇaṭṭhena matthakacchinnatālo viya samūlaṁ tālaṁ uddharitvā tassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṁ viya ca katānīti attho.(截多罗树头：如截多罗树头，切断多罗树顶部，包括多罗树根的站立处连根拔起而不成长。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tālu: {'def': '【阳】上颚，硬腭。 ~ja, 【形】上颚音（即：舌面前音，由舌面前部和硬腭前部构成阻碍而发出的辅音。发音时，舌面前部抬起，靠近或抵触硬腭前部，使气流在此受阻。如普通话的〔ʨ〕(j)、〔ʨ‘〕(q)、〔ɕ〕(x)。或舌面中音，由舌面中部和硬腭中部构成阻碍而发出的辅音。发音时，舌面中部抬起，靠近或抵触硬腭中部，使气流在此受阻。如山东烟台话，“鸡”读〔ci〕、“期”读〔c‘i〕、“稀”读〔ʕi〕，声母均为舌面中音）。(p145)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. tālu, see tala] the palate Sn.716; J.I,419; Vism.264 (°matthaka top of p.); PvA.260. (Page 300)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】上颚(palate)。tāluja,【形】上颚音(即：舌面前音，由舌面前部和硬齶前部构成阻碍而发出的辅音。发音时，舌面前部抬起，靠近或抵触硬齶前部，使气流在此受阻。如普通话的〔tә〕(j)、〔tә ‘〕(q)、〔ә〕(x)。或舌面中音，由舌面中部和硬齶中部构成阻碍而发出的辅音。发音时，舌面中部抬起，靠近或抵触硬齶中部，使气流在此受阻。如山东烟台话，“鸡” 读〔ci〕、“期”读〔c’i〕、“稀”读〔ςi〕，声母均为舌面中音)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tālāvatthukata: {'def': '【形】提出无根据的，连根拔起的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】提出无根据的，连根拔起的。(p145)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tālīsa: {'def': '(nt.) (also tālissa J.IV,286, tālīsaka Miln.338) [cp. Sk. tālī, tālīśa & talāśā] the shrub Flacourtia cataphracta & a powder or ointment obtained from it Vin.I,203 (+tagara); J.IV,286 (id.); Miln.338. (Page 300)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (No. 40) is short for cattālīsa, e.g. Ap. 103, 234 and passim. (Page 300)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tāma: {'def': '[Sk. tāma] desire, longing, greed in tāmatamadasaṅgha-suppahīna Th.1, 310, an epithet of frogs, which perhaps (with Kern, Toev. II.88) is to be read as tāma-tamata-suppahita; “horribly greedy” (Kern, gruwelijk vraatzuchtig). (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. tāma), 欲望(desire, longing, greed in tāmatamadasaṅgha- suppahīna)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tāmbūlī: {'def': '【阴】蒌叶藤（一种缠绕的胡椒 (Piper Betle) 产于印度、马来亚地区的一种四季常青的攀缘或蔓生灌木，通常用其卵圆形叶子来包裹槟椰子）。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】蒌叶藤(betel creeeper﹐一种缠绕的胡椒(Piper Betle)产於印度、马来亚地区的一种四季常青的蔓生灌木，常用其卵圆形叶子来包裹槟椰子)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tāpana: {'def': '【中】烧焦，自我折磨，使痛苦。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '燃烧地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '(nt.) [from tāpeti] burning, scorching, roasting; fig. tormenting, torture, self-mortification VvA.20 (aggimhi t. udake vā temanaṁ). Cp. ā°; upa°; pari°. (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(from tāpeti),【中】1.烧焦，自我折磨，使痛苦(burning, scorching, roasting)。2.燃烧地狱，八大地狱之一。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tāpasa: {'def': '[from tapa & tapas] one who practises tapas, an ascetic (brahmin). Eight kinds are enum^d at DA.I,270 & SnA 295. -- J.II,101, 102; V,201; PvA.153; °pabbajjā the life of an a. J.III,119; DhA.IV,29; DA.I,270. -- f. tāpasī a female ascetic Mhvs VII.11, 12. (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】苦行者。 ~sī, 【阴】女苦行者。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(from tapa & tapas),【阳】苦行者(one who practises tapas, an ascetic (brahmin))。tāpasapabbajjā 。tāpasī,【阴】女苦行者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tāpeti: {'def': '[Sk. tāpayati, Caus. to tapati] to burn out, scorch, torment, fig. root out, quench Sn.451 (attānaṁ); J.V, 267 (janapadaṁ); VvA.114 (kilesaṁ t. in expl. of tapassin). Cp. pari°. (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(tapati 的【使】；Sk. tāpayati), 使烧焦，折磨，使激动(to burn out, scorch, torment)。【过】tāpesi。【过分】tāpita。【现分】tāpenta, tāpayamāna。【独】tāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(tapati 的【使】), 使烧焦，折磨，使激动。【过】 tāpesi。【过分】tāpita。【现分】 tāpenta, tāpayamāna。【独】 tāpetvā。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Tārakā: {'def': 'tārā,【阴】星。tāragaṇa,【阳】一大群星。tārapati,【阳】月亮。tārapatha,【阳】天空。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'tārā, 【阴】星。 ~gaṇa, 【阳】一大群星。 ~pati,【阳】月亮。 ~patha, 【阳】天空。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. tārakā] 1. a star, a planet: osadhī viya tārakā like the morning-star (Venus) Vv 9²=Pv.II,1¹⁰; -- J.I,108; tāraka-rūpa the light (or sparkling) of the stars D.III,85, 90; S.III,156=It.19; S.V,44; VvA.79; Dhs.617. -- 2. fig. sparkling, glitter, twinkle; akkhi° the pupil of the eye M.I,80; udaka° sparkling of the water ibid. (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tāreti: {'def': '(tarati 的【使】), 使渡过，帮助度过，协助。【过】tāresi。【过分】 tārita。【现分】 tārenta, tārayamāna。【独】 tāretvā。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(tarati 的【使】), 使渡过，帮助度过，协助。【过】tāresi。【过分】tārita。【现分】tārenta, tārayamāna。【独】tāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [Caus. of tarati²] to make haste Th.1, 293. (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Caus. of tarati¹] to make cross, to help over, to bring through, save, help, assist Sn.319 (pare tārayetuṁ), 321 (so tāraye tattha bahū pi aññe); It.123 (tiṇṇo tarayataṁ varo: “one who is through is the best of those who can help through”); J.I,28 (V.203). aor. atārayi Sn.539, 540 & ṭāresi Sn.545. (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tāretu: {'def': '【阳】帮助越过的人，救星。(p144)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】帮助越过的人，救星。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tārā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. tārā=Gr. a)stήr, a)ζton (=Lat. astrum, in E. disaster), Lat. stella, Goth. staírnō, Ohg. sterro (:E. star), perhaps loan word from Semitic sources] a star, a planet Sn.687 (tārāsabha the lord, lit. “the bull” of the stars, i. e. the Moon).

--gaṇa (tāra°) the host of stars Pv.II,9⁶⁷ (cando va t.-gaṇe atirocati). --maṇivitāna “star-jewel-awning”; canopy of jewelled stars Vism.76. (Page 299)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Tāsa: {'def': '【阳】恐怖，恐惧，发抖。(p145)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[see tasati²] terror, trembling, fear, fright, anxiety S.III,57; J.I,342; III,177, 202; Miln.24. Cp. san°. (Page 300)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】恐怖，恐惧，发抖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Tāsana: {'def': '【中】惊吓，刺穿。(p145)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】惊吓，刺穿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】